En 428 Install

428XL
V5.0
Installation Manual
Ref. No. 0311428 January 11, 2011
Ahead of the Curve SM

To contact SERCEL
Europe Larbert, U. K. (Sercel England Ltd.)
Nantes, France Customer Support
Sales; Customer Support; Tel: +44 1324 556 777, Fax: +44 1324 556 222
Manufacturing & Repair. Trondheim, Norway (Optoplan AS)
B.P. 30439, 16 rue de Bel Air Tel: +47 73820500, Fax: +47 73820599
44474 Carquefou Cedex Russia
Tel: +33 2 40 30 11 81, Fax: +33 2 40 30 19 48 Customer Support; Repair.
Hot-Line: Land: +33 2 40 30 58 88 Moscow, Russia
Marine: +33 2 40 30 59 59 Tel: +7 495 644 08 05, Fax: +7 495 644 08 04
Navigation: +33 2 40 30 69 87 E-mail: repair.cis@geo-mail.org
E-mail: sales.nantes@sercel.com support.cis@geo-mail.org
customersupport.land@sercel.com Surgut, Russia
customersupport.marine@sercel.com Tel: +7 3462 28 92 50
customersupport.navigation@sercel.com North America
repair.france@sercel.com Houston, USA
streamer.repair@sercel.com Sales; Customer Support;
www.sercel.com Manufacturing & Repair;
St Gaudens, France Tel: +1 281 492 66 88, Fax: +1 281 579 75 05
Vibrator Customer Support; Hot-Line: +1 281 492 66 88
Vibrator Manufacturing & Repair; E-mail:
Streamer Manufacturing & Repair. sales.houston@sercel.com
Tel: +33 5 61 89 90 00, Fax: +33 5 61 89 90 33
HOU_Customer.Support@sercel.com
Hot Line: +33 5 61 89 90 91
HOU_Training@sercel.com
E-mail: sg_sav@sercel.com
Calgary
vspsupport@sercel.com
Sales; Customer Support; Manufacturing.
Les Ulis, France Tel: +1 403 275 3544, Fax: +1 403 295 1805
Sales; Customer Support E-mail:
Tel: +33 1 69 93 83 60, Fax: +33 1 69 81 78 09 Cal_Customer.Support@sercel.com
E-mail: vspsupport@sercel.com Middle East
Hot Line: +33 6 15 54 13 96 Dubai, U. A. E.
Brest, France Sales, Customer Support, Repair.
Sales; Customer Support Tel: +971 4 8832142, Fax: +971 4 8832143
Tel: +33 2 98 05 29 05; Fax: +33 2 98 05 52 41 Hot Line: +971 50 6451752
E-mail: sales.nantes@sercel.com E-mail: dubai@sercel.com
Toulon, France repair.dubai@sercel.com
Sales; Customer Support Far East
Tel: +33 4 94 21 69 92; Fax: +33 4 94 21 73 44 Beijing, P. R. of China
E-mail: sales.msd@sercel.com R & D.
support.msd@sercel.com Tel: +86 106 43 76 710, Fax: +86 106 43 76 367
Toulouse, France E-mail: support.china@geo-mail.com
Sales; Customer Support repair.china@geo-mail.com
Tel: +33 5 61 34 80 74; Fax:+33 5 61 34 80 66 Xian, P. R. of China
E-mail: support@metrolog.com Manufacturing & Repair.
sales@metrolog.com, info@metrolog.com Tel / Fax: +86 29 8222 9504
Alfreton, U. K. Xushui, P. R. of China
Streamer Manufacturing & Repair; Manufacturing & Repair.
Customer Support. Tel:+86 312 8648355, Fax:+86 312 8648441
Tel: +44 1 773 605 078, Fax: +44 1 773 541 778
Singapore
E-mail: streamer.repair@sercel.com
Streamer Manufacturing & Repair;
Liphook, U. K. Customer Support.
Quest Geosolutions Ltd Tel:+65 64 17 70 00, Fax:+65 6 545 1418
Tel: +44 1 428 751565, Fax: :+44 1428 751566
E-mail: enquiries@qgsl.com
428XL Installation Manual
In no event shall SERCEL be liable for incidental or consequential damages or related expenses
resulting from the use of this product, or arising out of or related to this manual or the information
contained in it, even if SERCEL has been advised, or knew or should have known of the possibility of
such damages.
The information included in this documentation is believed to be accurate and reliable. However,
SERCEL reserves the right to make changes to its products or specifications at any time, without notice,
in order to improve design or performance and to supply the best possible product. This documentation
does not form in any way a contractual agreement of sales promise on the part of SERCEL.
Software mentioned in this documentation is sold under a precise licence agreement and as such the
documentation may cover technical areas for which the user may not have a final licence.
No part of this documentation, or any of the information included herein may be modified or copied in
any form or by any means without the prior written consent of SERCEL.
© 2005 Sercel. All Rights Reserved.

Printed in France.
Sercel, 428XL, 428XLS, AIB, DPG, DSD, DSU1, DSU3, DSU3-428, e-428, eSQC Pro, FDPA428, FDU,
FDU-428, HSU, LandPro Bin, LAUL, LAUL-428, LAULS, LAUX, LAUX-428, LAUXS, Link, LL428,
LLIU, LLX400, LRU, LSI, LSS, LT428, LX, MGA, MRU, MSI, QT428, SGA, TMS428, TMU428, VE432,
VE464, VQC88, WPSR are all trademarks of Sercel. All rights reserved.
DSUGPS: US Patent 7,117,094 B2.
UNIX is either a registered trademark or trademark of The Open Group in the United States and/or other
countries.Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Other product and company names mentioned
herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
January 11, 2011 3

Revision history
Chapters or
Date of
pages
revision Description of revision or reason for change
affected
Nov. 2005 V 1.0 release
Dec. 2006 V 2.0 release.
Jan. 2007 p. 181 NAS model D.
Dec. 2007 V 3.0 release.
Apr. 2008 p. 47, 248, Transverse cable length (125 m. max.)
255, 256
May 2008 p. 412 LAUX-428 XDEV1 pinout.
June 2008 p. 56 XDEV cable orientation on 428-Lite box.
Sep. 2008 p. 24 - Added DSU3BV-428 and DSU1-428.
p. 47 - GPS cord part number
p. 252 - DSU3BV-428 and DSU1-428 spacing.
Oct. 2008 p. 382 - GPS cord part Number.
p 404 - Updated Blaster signal specifications (EGO, TB, FO).
Nov. 2008 p. 382 Later-design Ethernet Radio Bridge interface box.
Feb. 2009 V4.0
Oct. 2009 p. 103, 149 - Server Id.
p. 391 - For maximum link capacity, Ethernet radio bridge must be
disarmed.
Dec. 2009 p. 30, 253 AXCUL-428.
Dec. 2009 p. 52, 238, DSUGPS.
251
Jan. 2010 p. 423 HSU to SGDS wiring.
Feb. 2010 p. 235 - Diameter of hole for DSU1-428 and DSU3-428.
p. 240 - Diameter of hole for DSU3BV-428.
Mar. 2010 p 56 - Do not connect 428 Lite box until server is up and running.
p. 258 to 261 - Updated FDU-to-FDU2S cabling.
Apr. 2010 p. 175 Note about preformatted cartridges and 3592 drive.
Sep. 2010 p. 210 - CN3e clean boot procedure.
p. 234 - Max. 300 DSUs on either side of a LAUX-428.
4 January 11, 2011

Chapters or
Date of
pages
revision Description of revision or reason for change
affected
Dec. 2010 Release 5.0
Dec. 2010 p. 251 Max number of DSUGPS units between LAUs.
Jan. 2011 p. 42 Changing LCI-428 IP address.
January 11, 2011 5

6 January 11, 2011

Software Licence Agreement
Sercel is willing to license the accompanying soft- (f) Use the Software to violate the terms and
ware package to you only upon the condition that conditions of any other software licensing
you accept all the terms contained in this licence agreement between Licensee and any third
agreement. parties.
Read carefully the following terms and conditions If Licensee is located in a country which requires
before opening the software media package. By registration of software licences with govern-
opening the software media package you agree to ment authorities, Licensee shall be responsible
the terms and conditions of this agreement. for meeting all requirements of such registration.
I. SOFTWARE LICENCE II. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS

Software acquired under these terms and condi- Licensee acknowledges that the Software is and
tions is not sold, but merely licensed under the pro- remains the property of Licensor and contains
visions of this Article I. trade secret information and Know How proprie-
tary to Licensor and that any breach of the provi-
1.Licence Grant: Subject to the terms and condi-
sions of this Article by Licensee would cause
tions of this Agreement, Licensor grants to Li-
Licensor to suffer immediate and irreparable
censee a personal, non exclusive, non
harm. In the event of such breach, Licensor shall
transferable licence to use the object code ver-
have, in addition to any and all remedies at law, the
sion of the Software solely for licensee's own in-
right to an injunction, specific performance or oth-
ternal use.
er equitable relief.
2.Number And Type Of Licences: In consider-
Title to Software remains with Licensor at all
ation of payment of the licence fee, Licensor will
times and no title or ownership of Software is
provide Licensee with (a) password(s) corre-
transferred under this Agreement. Licensee shall
sponding to the Software.
take no action that might impair any right, title or
3.Use Of Software: In support of its own internal interest of Licensor in or to the Software. Licensee
use of the software, Licensee may only: shall not have any rights in or to any trademark or
(a) Use the object code version of the Software, trade name owned by Licensor with respect to the
(b) Copy the Software into machine readable or Software.
printed form for backup purposes only (2 Licensee shall not disclose the Software to any
copies maximum), provided that all copies third party without Licensor's prior written agree-
and partial copies include Licensor's copy- ment. Licensee shall inform all its employees hav-
right notices, ing access to the Software of the Confidential
(c) Except with regard to training books and nature of the Software and their obligations with
materials, copy the documentation as re- respect thereto. Licensee shall ensure that its em-
quired for Licensee's own use, provided that ployees and any third party to whom disclosure is
all copies shall include Licensor's copyright authorised strictly abide by the confidentiality re-
notices. strictions set forth in this Agreement.
Except as expressly provided herein, Li-
censee may not: III. WARRANTY
(a) Copy, modify, merge, reverse engineer, re- Software warranty period is ninety (90) days from
verse assemble, decompile, or disassemble the date of installation. Licensor warrants that
the Software, Software was developed with reasonable diligence
(b) Remove any labels or notices from the Soft- and skill and that it substantially conforms to pub-
ware, lished documentation. Licensor's sole responsibil-
(c) Distribute, publish, transfer, sublicense, or ity under this warranty shall be to correct or
make the Software or program documenta- replace any Software which does not so conform,
tion available to other organisations or per- provided that Licensee notifies Licensor in writing
sons, during the warranty period. Licensee has had the
(d) Create or attempt to create derivative works opportunity to inspect Software: except as ex-
from the Software, pressly provided above, Software is deemed to be
(e) Transfer the Software to another Hardware accepted "AS IS" without further warranty.
without approval of Licensor and payment The warranty does not cover, and Licensor shall
of the applicable fee, not be responsible for any failure or defect and re-
sulting damage caused by installation or use of
428XL Installation Manual 7

January 11, 2011
Software Licence Agreement
Software not furnished by Licensor, accident (in- Licensee may terminate the Agreement at any
cluding damage during shipment), neglect, misuse time. Licensor may terminate the Agreement if Li-
or abuse, or exposure to conditions beyond the en- censee fails to comply with the terms and condi-
vironmental power and operating constraints spec- tions thereof, provided Licensee has been given
ified by Licensor. The warranty does not cover ten (10) days notice prior to termination, during
defects or failure resulting from modification or which Licensee has failed to cure the breach to Li-
installation by someone other than Licensor or its censor's reasonable satisfaction. Upon termina-
authorised representative. tion, Licensee shall return to Licensor all Software
and copies thereof, including merged portions in
IV. PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS any form, or provide written confirmation that
Licensor shall defend, at its expense, any claim or
Software and such copies/portions have been de-
suit brought against Licensee alleging that Soft-
stroyed. Termination is without prejudice to any
ware infringes upon a patent, copyright or other
other rights or remedies available to Licensor at
proprietary right, and shall pay all costs and dam-
contract or at law.
ages finally awarded, provided that Licensor is
given prompt written notice of such claim, reason- Termination does not relieve Licensee of its obli-
able information and assistance, and sole authority gation to pay the licence fee(s), the maintenance
to defend or settle the claim. In the defence or set- fees up to and including the running period, as well
tlement of the claim, Licensor may obtain for Li- as any other charges and fees due to Licensor. In
censee the right to continue using Software, addition, if any act by Licensee causes the cancel-
replace or modify Software (without substantially lation or rescheduling of Licensee's order, Licens-
changing the original functions of Software) so ee shall reimburse Licensor for the resultant costs
that it becomes non-infringing, or, if such reme- incurred.
dies are not reasonably available, grant Licensee a VII. GENERAL
refund for Software (net of reasonable deprecia- Except for the obligation of payment, neither party
tion) upon its return. Licensor shall not have any shall be liable for non-performance caused by cir-
liability if the infringement is based upon modifi- cumstances beyond their reasonable control in-
cations of Software or the use or sale of Software cluding, but not limited to, work stoppages, delay
in combination with products not furnished by Li- in transportation, delay in delivery by vendors,
censor. fire, civil disobedience, war or acts of nature.
V. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Except as provided herein, this Agreement consti-
Except as expressly set forth herein, there are no tutes the entire agreement between the parties with
representations of warranties by Licensor, ex- respect to the subject matter hereof, and shall su-
pressed or implied, including but not limited to im- persede and cancel all prior agreements or under-
plied warranties of merchantability and fitness for standings either oral or written, including any
a particular purpose. Licensor does not warrant different, conflicting or additional terms and con-
that the operation of Software shall be uninterrupt- ditions which may appear on any contract, pur-
ed or error free, that the functions contained in the chase order or form submitted by Licensee.
Software shall meet Licensee's requirements or During the term of this Agreement, the relation-
operate in the combinations selected by Licensee, ship of Licensor to Licensee is that of an indepen-
or that every error or defect may be corrected pur- dent contractor only.
suant to the warranty or maintenance services. In This Agreement shall be governed, construed and
no event will Licensor or its suppliers be liable for interpreted in accordance with the laws of France.
indirect, consequential, incidental, punitive, spe- The Tribunal du Commerce of Nantes (Trade
cial or exemplary damages (including loss of data, Court of Nantes) France, shall have the exclusive
production, profits or use of hardware) to Licensee jurisdiction to resolve any dispute or disagreement
or any other party. Under no circumstances will between the parties relating to this Agreement.
Licensor or its suppliers be liable for damages ex-
ceeding the amount of the licence fee paid for All notices, authorisations and requests in connec-
Software to Licensor by Licensee. These limitation with this Agreement shall be in writing and
tions will apply regardless of the form of action, shall be deemed given on the day they are received
whether in contract or tort. by hand, first class mail, "FAX" or "TELEX" at the
addresses herein or thereafter notified by either
VI. TERMINATION party to the other in writing.
8 428XL Installation Manual

January 11, 2011
Table
of
Contents
Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
1 Introduction
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
The 428XL system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ground equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Central unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Peripheral equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
IT topology information for 428XL deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Local user topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Intranet user topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Internet user topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Intranet/Internet user topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
2 Hardware installation
Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Identifying Ethernet interface ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
AC Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
LCI-428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Shock-mount parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

January 11, 2011
Table of Contents
Cabling to VE464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Cabling to VE432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Shooting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Multimodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Remote input panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
DSUGPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Master/Slave configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
428XL Lite break-out box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Server computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Shock-mount parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Server computer connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Tape drive interface cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Server hardware installation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Client computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
LCD display anchoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3 Server software installation

Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer . . . . . . . . . .71
428XL-40000 desktop computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
428Lite 32-bit laptop computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
428Lite 64-bit laptop computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Installing 428XL server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Installing 428XL server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Server ID code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Saving 428XL parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Uninstalling 428XL server software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Server software patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Firmware upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

January 11, 2011
Table of Contents
Using the Line window’s Download setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Upgrading through serial (XDEV) port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Terminal window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Terminal window on a serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
USB stick management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
4 Client software installation

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Installing RedHat Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Hardware specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
User account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Linux user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Windows user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Installing Client software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Setting the computer’s IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Linux Client host computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Windows Client host computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Client software patches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Remote access to Server from a Linux Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Remote access to Server from a Windows Client . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Installing Cygwin software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Configuring Cygwin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Working with Cygwin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
First-time log-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Licence code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Uninstalling 428XL Client software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

January 11, 2011
Table of Contents
5 Peripherals
Screen management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Installing a screen management driver for Linux . . . . . . . . . .152
Multi-screen management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Updating the NVIDIA driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Plotters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Mount parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
VERITAS V12 plotter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
V12 / 428XL settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Ethernet port upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Tape drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Tape drive shock-mount assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Supported tape drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
FUJI 3490-E or 3590 SCSI address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Resetting M2488 T4 drive initialisation parameters . . . . . . . .168
LTO drive SCSI address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
CYPRESS 3490E-DIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
3592 cartridge drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
NAS server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Shock-mount assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Attaching a NAS system to the 428XL local network . . . . . . .183
Setting up NAS parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Attaching a 428XL NAS system to another network . . . . . . .189
Operating System software reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
NAS system rescue mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
FTP server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Installing server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Server settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

January 11, 2011
Table of Contents
MDR or RVT300 virtual tape recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

Vehicle Tracking box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
6 Handheld PC software
Installing CN3e PC applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Intermec CN3e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Resetting the CN3e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Installing 428XL software on CN3e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Installing shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Installing GoBook PC applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
GoBook PC touch screen calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
GoBook Q200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Installing 428XL software on Q200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
GoBook Q200 backup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
GoBook Q200 restore procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
7 Field equipment deployment

Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Wireline telemetry equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
FDU-428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
SH Sercel geophone string connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
DSU-428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
LAUL-428 and LAUX-428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Transverse Fibre Optics extender (TFOI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Transverse Repeater (TREP-428) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
End-of-line plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Power supply requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
LAU spacing Vs FDU spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
LAU spacing Vs DSU spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

January 11, 2011
Table of Contents
Auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

Wireline auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Vibrator signal recording (VSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Spread layout conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Submersible (ULS) field electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Handling and service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Power supply requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Connecting an LSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Connecting an HSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Quick Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
8 LT428 Line Tester

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Connecting the handheld PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Launching the LT428 application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
The main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Parameter setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Test functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
The LT428 Position menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
The General Parameters menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
The Test Limits menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Running Line tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
LAUL Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Form Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

January 11, 2011
Table of Contents
Xmit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

Save Receiver Tilt Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Instrument Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Field Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Running Transverse tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Form Transverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Xmit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Working with results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Error details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Searching through the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Saving and exporting results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Playing back a result file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Auxiliary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Tap Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Serial port parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
The Link configuration update tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
9 428XL Radio telemetry

Radio telemetry equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
The LRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
The LAUR-428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Half-duplex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Frequency management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

January 11, 2011
Table of Contents
Desensitization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Typical setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Basic Radio Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Basic Radio Line Segment Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Radio relay in series connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
OWFD1.5 antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Rooftop-mount whip antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Directional antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Antenna mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
MTB1590S list of material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Mast installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Deployment using the FDPA428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
The Field Deployment Aid Terminal for LRU and LAUR . . .345
Connecting the FDPA428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
LRU Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
The LRU Set Parameters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
LRU Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
The Utility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
The LRU Loop Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Set Radio Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
The Wakeup/Sleep Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
LAUR Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
The LAUR Set Parameters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
The LAUR Loop Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Main Menu Pulldown Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Closing the FDPA428 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368

January 11, 2011
Table of Contents
10 LLX400 laser link

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
The LXIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
The laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Setting up an LLX400 laser link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Laser transceiver (Terescope) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
11 Ethernet Radio Bridge

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Moving an Ethernet Radio Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Arming the Installation Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Changing the IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Advanced settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Licence and frequency regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
12 Connectors and cables

LCI-428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
BLASTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
XDEV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
428-Lite Break-Out Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Field electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
FDU-428 input connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
LAUL-428 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
LAUX-428 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

January 11, 2011
Table of Contents
ULS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
SGD-S Blaster Controller to 428XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
ShotPro to 428XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
ShotPro I to 428XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Macha to 428XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
BoomBox to 428XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
LSI/HSU cable – P/N 512000196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
HSU/Blaster controller cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
ULS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
PC XDEV cable P/N 1C50078588 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Mater/Slave Y cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
A Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

January 11, 2011
Chapter
1 Introduction
In this chapter:
• Overview (page 20)

• The 428XL system (page 21)
• IT topology information for 428XL deployment (page 33)

January 11, 2011
1 Introduction
Overview
Overview
The documentation coming with the 428XL system consists of the
following manuals:
• Installation Manual (0311428): this manual, providing an
introduction to the 428XL system, installation information, a few
instructions for the operator to get started, and reference information
that will help you select a 428XL configuration tailored to your
needs.
• User’s Manual Volume 1 (0311430): describes the parameters
displayed on the system’s Graphic User Interface (GUI) and how to
use each window.
• User’s Manual Volume 2 (0311431): contains information on logged
data and on interfaces (description of Input/Output formats, including
the SEGD format).
• User’s Manual Volume 3 (0311432): contains reference information
(filter charts, theory of tests, technical data, release notes,
specifications).
• Technical Manual (0311429): contains maintenance and repair
information, including operating instructions for using the system’s
testers.
This manual assumes you are familiar with window-driven systems and
you know how to work with windows, including how to use a mouse
and standard menus and commands.
With a PDF file reader (Adobe Acrobat Reader) on a computer you can
view this manual direct from the 428XL CDROM’s DOC directory.

January 11, 2011
Introduction
The 428XL system

The 428XL system
1
Sercel’s 428XL seismic acquisition system is specifically designed to
address the growing demands of the geophysical industry for even
larger channel counts, high performance digital receivers, and greater
layout flexibility, while improving conventional operations. The 428XL
gives you the power to do more:
• More channels for the highest-possible resolution data.
• Greater electrical efficiency for longer battery life and less downtime.
• More layout capabilities to avoid obstacles in the field, and a wider
range of compatible software and hardware platforms.
• The 428XL makes it easy for crews to shoot the most accurate data in
the least amount of time, with the fewest possible trucks and people
in the field.
This system offers the most advanced technology designed to be the
most reliable and most productive system in the field. It has benefited
from the vast field experience of the 408UL. The 428XL maintains
compatibility with the 408UL field equipment.
The 428XL builds on the 400 Series’ proven technology, reliability and
efficiency with hardware and software designed to enable the largest
channel count operations in the industry. With a capacity of 100,000
channels – backed by a telemetry structure that boosts by 500 percent
the number of channels a wire transverse cable can address in real-time
at 2 ms – the 428XL gives you outstanding accuracy, speed and ease of
use for even the largest surveys.

January 11, 2011
1 Introduction
The 428XL system
428 Link LAUL

LAUX
428XL client
NAS servers
Plotter
LCI-428 428XL server
LRU
LAUR
Figure 1-1 The 428XL system

January 11, 2011
Introduction
The 428XL system

Ground equipment
428 Link
1
Similar in architecture
to the 408 Link, the
428 Link is a Figure 1-2 FDU-428 Link
combination of Field
Digitizing Units (FDUs) and cables that can be handled as a single
lightweight unit. The length and type of cable as well as the number of
FDUs and their intervals are user-defined. The sensors connect directly
into the FDU eliminating any significant analogue path within the
recording system.
LAUX-428 and LAUL-428

LAUX-428
The line voltage provided to the
FDUs and DSUs is supplied
through the Link’s cables from
dedicated field units called
LAULs. The power source is a
conventional 12-volt battery with a
typical capacity of 60 amp/hour.
The LAUX is used to connect each
line in a 3D spread to the higher
speed transverse connection to the LAUL-428
recording system. The LAUL and

LAUX also ensure the following
functions:
• Consolidation of the FDUs or
DSUs data for transmission to
the recording system;
• Buffering of local data;
Figure 1-3 LAUX and LAUL
• Processing of instrument tests.

January 11, 2011
1 Introduction
The 428XL system
DSU-428
The Digital Sensor Unit (DSU) is an integrated package including
station electronics and one or three digital accelerometers based on the
MEMS (Micro-machined Electro-Mechanical Sensor) technology. It
offers the same Link concept as the standard FDU link, plus fully
integrated digital accelerometers as part of the electronics package.
Two types of electronics are available:
• DSU3 (3-axis: vertical, horizontal inline, horizontal crossline),
• DSU1 (1-axis: vertical acceleration).
DSU3-428 DSUGPS
DSU3BV-428
DSU1-428
Figure 1-4
The 3-axis type comes in three design versions: DSU3-428 and

DSUGPS (stakeless) designed to be planted, and DSU3BV-428
designed to be buried.
DSU-428 links can be used jointly with analog-sensor units (FDU-428,
etc.) within the same spread under the control of a single 428XL central
unit. See Field equipment deployment (page 225) for details. The DSU is
compatible with the LAUL, LAULS, LAUM, LRU, LT428, LSS, fiber
optics or wireline extender cables, and QC tools (eSQC-Pro, SGA).
All inherent errors attributable to the construction of the DSU are
corrected by the LAU that controls it. Tilt errors attributable to planting
are not corrected.

January 11, 2011
Introduction
The 428XL system

The DSUGPS includes a dual-antenna GPS receiver that calculates its
own absolute position and the azimuth, making deployment quicker (no
staking is required) and eliminating the risk of human errors (stake
1
identification, verticality, azimuth). Once the required positioning
accuracy is achieved, the built-in GPS receiver is automatically turned
off to save battery life. Note that the DSUGPS requires the use of a later-
design LCI-428 attached to a Novatel ProPak V3 GPS receiver. Also, a
16-Mb/s line bit rate is required.
The DSU cannot be tested with a TMS428 (a specific tester must be
used for testing or troubleshooting).
428XL Transverse Cable

Based on a 100 Mbps Ethernet protocol, the 428XL transverse cable is
capable of handling 10,000 channels at 2 ms in real-time with only one
Crossing Unit (LAUX) per line. With the 428XL, the deployment of
such a large amount of channels in the field has never been so easy and
has never required such little equipment.
Either a conventional cable or a Transverse Fibre Optics Interface
(TFOI) extender can be used.
Fibre optics cable
(up to 10 km)
Figure 1-5 TFOI fibre optics interface and cable
Radio Telemetry Option

The radio telemetry option increases layout flexibility, allowing seismic
crews to avoid all types of obstacles and achieve greater field efficiency.
It includes a data acquisition unit (LAUR-428), and a transceiver unit
(LRU) which connects either to a 428 line or directly into the recorder.

January 11, 2011
1 Introduction
The 428XL system
LAUR-428
Capable of acquiring up to 30 channels
of seismic data at 2 ms sampling rate in
real-time, the LAUR-428 offers a high
degree of flexibility without
compromising the productivity of the
operations. Using the 215 MHz -
250 MHz RF bandwidth that has
already proven to provide strong
Figure 1-6 LAUR-428
propagation characteristics, the
LAUR-428 allows data transmission
up to 24 km. Equipped with a non-volatile data memory, the LAUR-428
allows temporary storage of acquired channels to avoid data losses in
case of transmission or power supply failures.
LRU
Using wireless Line Repeater Units
(LRUs), radio transmission can be
incorporated into the cable network.
The line cable, or the transverse cable,
may be interrupted at any point and
connected to another line or transverse
cable using a pair of LRUs. They can
be used to extend a portion of cable
spread or to relay radio transmission Figure 1-7 LRU
from point to point. The LRU acts also

as a master of radio cells composed of several LAURs. Each LRU can
receive up to 240 channels at 2ms in real-time and connect either to a
428 line or directly into the recorder.
Note If you want to use any early-production LRU (version A or B),
you have to return it to Sercel for upgrading.
LSI
The Line Shooting System (LSS) allows you to use the 428XL
telemetry network rather than a radio link to synchronize a remote
January 11, 2011
Introduction
The 428XL system

shooting system with the recording truck, for example in situations and
over stretches of land where radio communications are difficult.
Shooting with an LSS does not require any audio communications
1
between the observer in the recording truck and the shooter. The LSS
consists of an LSI unit associated with a Hand-Shake Unit (HSU).
• The Line/Source Interface
(LSI) allows you to connect a
blaster controller along an
acquisition line instead of
connecting it to the control
unit’s Blaster connector. It
Figure 1-8 LSI
acts as a remote Blaster
connector.
• The HSU is used by the
shooter to supply the status of
the firing device and the
number of the corresponding
shot point to the central unit.
Figure 1-9 HSU
Submersible (ULS) field electronics

Sercel’s 408ULS submersible units combine seamlessly with the
standard 428XL telemetry equipment. Withstanding immersion in
water down to 50 metres, the ULS technology is ideally suited for
shallow water and transition zone seismic operations. Its ruggedness
and ease of handling allow safe, efficient deployment and retrieval.
ULS products include the following main elements:
• FDU2S: a dual-channel digitizing unit.

January 11, 2011
1 Introduction
The 428XL system
• UL-ULS jumper cables, used for transition from the land

environment technology to the immersed environment technology.
• LAULS: an LAUL redesigned for the immersed environment.
• LAUXS: an LAUX redesigned for the immersed environment.
• Telemetry cables with mono-sensor or dual-sensor takeouts.
Figure 1-10 FDU2S
Central unit
e-428 System Software

The e-428 software totally controls the spread and the operations. It also
performs all the requested computations (stacks, correlations) before
recording data onto tapes or disks. Supported software platforms for the
e-428 system include Windows and Linux. Taking benefits of its client/
server architecture, e-428 allows secured remote access through
Internet connections.
LCI-428
Interface between the spread
and the e-428 client/server
architecture, the LCI-428
supports as much as 10,000 Figure 1-11 LCI-428
channels in real-time at 2 ms
sampling rate. This compact
unit (483 mm x 421 mm x 86 mm and 4.1 kg) (19 in x 16.5 in x 3.4 in
and 9.0 lbs) acts as a router between the seismic data acquired in the

January 11, 2011
Introduction
The 428XL system

field and the high-speed Ethernet network of the e-428 software. The
LCI-428 also interfaces peripheral equipment such as the source
controllers. Up to 10 LCI-428 can be linked together to handle up to
1
100,000 channels in real-time at 2 ms.
428 Lite break-out box

With fewer channels to acquire (up to 1000
channels @ 2 ms, Explosive) the 428 Lite
break-out box allows you to use a standard
LAUX-428 in place of the LCI-428. In that
case, a GPS receiver is required that supplies
the necessary high-accuracy clock (PPS
output). 428XL Server and Client software is Figure 1-12 428 Lite
installed on a laptop PC running on Linux.
Peripheral equipment
Tape drives
Cartridge tapes can be used as magnetic media for recording in
demultiplexed format.
The 3490 or 3590 cartridge drive makes it possible to record a 3480
IBM compatible cartridge tape, directly in the field. For dual drive
recording, the standard software provides alternate or simultaneous
recording without any additional devices. Up to 6 drives can be
connected.
Removable disk
Large-capacity, removable disks rather than tape drives can be used to
record your SEGD files, allowing zero-dead-time shooting. The
SERCEL Network Attached Storage system (NAS) uses the Redundant
Array of Independent Disks (RAID) technology, providing the data
redundancy needed for a highly secure system.

January 11, 2011
1 Introduction
The 428XL system
Real-Time Quality Control

SERCEL QC software (eSQC Pro) allows continual Quality Control of
seismic data to be performed in parallel with the acquisition without
slowing down 2-D or 3-D operations.
Plotter
An external plotter can be attached to the network to generate a paper
record of the acquired seismic data, either in read-after-write or in play-
back mode.
Printer
A standard colour printer allows automatic printouts of observer’s
reports, or log from any operation, or snapshots.
Auxiliary channels
Analog signals from the source (sweep pilots, Uphole geophone, TB),
can be recorded via an AXCUL-428 rack-mount unit connected to the
LCI-428.
Figure 1-13 AXCUL-428
The AXCUL-428 houses eight FDU-428 channels. The auxiliary

signals are connected to the AXCUL-428 through banana jacks on its
rear panel. The Line In port connects to the Low Line port of the
LCI-428. The Line Out port can be used to connect another
AXCUL-428 or an FDU-428 link.

January 11, 2011
Introduction
The 428XL system

Test equipment
LT-428 Line Tester

1
The LT-428 is a pocket terminal (a handheld PC) that connects to the
XDEV connector of an LAUL-428 or LAUX-428, used to check the
performance of a line section. The test results are displayed on the
pocket terminal. See Chapter 8.
LAUL-428
Figure 1-14 LT-428
TMS-428
The TMS-428 mainly consists of a PC computer and an interface unit
(TMU-428) the core of which is an LAUX-428 fitted with specific
software.
When used in a TMS-428 test system, the LAUX performs acquisition
and test functions. Test results are displayed on the computer. In that
configuration a high-accuracy clock is used in the LAUX. See
installation and operating instructions in the 428XL Technical Manual.
TMU428
Figure 1-15 TMS-428

January 11, 2011
1 Introduction
The 428XL system
DSUT-428
The DSUT428 is a test system for complete performance testing and
troubleshooting of DSU3-428 field electronics, using a PC, an
LAUL-428, a Reference DSU3-428, and test fixture.
Figure 1-16 DSUT-428
Quick tester
The QT-400 can be connected
anywhere in a line to check
transmission and power
supply at a glance.
Figure 1-17 QT-400
CT400 cable tester

The CT400 tester allows
you to check a cable
section for compliance
with the input/output
specifications of 428XL
field electronics.
See installation and
operating instructions in
the 428XL Technical
Manual.
Figure 1-18 CT400

January 11, 2011
Introduction
IT topology information for 428XL deployment

IT topology information for 428XL
deployment 1
Two main packages should be distinguished in e428 software:
• e428 Server software: typically to be installed in the recording cab
housing the seismic acquisition system.
• e428 Client software: Graphic User Interface software that can be
installed in the recording cab and on remote computers.
Remote users can access the server through an Intranet or Internet
connection. Access via the Internet or Intranet requires the installation
of an additional computer (referred to as Seismic Gateway).
There are four different ways of implementing e428:
• Local user topology (page 34).
• Intranet user topology (page 35).
• Internet user topology (page 36).
• Intranet/Internet user topology (page 37).

January 11, 2011
1 Introduction
Local user topology
Local Area Network

Extra
Local
Observer user
(Local user)
428XL Server
Figure 1-19 Local user topology
The table below summarizes the necessary steps for the implementation
shown in Figure 1-19.
Where Recording cab
Who Observer (local user) Extra local user
What
1.Install Operating System on 1.Install Client software.

Sercel server computer. 2.Request Login from
software 2.Install Server and Client Observer.
package software
3.Register extra local user

January 11, 2011
Introduction

Intranet user topology
Contractor’s Intranet
1
(securized private network)
Intranet
remote user
URL: http:// IP
Recording truck
Crew #2
Local Area Network
Seismic
Gateway
Intranet IP address Intranet

Observer
Extra remote
Local user
428XL Server
user
URL: http:// IP
Figure 1-20 Intranet user topology
Where Recording cab Remote computer Network
Who Observer (local user) Extra local user Remote user Administrator
What
1.Install OS on server
computer. 1.Install Client 1.Install Client
Sercel software. software
software 2.Install Server and
package Client software. 2.Request Login 2.Request Login
from Observer. from Observer.
3. Register extra users
Supply
1.Install OS. Intranet IP
Seismic
2.Install Seismic address or
Gateway
Gateway software. DHCP
address

January 11, 2011
1 Introduction
Internet user topology
Internet Internet
Service remote user
Provider
URL: http://www.crew3.com
Public
Internet
Seismic Gateway
Interface
Crew #3
Local Area Network

Seismic Extra
Gateway Observer Local
user
www.crew3.com
(purchased address)
428XL Server
Figure 1-21 Internet user topology
Where Recording cab Remote computer Network
Who Observer (local user) Extra local user Remote user Administrator
What
1.Install Operating
1.Install Client 1.Install Client
System on server
Sercel software. software.
computer.
software 2.Request Login 2.Request Login
2.Install Server and
package from Observer. from Observer.
Client software
3.Register extra users.
1.Install gateway
Operating System. Purchase
2.Install Seismic Public Internet
Gateway
Gateway software. fixed IP
3.Install Interface address
software.

January 11, 2011
Introduction

Intranet/Internet user topology
1
Internet
Service Internet
Provider remote user
Public
Internet
Contractor’s DMZ http://crews.contractor.com/crew4
Administered
by contractor
Firewall (securized private network)
www.contractor.com Intranet
remote user
Seismic URL: http:// IP

Gateway
crews.contractor.com
(purchased address)
Contractor’s administration centre
Recording truck
Crew #4
Local Area Network
Seismic
Gateway
Intranet IP address
Observer Intranet
Extra remote
Local user
428XLServer
user
URL: http:// IP
Figure 1-22 Intranet/Internet user topology

January 11, 2011
1 Introduction
Where Recording cab Remote computer Network DMZ
Observer
Who Extra local user Remote user Administrator
(local user)
What
1.Install Operating
System on server 1.Install Client 1.Install Client
Sercel computer. software. software. Supply Intranet IP
software 2.Install Server and 2.Request Login 2.Request Login address or DHCP
package Client software. from Observer. from Observer. address
3.Register extra
users.
1.Install gateway
Operating
1.Install gateway System.
Operating 2.Install Seismic
System. Gateway
Gateway 2.Install Seismic software.
Gateway 3.Purchase Public
software Internet fixed IP
address
4.Register new
crew

January 11, 2011
Chapter
This chapter provides information for installing hardware

in the recording truck. The client computer and peripherals,
however, are not covered in detail in this chapter (see the
specific chapters).
In this chapter:
• Networking (page 40)

• Identifying Ethernet interface ports (page 43)
• AC Power requirements (page 44)
• LCI-428 (page 45)
• Master/Slave configuration (page 54)
• 428XL Lite break-out box (page 56)
• Server computer (page 59)
• Client computer (page 65)
• LCD display anchoring (page 66)

January 11, 2011
Networking
Networking
172.30.201.10
LAUX
VE464 DPG
172.30.201.1
1 1 DSD (172.30....)
LCI-428
Ethernet switch
Double IP: 172.30.128.1

and 150.10.128.1
428XL client
172.27.128.41 1
NAS 428XL
servers server eSQC Pro
server
172.27.128.42 1 172.27.128.1 172.27.128.2
FTP 1
server 1
1
1
1 172.27.128.10
Ethernet switch
172.27.128.99
1 eSQC Pro
1 client
Plotter
Seismic 172.27.128.20
Gateway
172.27.128.26 172.27.128.11
Seismic
Gateway
Internet
1 RJ45, non twisted, grey, 5 m

(6050047).
Figure 2-1 Networking

January 11, 2011
Hardware installation
Networking

Note It is recommended to power off then power on the Ethernet
switch after re-assigning its RJ45 ports.
Local host IP address 2

172.30.128.1 (428XL-20000 server)
172.27.127.1 (428XL-40000 server)
428XL server
150.10.128.1
172.27.128.1
428XL client #1 172.27.128.2
428XL client #n 172.27.128.(n+1)
LCI-428 #1 172.30.201.1 See Changing the LCI-428 IP

LCI-428 #n 172.30.(200+n).1 address (page 42)
eSQC-Pro server 172.27.128.10

eSQC-Pro client 172.27.128.11
Seismic Gateway 172.27.128.20
Plotter 1 172.27.128.26
Plotter 2 172.27.128.27
NAS #1 172.27.128.41
NAS #2 172.27.128.42
FTP server 172.27.128.99
VE432 DSD1 150.10.128.201

VE432 DSDn 150.10.128.(200+n)
If you want to connect a network printer, look for a free address in the
above table.

January 11, 2011
Networking
Changing the LCI-428 IP address

The LCI-428 comes with a default IP address (172.30.201.1). If two or
more are used, follow the procedure below to assign a distinct address
to each of them.
1. To avoid any network conflict, power off all LCI-428s except the
one you want to set up (for example LCI-428 #2). Wait until the
LCI-428 has booted up.
2. If the 428XL Server application is running, stop it by typing the
letter s in a Terminal window on the Server machine.
3. Assuming the address of LCI-428 #1 is 172.30.201.1, type the
following commands to set the address of LCI-428 #2 to
172.30.202.1:
rlogin 172.30.201.1
lgsBootTargetSetI "172.30.202.1"
lgsVersion
(the lgsVersion command should return the correct IP address
172.30.202.1).
logout
4. Power off the LCI-428. Power on the next LCI-428 to set up, if
any, and repeat steps 3 and 4, and so on and so forth until each
LCI-428 has a distinct IP address.
5. In the jInstall window:
- Select the number of LCI-428s and enter the IP address of each
of them (172.30.202.1, 172.30.203.1, etc.).
- Click “Apply”. This reboots the server computer. The new
settings will not take effect until the server computer has booted
up.

January 11, 2011
Identifying Ethernet interface ports

Identifying Ethernet interface ports
Whenever you want to make sure all Ethernet ports are properly
connected, you can use the ping command to test whether a computer
can reach the expected hosts across the network. This assumes that the
2
SERCEL software is already installed on the computer and on the
distant host.
1. See Networking (page 40) to find the IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
of the host which should be visible to your computer.
2. If your computer runs on Linux, open a Terminal window. If it
runs on Windows, open a Command Prompt window.
3. Type the command ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx and press Return
(assuming xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the host you want
to connect to).
4. If you get a reply saying that a number of packets were sent and
received, do not change anything. Otherwise, move the Ethernet
cable to another port, on the distant host or on your computer, and
“ping” the network again. Try again until you get a correct reply.

January 11, 2011
AC Power requirements
AC Power requirements
In order to help you determine the total AC power required and circuit
breaker amperages, depending on the configuration of your recording
cab, the table below gives the typical consumption of each device that
your 428XL system may include.
428XL 110 VAC 220 VAC × =

LCI-428 2A 1A
VE464 DPG 1.6 A 0.8 A
VE432 DPG 1.6 A 0.8 A
Ethernet switch (typical) 1A 0.5 A
HP XW 86000 13.2 A 6.6 A

DELL PC (typical) 6A 3A
IBM ZPro PC 10 A 5A
CRT display (typical) 2.5 A 1.2 A

LCD display (typical) 1A 0.5 A
NAS system 4A 2A
Tape drive (typical) 3A 1.5 A
Plotter (typical) 4A 2A
TMU428 1A 0.5 A
Total =

January 11, 2011
LCI-428

LCI-428
Shock-mount parts
The LCI-428 is delivered to you with the four shock-absorbers already 2
in place. If you need to remove them (e. g. for a rack-mount setup),
remove the cover to gain access to the screws inside the unit.
81.1
21
Four shock-absorbers to be
35.9
bolted to mount plate
Eight M3
screws
Eight holes
35.9 (dia. 3.9 mm)
342 mm
260 mm
310 mm
438 mm
Figure 2-2 LCI-428 mounting dimensions

January 11, 2011
LCI-428
81.1
21
4 screws, M6×50 Mount plate

756084647
4 mounting holes
(dia. 6.2)
242 300 350
492
514
Figure 2-3 Mounting plate (dimensions in mm)

January 11, 2011
LCI-428

Cabling to VE464
12 VDC Left Transverse

port
2
FDU-428 Link LAUL-428
LAUX-428
Right Transverse
port To Ethernet
1 switch
Transverse
Left
VE464 DPG
(or other Vibrator controller,
Ground or shooting system) 2
To Ethernet
switch
AC power
Transverse
PPS
Right
Ground 12 VDC GPS receiver

booster (optional)
1
10 m max.
3
Trimble
Accutime Gold
Auxiliary channels.
See also Auxiliary
FDU link or AXCUL-428 channels (page 253)
1 SRHRF-type Transverse cable, 125 m max.

2 P/N 1C14078465 (included in VE464 parts).
3 GPS cord, 10 m max. recommended (included in 1L13087062).
Figure 2-4 LCI-428 ports

January 11, 2011
LCI-428
Cabling to VE432
Up to four VE432 DPGs can be connected to an LCI-428, via a
Multi-Slave Interface box (Part No. 1C14078122).
TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4

3 3 3 3
Low Line or Aux Aux Aux Aux

High Line 1 2 3 4
1 Blaster MSI
110/220 VAC
DPG DPG DPG DPG power
1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1
Recorder
Recorder
Analog Pilots
Analog Pilots
To Ethernet
switch
2 2 2 2
Banana
jacks
Inputs
1, 2, 3, 4
AIB AIB
1, 2, 3, 4
Auxiliary
channels
(FDU link or 1 P/N 1C14078465
AXCUL-428)
2 P/N 1717075950
3 P/N 1A13077600
Figure 2-5 : Multi-DPG configuration (Slip-Sweep)
Two Pilot signals from each DPG are connected to the auxiliary line via
AIB boxes (Part No. 1C14079115).

January 11, 2011
LCI-428

If more auxiliary channels need to be recorded, use as many AIB boxes
as necessary. If required, TB signals can easily be connected to the
Auxiliary line too, via the MSI box and additional AIB boxes.
For other connections to the DPG, see VE432 documentation. 2
Shooting system
To connect a shooting system, see the manufacturer’s documentation
and BLASTER signals (page 404) and Cables (page 415).
Figure 2-6 Shooter encoder connected to LCI-428 (Blaster port)
When radio transmission is an issue in Dynamite operations, you may

want the shooter encoder to be closer to the blasters. In that case, you
can connect it to the XDEV2 port of an LAUX-428. Any way you
connect the encoder, however, radio transmission conditions should be
good enough to allow the shooter to talk to the observer.
LAUX-428 must be in
active spread!
XDEV2
Figure 2-7 Shooter encoder connected to LAUX-428 (XDEV2 port)
It makes no difference whether you connect the encoder to an LCI-428

or an LAUX-428 (the FO and TB signals, and an RS232 port, are
available from XDEV2 just like it were the Blaster port of an LCI-428).
To connect the encoder, you can use an LAUX-428 on a Transverse, or
you can insert an LAUX-428 anywhere on any Line (if the LAUX-428
is included in the active spread). This does not affect the other functions
of the LAUX-428 used. You can connect several encoders this way in
your spread. See also Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU) on
page 266. See also Source controller interfacing (page 83) in 428XL
User’s Manual Vol. 3.

January 11, 2011
LCI-428
Multimodule
Each LCI-428 can handle up to 10000 channels @ 2 ms.
Connect the High Line port of the first LCI-428 to the Low Line port of
the second, and so on, using a 1.5-metre (Part No. 512500155) or 2-m
(Part No. 512100122) jumper cable.
Connect each LCI-428 to the Ethernet switch (a 1 Gbps switch is
required). Note that you must assign a unique IP address to each
LCI-428. See Changing the LCI-428 IP address (page 42).
172.30.201.1
Auxiliary channels
(FDU link or AXCUL-428)
Ethernet switch (1 Gbps)
Line jumper cable
172.30.202.1
Figure 2-8 Example of Multimodule setup

January 11, 2011
LCI-428

Remote input panel
A remote input panel (P/N 1L22084238), to be mounted on a wall of the
recording cab, together with 6-metre jumper cables, can be used to
connect the spread to the Line and Transverse ports of the LCI-428. 2
Remote input panel
Line jumper cable, 6 m

(P/N 512 100 380)
6 holes,
dia 4.5 mm
Right Trans High Line 200 mm
220 mm
Left Trans Low Line

Transverse jumper
cable, 6 m
(P/N 512 100 483)
140 mm 140 mm
300 mm
Figure 2-9 Remote input panel mounting dimensions

January 11, 2011
LCI-428
DSUGPS
When using DSUGPS links, the clock of the LCI-428 must be locked to
a clock signal from a GPS receiver (ProPak V3 from Novatel). This
requires the use of a later-design LCI-428 which has a 10 MHz input
BNC on its rear panel.
RS port
(GPS messages) I/O port
(PPS)
GPS antenna
downlead
(X m max.)
12 VDC
OCXO output 10 MHz

input
Figure 2-10
An area providing unobstructed satellite visibility must be found for the

GPS reference station antenna.
Part No. of the GPS reference station: 1T45088336 (including a GPS
receiver, mast and cables). The 12 V power supply cable provided
includes a power supply operating from 90-264 VAC.
Note that to enable the use of DSUGPS links, you must select the the
“DSUGPS used” option in the jInstall window. See User’s Manual
Vol. 1.
The DSUGPS does not allow the use of an Ethernet Radio Bridge.

January 11, 2011
LCI-428

Table 2-1 GPS reference station P/N 1T45088336
Description Part No. Qty
LCI XDEV2-RS232-PPS cable
12 V power supply cable
1T45088362
1T45089819
1
1
2
PROPAK-V3-OCXO-L1-A (SRCL) 3310233 1
GPS antenna 3310234 1
Antenna downlead, 30 m. 3310236 2
Coaxial cord, 1.5 m. (BNC, pin / BNC, pin) 5050058 1
Coaxial adapter (N, socket / N, socket) 5050319 1

January 11, 2011
Master/Slave configuration
The “Master/Slave” mode allows using up to four separate 428XL
systems synchronized to a “Master” 428XL. The “Master” and “Slave”
can communicate with each other via an Ethernet switch if the Slave is
close enough, or an Ethernet bridge in the case of distant systems.
LCI-428 VE464 DPG
DSD
Ethernet switch
See
Mater/Slave Y cable (page 426)
wiring
Master
428XL
server
172.27.128.1 428XL client
Master system
Ethernet switch
Slave system
172.27.128.2
Slave
428XL
server
428XL client
LCI-428
Figure 2-11 Master and Slave in the same doghouse
Note that you must assign a unique IP address to each LCI-428. See
Changing the LCI-428 IP address (page 42).

January 11, 2011

LCI-428 VE464 DPG 2
Ethernet switch
DSD
Master
428XL
server
172.27.128.1 428XL client
Ethernet switch
Master system
Ethernet bridge
Slave system
Ethernet switch
172.27.128.2
Slave
428XL
server
428XL client See “Slave DSD” in

VE464 User’s Manual
LCI-428
Slave DSD
Figure 2-12 Distant systems

January 11, 2011
428XL Lite break-out box

Warning: Do not connect the USB port of the 428Lite Box, or the battery of the attached LAUX-428,
until the server is up and running! (i. e. connect it just before opening the jConfig window).
Two 10-metre cords

LAUX-428 used as LCI-428
(included in P/N 1L11084625)
GPS (see Note below)
receiver
Trimble “XDEV2 4
428-Lite”
Accutime tag “XDEV1
Gold LAUX428”
tag
XDEV1 XDEV2 “XDEV2

XDEV2 LAUX428”
5 tag
XDEV1
“XDEV1
428-Lite”
tag LAUX-428
Blaster 2 Server/Client laptop

(Linux) computer
See Figure 2-17 on
page 63
172.27.128.41 1 1 172.27.128.1
Ethernet switch
NAS
server
1 RJ45, non twisted, grey, 3 m (3170158). Plotter
2 9-pin Sub D / USB cord (P/N 1L11084743)

Client laptop computer
3 GPS cord, 10 m max. recommended 172.27.128.26 (Linux or Windows)
(P/N 1L11084742)
4 XDEV2 cable (P/N 1L11085000) Important: Be sure to connect XDEV1 and XDEV2 cables
5 XDEV1 cable (P/N 1L11084999) as indicated. Watch the tag at either end!
Figure 2-13 428XL Lite system

January 11, 2011

WARNING
Do not connect the USB port of the 428Lite Box, or the battery of the
attached LAUX-428, until the server is up and running! (i. e. connect
it just before opening the jConfig window). 2
WARNING
At either end of the XDEV1 and XDEV2 cables is a tag indicating
which end to connect to the LAUX-428 and which end to connect to the
428-Lite box. Be sure to connect each cable the right way!
A USB disk can be used as record medium in place of a NAS as follows:

- Connect the USB disk to a Windows Client computer. On the
Client computer, set up an FTP server (e. g. Filezilla) and
configure the shared folders options for the USB disk to be the
FTP home directory.
- In the 428XL Install window, select the FTP Export mode. In the
428XL Export window, enter the FTP server connection
information, and select the FTP server as device to use for
exports. (See the Export window’s help information for details).
The power to the GPS receiver is supplied via the 428Lite box.
The Ethernet switch operates from 110/220 VAC.
The 428Lite box is not waterproof. Adequate shelter should be provided
in case of outdoor use.
Note: if the LAUX-428 to be used as LCI-428 is loaded with software
version 1.0, it must be upgraded via its XDEV1 port (it cannot be
upgraded using the Download menu on the GUI). See Upgrading through
serial (XDEV) port on page 111.

January 11, 2011
Table 2-2 428XL Lite (Part No. 1L11084625)

Item Part No. Quantity
Ground stake 1C70078960 2
Lite Break Out Box 1L11084626 1
GPS Acutime Gold & cable 1L11084742 1
428 LITE/PC cable 1L11084743 1
428-LITE dongle 1L11084864 1
428-LITE PC/LAUX cable 1L11084867 1
LAUX-428 LITE XDEV1 cable 1L11084999 1
LAUX-428 LITE XDEV2 cable 1L11085000 1
LAUX-428 LITE earth cable 1L11085106 1
LINUX software package 1S30084879 1
10 BASE T cord 3170158 2
Mouse pad 3170232 1
Ethernet switch 3170252 1
Desktop computer 317085804 1
Plug, 19-pin 5010952 1
Carrying case 8800205 1

January 11, 2011
Server computer

Server computer
WARNING
Be sure to install your workstations in an area where airflow is not 2
obstructed, maintain proper clearance and provide appropriate air
conditioning in the recording cab in order to meet the environmental
requirements specified in the manufacturer’s documentation.
Shock-mount parts
Rear
stop
250 250
6 holes,
350
390
dia. 7mm
195
680
750
Figure 2-14. HP XW 8600 shock-mount assembly (Part No. 756086162)

January 11, 2011
Server computer
Server computer connectors

Note For a tape drive that connects via a Fiber Channel port (e. g.
IBM 3592), the following interface board is required,
depending on whether you install it in a PCI or PCI-Express
slot in the computer:
- QLOGIC QLA2342 (P/N 1660083296) in a PCI-X slot.
- QLOGIC QLE2462 (P/N 1660084970) in a PCI-Express slot
(e. g. Ultra45).
See Tape drive interface cards (page 64).
Note If your 428XLserver computer has two internal hard disks and,
for any reason, you remove the additional disk, then you have
to reinstall the Operating System and 428XL software.
Use the slots as indicated in the table below, depending on the type of
tape drive to connect.
WARNING
The different types of SCSI interface should not be mixed.
WARNING
On a computer running on Linux, if you add or move or remove any
Ethernet interface card, then you may have to request a new licence
code from SERCEL.

January 11, 2011
Server computer

Access panel key loop
Universal chassis
clamp lock opening
Power supply Built-In

Padlock loop 2
Self Test (BIST) LED Cable lock slot
eth0 and eth1

network interfaces.
Additional Ethernet See Identifying
interface Ethernet interface
Graphics card ports (page 43)
FC QLA2342
PCI 32/33
PCI Express x16 GEN2
PCI Express x8 (x4)
PCI Express x16 (x16, x8) GEN2
PCI Express x8 (1), Gen2 x8 (8)

PCI Express x8 (x4)
PCI-X 133
Figure 2-15 HP XW 8600

January 11, 2011
Server computer
Figure 2-16 Z800 rear panel
Table 2-3
Item Description
1 Power cord connector.
2 PS/2 mouse connector (green).
3 IEEE-1394 connector.
eth0 and eth1 network interfaces.
4
See Identifying Ethernet interface ports (page 43)
5 Audio line-in connector (blue).
6 Side access panel key.
7 Graphics connector.
8 Audio line-out connector (green).
9 Microphone connector (pink).
10 USB 2.0 ports (6).
11 PS/2 keyboard connector(purple).
12 Serial connector.
13 Cable lock slot.
14 Power supply Built-In Self Test (BIST) LED.

January 11, 2011
Server computer

9-pin Sub D / USB cord
(P/N 1L11084743) 2
Ethernet switch (1 GB) Dongle

(USB port)
Mouse
Figure 2-17 Laptop computer (DELL Precision M6400)
If more than four USB ports are required, use a USB (V2) hub.

January 11, 2011
Server computer
Tape drive interface cards
Supplied in
Periph. Host Sercel Part
Index Card or adapter Driver Sercel add-
bus bus No.
on package
Dual port Fiber Channel Red Hat
B FC PCI-X 1660083296 No
QLA2342 or QLA2462 WS 4.6
Dual port Fiber Channel PCI- Red Hat
C FC 1660084970 No
QLE2462 Express WS 4.6
Adaptec single port SCSI Red Hat
D HVD PCI 3170311 No
AHA- 2944UW WS 4.6
Adaptec dual port SCSI Red Hat
E LVD/SE PCI-X 3170297 Yes
39320 WS 4.6
Tape drives
Host computer
3592 LTO3 MDR 3590 3490 HVD 3490 SE
Not
HP XW 8600 B E E D D
supported
Not
HP Z800 B E E D D
supported
Server hardware installation kit

(Part No. 1L61084838)
Item Part No. Quantity

VGA video cord 3170231 1
Ethernet switch 3170277 2
USB extender cord 3170278 2
Adaptec dual port SCSI 39320 card 3170297 1
RJ45 FTP cord, 5m 6050047 2

January 11, 2011
Client computer

Client computer
Sercel recommends the use of a HP XW 4600 or HP Z400 as 428XL
Client host computer. It can run on RedHat Linux (recommended by
Sercel) or Windows™.
2
The standard HP XW 4600 or HP Z400 comes with a dual-port graphics
card. A second graphics card can be connected, allowing up to four
display screens to be used: NVIDIA dual-port graphics card FX1700
(Sercel Part No. 3170332), or FX1800 (Sercel Part No. 3170359).
The FX1700 card has two DVI ports whereas the FX1800 includes a
DVI port and two Display Ports. On an FX1800, only the two Display
Ports must be used.
eth0 network interface. See Identifying Ethernet Primary Graphics Secondary

interface ports (page 43) card Graphics card
Figure 2-18 HP Z400 rear panel
eth0 network interface. See Identifying Ethernet Primary Graphics Secondary

interface ports (page 43) card Graphics card
Figure 2-19 HP XW 4600 rear panel

January 11, 2011
LCD display anchoring

An anchoring kit (Part No. 1L21084793) is available from SERCEL
that allows you to protect an LCD screen from shocks when unused.
Follow the procedure below to install the anchoring kit:
1. Drill a hole (dia. 11 mm) in the table top, 170 mm from the wall.
See Figure 2-20.
2. Secure the LCD Monitor Arm to the table top with the mounting
parts from the tool kit.
3. Install the display on the arm, leaving a long enough loose length
of connecting cable to allow for a 180° swing angle.
4. Swing the display through 180° backward. With the screen’s front
face resting against the wall, record the height (H) of the bottom
edge above the table top (seeFigure 2-20).
LCD Monitor Arm
170
H
Figure 2-20
5. Swing the display forward.

January 11, 2011

6. Drill four holes (dia. 12 mm) in the wall, 390 mm apart
horizontally, 230 mm apart vertically, with the lowest two along a
horizontal line at H + 60 mm (see Figure 2-21).
7. Insert a hollow wall anchor into each hole. Secure the Display 2
Anchor Base to the wall with four screws.
Display Anchor Display protected from

Base shocks by strapping it in
m
0m Anchor Base
39
230 mm
H + 60 mm
Figure 2-21

January 11, 2011

January 11, 2011
Chapter
In this chapter:
• Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4 (page 70)

• Installing 428XL server software (page 98)
• Server ID code (page 103)
• Saving 428XL parameters (page 104)
• Uninstalling 428XL server software (page 105)
• Server software patches (page 107)
• Firmware upgrading (page 111)
• Troubleshooting (page 116)

January 11, 2011
Installing Redhat Enterprise Linux V5.4

If for any reason you have to install or re-install the Redhat Linux
Operating System on the e428 server, use one of the procedures below,
depending on whether you are installing it on a 428XL-20000/10000 or
428XL- 40000 desktop computer, or a laptop (428Lite) computer:
• 428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer (page 71)
• 428XL-40000 desktop computer (page 78)
• 428Lite 32-bit laptop computer (page 86)
• 428Lite 64-bit laptop computer (page 92)
If this is a re-installation, first save the Licence code (page 149) and
operating parameters (see Saving 428XL parameters — page 104), and
then power off the computer.
CAUTION
This installation procedure will erase everything on the hard disk.
WARNING
After Redhat Linux is installed, a GRUB boot loader window shows up
each time you power up or boot up the computer. Do not press any key
(the boot loader window should disappear automatically).

January 11, 2011
Server software installation

428XL-20000, -10000 or -4000 desktop computer
This procedure is for an e428 server computer handling up to 20 000
channels.
1. Power up the computer and press the prompted function key to
interrupt the automatic boot sequence (F9 on HP computer,
otherwise F12).
3
2. Insert the SERCEL REDHAT Enterprise V5.4 (64 bit)
DVD-ROM into the drive.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to use the REDHAT DVD-ROM supplied by SERCEL, rather
than the one accompanying the machine.
3. Depending on the type of machine, select “Onboard or USB CD-

ROM Drive” from the Boot Device menu, and press Return, or
choose the Optical Drive or IDE-CDROM device option.
4. When the message “to install RedHat Enterprise Linux in
graphical mode” appears, press Enter (or wait until the timeout
delay has expired).
5. When the system asks if you wish “To begin testing the media
before installation”, choose Skip (using the arrow keys). Press
Enter.
6. In the window that appears, click Next.
7. In the language selection window, choose English. Click Next.
8. In the keyboard window, choose as appropriate, for example
United Kingdom or U.S. International (if Qwerty) or French (if
Azerty). Click Next. Note that with the US International option,
you may have to press the space bar after typing a quote or
double-quote character to enter that character.
9. In the “Installation Number” window, type the RedHat
“Subscription Number” provided by Sercel. Click Ok.

January 11, 2011
10. If an “Installation Type” window appears, choose Install RedHat

Enterprise Linux Client. Click Next.
11. In the partitioning window:
- Choose Remove all partitions on selected drives and create
default layout (Caution: be sure not to choose “Remove Linux
partition”).
- Make sure the sda, sdb and sdc partitions are selected.
- Select Review and modify partitioning layout. Leave other
options unchanged.
- Click Next.
- In the warning box that pops up, choose Yes.
12. Select VolGroup00.
- Click Delete.
- In the Confirm Delete window, click Delete. This takes you
back to the partitioning window.
13. Select /dev/sda2. Click Edit.
14. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sda2 window:
- From the File System Type pull-down menu, select Swap.
- Choose Fixed size.
- Enter 16000 into the Size field (16000 MB).
- Choose Force to be a primary partition.
- Make sure “Encrypt” is unticked.
- Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window.
15. Click New. In the Add Partition window:
- Unselect sdb and sdc.
- Type / in the Mount Point field.
- From the File System Type pull-down menu, select “ext3”.

January 11, 2011

- Only sda should be selected. Make sure Fixed size is selected.
- Click OK. This takes you back to the partitioning window. 3
- Type /var/tmp in the Mount Point field.
- Type /export/home in the Mount Point field.
- Only sda should be selected.
- Choose the Fill To Maximum Allowable Size option.
18. Select /dev/sdb1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdb1
window:
- Type /var/dump in the Mount Point field.
- Unselect sda and sdc. Only sdb should be selected.

January 11, 2011

19. Select /dev/sdc1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdc1
window:
- Type /var/dump0 in the Mount Point field.
- Unselect sda and sdb. Only sdc should be selected.
20. Click Next
21. In the boot loader window, leave the default settings unchanged.
Click Next.
22. In the network devices window:
- Select the Active on boot option (for eth0 and eth1).
- Select eth0.
- Click Edit. Set the options as follows:
- Click Manual configuration.
- IP address: enter 172.27.128.1 for the ip-eth0 address
(visible to the seismic recording system).
- Netmask: enter 255.255.255.0 as Submask for ip-eth0.
- Unselect Enable IPV6 support.
- Click OK.
- If a second Ethernet card is installed, select eth1.

January 11, 2011

- IP address: enter the ip-eth1 address visible to the local
network (172.30.128.1).
- Netmask: enter the Submask for ip-eth1 (that is
255.255.0.0).
- Click OK.
3
- Set the hostname: choose the Manually option.
- Leave the hostname field unchanged (localhost.localdomain).
- Click Next. A warning box (Error With Data) should show up,
warning you that the Gateway and DNS fields are left blank.
Click Continue to dismiss those warnings.
23. In the time zone window: choose your time zone. Click Next.
24. In the Root account window,
- Root password: enter the desired Root password (e. g.
administrator) for the e428 server and keep it in a safe place.
- Confirm: type again your password to confirm. Click Next.
25. In the package installation defaults window:
- Choose to customize the set of packages to be installed.
- Click Next.
26. In the package group selection window:
- In the Desktops group, select KDE Desktop Environment
(leave other settings unchanged).
- In the Applications group, remove (unselect) Games.
- In the Development group, the following should be selected:
- Development tools;
- X Software Development Support;
- Legacy Software Development;
- In the Servers group:
January 11, 2011
- Select Web Server.

- Select Mail Server.
- Select Legacy Network Server. Click on Optional
packages. Select rsh-server.
- Click Close.
- In the Base System group,
- Select System Tools.
- Click on Optional packages.
- Select sysstat.
- Click Close.
- Select Legacy Software Support.
- Select Open Motif.
- Click Close.
- Click Next.
27. In the next window, click Next.
28. The installation program installs packages from the Redhat DVD-
ROM (this takes about a quarter of an hour).
29. After installation is complete, remove the DVD-ROM from the
drive.
30. Click Reboot.
31. In the Welcome window, click Forward.
32. In the Licence Agreement window, choose Yes. Click Forward.
33. From the Firewall drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click
Forward, then Yes.
34. From the SELinux drop-down menu, choose Disabled. Click
Forward, then Yes.

January 11, 2011

35. In the Kdump window, make sure “Enable Kdump” is not
selected. Click Forward.
36. In the Date and Time window, set the time and click Forward.
37. In the Set Up Software Updates window,
- Select No, I prefer to register at a later time. Click Forward. 3
- In the window that pops up, click No thanks, I’ll connect later.
38. In the Finish Update Setup window, click Forward.
39. In the Create User window, click Forward. If a warning box
appears, click Continue.
40. In the Sound Card window click Forward.
41. In the Additional CDs window, click Finish. This completes the
installation of RedHat Linux —and reboots the server.
42. Log in as root user.
43. Insert the e428 V5.0 DVD-ROM into the drive.
44. If the installation is done on an HP XW8600 computer (otherwise
skip this step) open a Terminal window and type the following
commands:
mkdir /media/cdrom
mount /dev/cdrom /media/cdrom
45. Copy the “allow-executing-by-default.sh” file to the /tmp
directory and run that file. To do that, open a Terminal window
and type the following commands:
cp -p /media/cdrom/e428V5.0/linux/tools/allow-executing-by-default.sh /tmp
cd /tmp
./ allow-executing-by-default.sh
reboot

January 11, 2011
428XL-40000 desktop computer

This procedure is for an e428 server computer handling up to 40 000
channels (e. g. HP XW 8600).
interrupt the automatic boot sequence (F9 on HP computer,
otherwise F12).
IMPORTANT

choose the Optical Drive or IDE-CDROM device option.
delay has expired).
Enter.

January 11, 2011

partition”). 3
- Make sure the sda, sdb, sdc, sdd and sde partitions are selected.
options unchanged.
- Click Next.
- Click Delete.
- In the Confirm Delete window, click Delete. This takes you
back to the partitioning window.
- Unselect sdb, sdc, sdd and sde.

January 11, 2011

18. Select /dev/sdb1. Click Edit.
19. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdb1 window:
- Unselect sda, sdc, sdd and sde. Only sdb should be selected.

January 11, 2011

20. Select /dev/sdc1. Click Edit.
21. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdc1 window: 3
- Unselect sda, sdb, sdd and sde. Only sdc should be selected.
22. Select /dev/sdd1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sdd1
window:
- Unselect sda, sdb, sdc and sde. Only sdd should be selected.
23. Select /dev/sde1. Click Edit. In the Edit Partitions: /dev/sde1
window:
- Unselect sda, sdb, sdc and sdd. Only sde should be selected.
January 11, 2011
24. Click Next

Click Next.
- Select eth0.
(visible to the seismic recording system).
- Click OK.
- If a second Ethernet card is installed, select eth1.
- Unselect the Configure using DHCP option.
- Select the Active on Boot option (done by default).
network (172.30.128.1).
255.255.0.0).
- Click OK.
- If a third Ethernet card is installed, select eth2.
network (172.27.127.1).

January 11, 2011

255.255.255.0).
- Click OK.
- Set the hostname: choose the Manually option. 3
- Click Next.

January 11, 2011

- Click Close.
- Select sysstat.
- Click Close.
- Click Close.
- Click Next.
drive.
34. Click Reboot.
Forward, then Yes.
Forward, then Yes.
January 11, 2011

- Select No, I prefer to register at a later time. Click Forward.
42. In the Finish Update Setup window, click Forward. 3
47. Insert the e428 V5.0 DVD-ROM into the drive.
48. If the installation is done on an HP XW8600 computer (otherwise
skip this step) open a Terminal window and type the following
commands:
mkdir /media/cdrom
mount /dev/cdrom /media/cdrom
49. Copy the “allow-executing-by-default.sh” file to the /tmp
directory and run that file. To do that, open a Terminal window
and type the following commands:
cd /tmp
reboot

January 11, 2011
428Lite 32-bit laptop computer

interrupt the automatic boot sequence (F12 on the PC specified by
SERCEL).
IMPORTANT

choose the IDE-CDROM device option.
delay has expired).
Enter.

January 11, 2011

partition”).
options unchanged. 3
- Click Next.
- Click Delete.
- In the Confirm Delete window, click Delete.

January 11, 2011

19. Click Next
Click Next.

January 11, 2011

- Select eth0.
(visible to the seismic recording system). 3
- Click OK.
IMPORTANT
The system will not be able to get synchronized with the GPS time
unless you select the correct time zone.

- Click Next.

January 11, 2011

- Click Close.
- Select sysstat.
- Click Close.
- Click Close.
- Click Next.
drive.
29. Click Reboot.

January 11, 2011

Forward, then Yes.
Forward, then Yes.
3
42. Insert the e428 V5.0 DVD-ROM into the drive, then copy the
“allow-executing-by-default.sh” file to the /tmp directory and
run that file. To do that, open a Terminal window and type the
following commands:
cd /tmp
reboot

January 11, 2011
428Lite 64-bit laptop computer

SERCEL).
IMPORTANT

delay has expired).
Enter.

January 11, 2011

partition”).
options unchanged. 3
- Click Next.
- Click Delete.
- In the Confirm Delete window, click Delete.

January 11, 2011

19. Click Next
Click Next.

January 11, 2011

- Select eth0.
(visible to the seismic recording system). 3
- Click OK.
IMPORTANT
The system will not be able to get synchronized with the GPS time
unless you select the correct time zone.

- Click Next.

January 11, 2011

- Click Close.
- Select sysstat.
- Click Close.
- Click Close.
- Click Next.
drive.
29. Click Reboot.

January 11, 2011

Forward, then Yes.
Forward, then Yes.
3
following commands:
cd /tmp
reboot

January 11, 2011
Installing 428XL server software

In this section:
• Prerequisites (page 98)
• Installing 428XL server software (page 99)
Prerequisites
Unless that is already done, connect the keyboard and display screen to
the server computer.
Reinstallation
If this is a reinstallation:
• First save the Licence code (page 149) and operating parameters (see
Saving 428XL parameters — page 104)
• Uninstall the former release. See Uninstalling 428XL server software
(page 105).
Operating System
The Operating System is assumed installed (see Installing Redhat
Enterprise Linux V5.4 — page 70).
To eject any DVD or CD-ROM from the drive, right-click on the DVD/
CD-ROM icon on the desktop and choose Eject from the pop menu.

January 11, 2011

WARNING
This procedure changes the system parameters (users, host name, etc.).
3
1. Power on the server computer.
2. In the Login window:
- Type root 
- Enter administrator as password.
3. Insert the e-428 DVD-ROM into the drive.
If the e-428 DVD/CD-ROM icon fails to appear automatically on
the desktop, double-click on the “Computer” icon, and then open
the DVD/CD-ROM Drive by double-clicking on it. Wait until
the icon appears on the desktop.
4. Open a Terminal window (see Terminal window on page 116) and
then type the following commands:
cd /media/cdrecorder/e428V5.0/linux/server
(or cd /media/cdrom/e428V5.0/linux/server)
./e-428Server-v5.0-linux.bin
or, if this fails to launch the install shield, use a temporary
directory other than “/tmp”, by typing, for example:
./e-428Server-v5.0-linux.bin -is:tempdir /var/tmp
5. Wait until the installation wizard appears (a few minutes,
depending on the DVD/CD-ROM drive speed).

January 11, 2011
V5.0
Figure 3-1
6. In the “Welcome to the installShield Wizard” window, click Next.

7. In the copyright information window, click Next.
Figure 3-2
8. In the licence agreement window, carefully read the terms of the

agreement. Choose “I accept”. Click Next.
Figure 3-3
9. In the next licence agreement windows. Choose “I accept”. Click

Next.
10. If the installation wizard asks you if you want to install Client
software, choose No. If you want to install Client software on the
same computer (for example if you are installing a 428Lite
system), you will have to log in with the “user428” (instead of

January 11, 2011

“root”) user account after server software is installed (see
page 132).
11. In the Senior Observer information window enter the desired User
name and password. Click Next.
Figure 3-4
12. A summary of your installation settings should appear. Click Next

to accept, then wait until the systems says installation is
completed (a dozen of minutes, depending on the DVD/CD-ROM
drive speed).
Figure 3-5
13. Then the installation wizard asks you how many screens you want
to connect. Expand the selection button and choose the desired
number of screens (1 in the case of a laptop computer).
14. Click Next.
Figure 3-6
15. When the system asks you if you wish to reboot the computer,
choose “Yes”. Click Next.

January 11, 2011
IMPORTANT
A vpd.properties file is created by the Install Shield in the home
directory. This file is absolutely necessary. Be sure it is not by any
means deleted.
Note After installing e-428 software, install all mandatory 428XL

patches, if any, in incremental numbering order. See Server
software patches (page 107).
See also Screen management (page 152).

January 11, 2011
Server ID code

Server ID code
In the 428XL Install window, you will have to enter a licence code that
must be supplied to you by SERCEL. When you contact Sercel to get a
licence code for your system, you have to supply a “Server ID” code.
For details, see Licence code (page 149). 3
If you add or move or remove any Ethernet interface card, then you may
have to request a new licence code from SERCEL.

January 11, 2011
Saving 428XL parameters
Saving 428XL parameters

Prior to uninstalling e428 software (for example if you want to install a
new release), save your operating parameters as follows:
1. Open the Log window. Right-click on the Parameters folder and
choose Open.
Figure 3-7
2. Save the file to a USB stick (using the Save command from the
File menu).
Figure 3-8
When you subsequently want to recover your settings, use the Load
command from the File menu and then select Apply from the Setup
menu (or use this toolbar button: ).

January 11, 2011
Uninstalling 428XL server software

If, for any reason, you need to uninstall 428XL server software, do the
following:
1. Save the Licence code (page 149) and your operating parameters
(see Saving 428XL parameters — page 104). 3
1. Power off the server computer (choose Shutdown in the
Administration window on the client computer).
2. Power on the server computer.
3. In the Login window:
- Type root 
- Type the root password that was entered when you or SERCEL
installed Linux (SERCEL installs Linux with administrator as
root password).
4. In a Terminal window (see Terminal window on page 116), use the
Change Directory command (cd) to go to the “_uninst” directory
of the 428XL application (for example: cd /export/home/e-428/
_uninst).
5. Type the following command:
./uninstallerLinux.bin
This launches the Install Shield wizard. Click Next.
6. In the Remove Existing File warning box, choose Yes to All.
This uninstalls 428XL server software. If Client software is hosted
on this computer, it may or may not be uninstalled too, depending
on whether or not it was installed together with Server
software.Click Finish.
7. After uninstallation is completed, delete the directory which
formerly contained 428XL server software, by typing the
following commands in a Terminal window:
cd /export/home

January 11, 2011
rm -Rf e-428
8. Close all applications. Reboot the computer (choose Logout from
the main menu bar and then Restart the computer, then click
OK).

January 11, 2011
Server software patches

To install (or uninstall) patches on the Server computer, you can use the
Patcher icon on the Server computer (if it has a keyboard and display),
or use Cygwin on a Client computer.
Installing a Server software patch

3
IMPORTANT
Software patches, if any, provided to you by Sercel must be installed in
incremental order. You must install all Mandatory-type patches.
To install a Server software patch:

1. Power off the server machine (choose Shutdown in the
Administration window) and power off the LCI-428.
2. Power on the server, log in as user428, and wait until log-in is
complete.
3. Open a Terminal window (see Terminal window on page 116). Stop
the server by typing in
s (wait until “Shutting down Tomcat .....” is displayed).
4. Open the Server Patch Installer window, either by clicking on the
428 Server Patcher icon on the desktop, or by typing the following
in a Terminal window:
/export/home/e-428/patch/patcher.sh &
e-428 server
Click
Figure 3-9 Patch Installer window

January 11, 2011
The left-hand pane shows which patches are already installed, if

any.
5. If the patch to install is supplied to you on a CD-ROM, insert it
into the server machine’s drive. If it is stored on a USB stick, plug
in the USB stick.
6. Click on the Install New Patch button in the Patch Installer
window. If any warning window appears, click OK. In the dialog
box that shows up, go to the folder containing the patch to install
(choose /media/cdrecorder for a CD-ROM,
/media/usbdisk for a USB stick), and select the patch
(s**v**el.jar).
7. Click on the Open button. This installs the patch and updates the
Patch Installer window (wait until the message “Install done”
appears).
e428 server
e428 (server)
Messages
Figure 3-10
The “Interface Level” field may or may not be incremented,

depending on the changes implemented by the patch. To view the
Interface Level, click on the top-level (server or client) folder in
the Patch Installer window, then click on the Details tab. The
Interface Level is used to check for compatibility between Server
and Client software each time any user connects to the server (if
interface levels do not match, an error message appears and the
connection request is rejected).
8. Click on the new patch in the Patch Installer window, then click
on the Readme tab for more information on the patch you
installed.

January 11, 2011

9. Close the Patch Installer window.
10. If required, type eject in the Terminal window to release the CD-
ROM.
11. Reboot the computer (choose Logout from the main menu bar and
then Restart the computer, then click OK).
12. After reboot is complete, power on the LCI-428.
3
Uninstalling a Server software patch
If, for any reason, you wish to uninstall any patches, you must do that
in decremental order, starting from the highest number.
To uninstall a Server patch:
1. Power off the server machine and LCI-428.
2. Power on the server, and wait until log-in is complete.
3. Open a Terminal window (see Terminal window on page 116). Stop
the server by typing in
s (wait until “Shutting down Tomcat .....” is displayed).
4. Open the Server Patch Installer window, either by clicking on the
428 Server Patcher icon on the desktop, or by typing the following
in a Terminal window:
/export/home/e-428/patch/patcher.sh &
The left-hand pane shows which patches are already installed.
5. Right-click on the patch you want to uninstall, and select
Uninstall from the menu that pops up. If any warning window
appears, click OK.

January 11, 2011
e428 server
e428 Right-click
Messages
Figure 3-11
Wait until the message “Install done” appears.

6. Close the Patch Installer window.
7. Reboot the computer (choose Logout from the main menu bar and
then Restart the computer, then click OK).
8. After reboot is complete, power on the LCI-428.

January 11, 2011
Firmware upgrading

Firmware upgrading
After installing a new release of 428XL software (and patches if any),
you have to update firmware in LCI-428 boards and in the remote field
electronics deployed. Typically, you do that with the Download setup
menu in the GUI’s Line window. Alternatively, you can upgrade field
electronics firmware via the XDEV (serial) port, for example if you
3
want to upgrade a unit prior to inserting it into the spread.
Using the Line window’s Download setup

See The Download setup (page 223) in 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1.
Upgrading through serial (XDEV) port
LCI-428
LAUX-428
PC/LAU cable 1C50079711 LAUL-428, etc.
XDEV1
428XL server
computer
Figure 3-12
1. Open a Terminal window. See Terminal window (page 116).

Note Do not use the “Backspace” or “Delete” key in any of the
commands that follow.
2. Change directory to “/users/e-428/lcCommon/work”.
3. Type the following command:
rsterm /dev/ttyS0 <Return>

January 11, 2011
Firmware upgrading
LCI-428
1. Unplug the Ethernet cable from the LCI-428.
2. Connect the XDEV1 port of the LCI-428 to the server computer’s
serial port, using a PC/LAU cable (supplied in the accessory kit).
3. Power on the LCI-428.
4. Type the following commands:
~s
rsFiles/rsclean.vx <Return> (wait for the message “rsclean
end”).
sysReset <Return> (As a result, a banner should
appear, showing the identification of the
LCI board).
~s
rsFiles/rsCheckHardwareVersion.vx <Return>
This returns a message indicating the hardware version (in the
“value” field):
-> #/***************************************************************/
-> #/******** Read Value of Hardware version H ********/
-> #/******** after these comments ********/
-> #/******** ********/
-> #/******** HardwareVersion = 0x......: value = H = ... ********/
-> #/******** ********/
-> #/***************************************************************/
-> HardwareVersion
HardwareVersion = 0x1fc010: value = 2 = 0x2
Hardware version in this field
~s
rsFiles/rsBurnLci428H V .vx <Return>
Software release number, for instance
112 for release 1.0 updated with patch 12.
Hardware version
This loads the specified software release to the LCI-428.

January 11, 2011
Firmware upgrading

Wait for the message “MODULE ... /rsBurnLci428H-V- - -.vx end”.
You have to type two more commands:
sysReset <Return>
lgsLoadDefaultConfig <Return>
Field electronics 3
1. Connect the XDEV port of the field unit to the server computer’s
serial port, using a PC/LAU cable (supplied in the accessory kit).
2. Press “Ctrl J” if you don't have any prompt in the command tool
window.
~s
rsFiles/rsclean.vx <Return> (wait for the message “rsclean
end”).
sysReset <Return> (As a result, a banner should
appear, showing the identification of the
field unit).
~s
rsFiles/rsCheckHardwareVersion.vx <Return>
This returns a message indicating the hardware version (in the
“value” field).
~s
rsFiles/rsBurnLaux428H V .vx <Return>
Software release number, for instance
112 for release 1.0 updated with patch 12.
Hardware version
This loads the specified software release to the unit. Wait for the
message “.../rsBurnLauxH-V- - -.vx end”.
For an LAUX-428, you have to type two more commands:
January 11, 2011
Firmware upgrading
sysReset <Return>
For the other types of units, do not use those two commands. The
“rsBurn” commands to use, depending on the type of unit, are the
following:
rsFiles/rsBurnLaul428H V .vx <Return> for an LAUL428

rsFiles/rsBurnLruH V .vx <Return> for an LRU.
rsFiles/rsBurnLaur428H V .vx <Return> for an LAUR.
rsFiles/rsBurnLauxH V .vx <Return> for an LAUX.
rsFiles/rsBurnLaulH V .vx <Return> for an LAUL.
rsFiles/rsBurnLauxsH V .vx <Return> for an LAUXS.
rsFiles/rsBurnLaulsH V .vx <Return> for an LAULS.
etc.

January 11, 2011
Firmware upgrading

428 Lite
If the LAUX-428 used as LCI is not visible on the 428 Lite Client
computer, please follow step 1, and step 2 if required:
1. Connect a serial cable (P/N 1C50079711) from the computer's
serial port to the XDEV1 port of the LAUX-428.
- In a Terminal window on the computer, type minicom
3
- Type the following commands:
lgsBootTargetSetI "172.30.201.1" <Return>
lgsBootStartupSetI "/users/e-428/lcx/binsh/
startLcx.hci428.cmd" <Return>
lgsBootHostSetI "172.30.128.1" <Return>
lgsBootBoxSetI 0 <Return>
sysReset <Return>
- The LAUX-428 can now be used as an LCI-428 for a 428 Lite
configuration.
- Open the Config window and click On Line. Open a LINE main
window and select Download Setup to load LCI-428 software to
the LAUX-428 (use the Update LCI button).
2. If the LAUX-428 is still not visible after step1, follow the
instructions to load 428.3.0 software via the XDEV1 port of the
LAUX-428. See Field electronics (page 113).
- Upgrading takes about 30 minutes.
- When LAUX-428 upgrading is completed, type the following
commands:
sysReset <Return>
sysReset <Return>
The LAUX-428 can now be used as an LCI-428 for a 428 Lite
configuration.

January 11, 2011
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
When you contact SERCEL’s customer support centre for assistance,
you may be requested to supply log files so that support engineers can
trace your problem and fix it more quickly. To do that, see System status
archive tool (File Packager) on page 58 in 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1.
Also, you can use the Publish command in the Log window to get a
compressed copy of your setup parameters or operator reports, etc., that
can be downloaded from the crew’s Web site. See The crew’s Web site
on page 59 in 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1.
Below are a few basics that may help if, for any reason, you are
requested to type any Linux command, or to type commands to control
a serial port, etc.
See also Identifying Ethernet interface ports (page 43).
Terminal window
To open a Terminal window on a Linux host computer, right-click on
the desktop and choose “Open Terminal” from the popup menu.
Terminal window on a serial port

To open a Terminal window on a Linux computer’s serial port, type
minicom in a Terminal window.
USB stick management

Inserting a USB stick causes a removable disk icon to appear on the
desktop. Right-click on it and then select the appropriate command
from the popup menu (Open, Unmount Volume).
WARNING
All USB sticks must be removed when reinstalling Linux or their
contents may be erased.

January 11, 2011
Troubleshooting

If for any reason, the USB stick fails to mount, or is not recognized by
the system, try the following procedure:
1. Log in as root.
2. Open a Terminal window (you can press the Return key to check
3.
for the prompt).
Plug in the USB stick.
3
4. Type more /etc/fstab
5. Wait for the USB directory to mount. This can be /media/flash or
/media/diskonkey or /media/usbdisk or any other.
6. If no USB directory appears, type dmesg
7. Near the end of the display, look for something like “sde : sde1”
(sde1 stands for the “DEVICE”).
8. Type mkdir /media/usb (USB is now the file system).
9. Type mount /dev/DEVICE /media/usb -t vfat
(replace “DEVICE” by the one identified above).
This should mount the USB stick. It should be available from the
Desktop environment.

January 11, 2011
Troubleshooting

January 11, 2011
Chapter
This chapter describes how to install or uninstall 428XL

client software on a computer.

• Installing RedHat Linux (page 121)
• User account (page 128)
• Installing Client software (page 132)
• Setting the computer’s IP address (page 135)
• Client software patches (page 139)
• Remote access to Server from a Linux Client (page 142)
• Remote access to Server from a Windows Client
(page 143)
• First-time log-in (page 148)
• Licence code (page 149)
• Uninstalling 428XL Client software (page 150)

January 11, 2011
Overview
Overview
The following Operating Software can be used for e428 Client host
computers:
• Red Hat Linux V5.4, recommended by Sercel. If, for any reason, you
need to install or reinstall Linux, see Installing RedHat Linux
(page 121).
• WindowsTM XP SP3. This manual does not include any specific
procedure for installing WindowsTM. If required, contact your system
administrator to install WindowsTM.
Prior to installing e428 Client software, whether on a Linux or a
Windows host computer, it is recommended to create a 428 user account
(user428) with no administrator privilege. See User account (page 128).
Then, log in with that user account to install e428 Client software. See
Installing Client software (page 132).

January 11, 2011
Client software installation
Installing RedHat Linux

In this section:
• Hardware specific information (page 121)
• Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer (page 121)
Hardware specific information

Prior to installing RedHat, read hardware specific information supplied
4
by Sercel if any.
Installing Redhat 5.4 on Client computer

If for any reason you have to install or re-install the Redhat Linux
Operating System on a 428XL Linux Client computer (such as the
computer supplied by Sercel), use the procedure below. Otherwise, see
Installing Client software (page 132).
If this is a re-installation, power off the computer.
CAUTION
This installation procedure will erase everything on the hard disk.
WARNING
After Redhat Linux is installed, a GRUB boot loader window shows up
each time you power up or boot up the computer. Do not press any key
(the boot loader window should disappear automatically).

SERCEL).
2. Insert the SERCEL RedHat V5.4 (32 bit) CD-ROM into the
drive.

January 11, 2011
IMPORTANT
Be sure to use the RedHat DVD-ROM or CD-ROM supplied by
SERCEL, rather than the one accompanying the machine.

4. When the message “to install or upgrade in graphical mode”
appears, press Enter (or wait until the timeout delay has expired).
Enter.
9. In the installation window, choose Install RedHat. Click Next.
10. If a mouse configuration window appears, leave the default setting
unchanged (unless you know which type of mouse to choose).
Click Next.
11. If an Upgrade Examine window appears, choose Install RedHat
Linux. Click Next.
12. In the disk partitioning window, choose Automatically partition.
- Click Next. If a warning box appears, choose Yes.
- Choose Remove all partitions on this system.

January 11, 2011

- Make sure “Review and modify partitioning layout” is NOT
SELECTED.
- Leave other options unchanged.
- Click Next.
Click Next. 4
15. In the network configuration window:
- Select the Active on Boot option (done by default).
- Select eth0.
- IP address: enter 172.27.128.2
- Netmask: enter 255.255.255.0
- Click OK.
- In the Gateway fields, enter the following IP address:
172.27.128.20
warning you that the DNS fields are left blank. Click Continue
to dismiss that warnings.
administrator) for the e428 client and keep it in a safe place.

January 11, 2011

- In the Desktops group, select KDE Desktop Environment.
- Development Tools;
- Development Libraries;
- Click on Optional packages. Select sysstat.
- Click Close.
- Leave other settings unchanged.
- Click Next.
19. In the installation window, click Next.
20. The installation program installs packages from the RedHat DVD-
ROM or CD-ROM (this takes about a quarter of an hour).
21. After installation is complete, remove the DVD-ROM or CD-
ROM from the drive.
22. Click Reboot.
24. In the Firewall window, choose No Firewall.
Forward, then Yes.

January 11, 2011

30. In the System User window, type user428 in the following four
fields:
4
- Username
- Full Name
- Password
- Confirm Password
31. Click Forward.
33. In the Additional CDs window, click Finish. This reboots the
computer.
34. Log in as user428 user.
following commands:
cd /tmp
reboot
36. Log in as root. Enter the root password (e. g. administrator)

37. Click on the “System” menu and select Administration then
Services. In the Service Configuration window:
- Scroll until the kudzu option is visible. Disable the kudzu option
(click to the left to clear the check box).

January 11, 2011
- Scroll until the sendmail option is visible. Disable the sendmail

option (click to the left to clear the check box).
- From the File menu, select Save Changes, then select Quit.
This completes the installation of Redhat Linux.
If you wish to use a printer on the Client computer, click on the
“System” menu and select Administration then Printing. In the
Printer Configuration window:
- Click on the New icon. This opens a printer installation wizard.
- In the Add a New Printer Queue window, click Forward.
- In the Queue Name window, enter the desired Name (with no
space characters) and Description (i. e. any comments you think
necessary) for the printer attached to the workstation.
- Click Forward. In the Queue Type window, choose the
appropriate type of printer (“Locally connected” or
“Networked”). If none is prompted, be sure a local or network
printer is attached, and click on Rescan Devices.
- Click Forward.
Click to select
manufacturer
Figure 4-1
- Select the printer manufacturer and model from the option

button. If the type of printer you wish to use does not appear in
the popup menu, choose a similar model from the same

January 11, 2011

manufacturer (for example, if you are using a Deskjet HP6840,
choose the 6127 model).
- Click Forward. Choose the desired driver (postscript, etc.) if
required.
- Click Apply. This completes the printer installation. (Then the
system should prompt you to print a test page).
- From the Action menu, select Quit. 4
- If a save dialog box shows up, choose Save.

January 11, 2011
User account
User account
Prior to installing e428 Client software, it is recommended to create a
428 user account (user428) with no administrator privilege.
Linux user account

To create a 428 user account on a Linux host computer, do the
following:
1. In the Login window, type root 
2. Enter the password (e. g. administrator).
3. Click on the red hat icon and select System Settings then Users
and Groups.
4. In the window that pops up, click on the Add User button.
Figure 4-2
5. Enter user428 as user name and password. Click OK. “user428”

should now appear in the list of users on the client computer.
6. Log out.

January 11, 2011
User account

Windows user account
Windows XP
To create a 428 user account on a Windows XP host, do the following:
1. Right-click on the “My Computer” icon in the workspace, and
choose “Manage” from the popup menu.
2. In the Computer Management window, expand the “Local Users 4
and Groups” folder.
3. Right-click on the “Users” folder and choose “New User” from
the popup menu.
Figure 4-3
4. In the New User window, enter user428 as login name in the

“User Name” field, and enter user428 as password.

January 11, 2011
User account
Windows 7
Disable User Account Control as follows:
1. Open the User Account Control settings dialog box (select
Control Panel > User Accounts and Family Safety > User
Accounts).
2. Drag down the slider to the Never Notify position.
3. Click OK.
Figure 4-4

January 11, 2011
User account

Also, turn off the Windows Firewall (select Control Panel > System
and Security > Windows Firewall).
Figure 4-5

January 11, 2011
Installing Client software

If this is a reinstallation, uninstall the former release first. See
Uninstalling 428XL Client software (page 150).
The procedure below is typically intended for a local user computer
running on WindowsTM or Linux, or an extra local user computer, or a
remote user.
On a Linux host computer, log in with the user428 user account
(password: user428).
To install 428XL Client software, do the following:
1. Insert the SERCEL DVD-ROM into the drive.
2. Use the file browser or explorer to open the Client directory on the
DVD-ROM:
e428V5.0/linux/client for a Linux host computer
(in /media/cdrecorder);
or e428V5.0\windows\client for a Windows host computer.
3. Run the installation file:
- On a Linux host computer, type the following commands in a
Terminal window:
cd /media/cdrecorder/e428V5.0/linux/client
(or cd /media/cdrom/e428V5.0/linux/client)
./e-428Clients-v5.0-linux.bin
- On a Windows host computer, double-click on this file:
e-428Clients-v5.0-win32.exe
4. Follow the instructions prompted in the Install Shield wizard
window. Click Next.

January 11, 2011

V5.0
Figure 4-6
5. In the successive licence agreement windows, carefully read the

terms of each agreement.
4
Figure 4-7
6. Choose “I accept”. Click Next.

7. Select the directory where you want to install 428XL client
software or keep the default directory prompted, i. e. on a Linux
host:
/home/user428/Sercel/e-428v5.0
(on a Linux host computer, the “Browse” button may not work
until you type a dot character in the associated path field).
8. Click Next.
9. If a message appears that asks you if you want to overwrite the
Java Virtual Machine, choose “Yes”.
10. In the summary information window, click Next.
11. After installation is complete, click Finish.
12. Close all windows.

January 11, 2011
- Eject the CD-ROM (on a Linux host, select the “e428 ...” icon
on the desktop, right-click and select “Eject” from the popup
menu).
- Remove the CD-ROM from the drive.
13. On a Linux host, click on the “Applications” menu and select
Preferences, then Sceensaver.
- From the Mode dropdown menu, select Disable Screen Saver.
- Click Close.
14. Reboot the computer.
To open the GUI, double-click on the icon available on your
computer’s desktop. See 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1.
Install mandatory software patches. See:
• Client software patches (page 139) and
• Installing a screen management driver for Linux (page 152)
Note for Windows XP users:

- Open the Internet Explorer window;
- Select Internet Options from the Tools menu;
- Click on the Advanced tab;
- Scroll until the Security options are visible;
- Choose “Allow active content to run in files on My
Computer”.

January 11, 2011
Setting the computer’s IP address

Unless the Client host computer also hosts Server software (as in the
case of a 428-Lite laptop) you have to assign an IP address to it so that
it can communicate with the server computer.
Linux Client host computer

When you installed Linux on the Client host computer you were 4
requested to enter 172.27.128.2 as IP address, but if you want to connect
several Client computers, you must choose a different address for each
of them. To change the IP address, do the following:
1. From the System menu, select Administration and then
Network. Enter the password for the root user account if the
system asks you to do so.
2. In the Network Configuration window, choose the eth0 network
interface and click Configure (enter the password for the root
user account if the system asks you to do so).
Figure 4-8
3. In the Network Configuration window, double-click on the eth0

network interface.
4. Choose Statically set IP addresses.

January 11, 2011
5. In the IP address field,

enter the IP address you
want to assign to the
Client computer on the
172.27.128._ network
(e. g. 172.27.128.2). See
Networking on page 40.
172.27.128.2
6. In the Subnet mask field,
enter 255.255.255.0.
Click OK.
Figure 4-9
Note In the case of a computer also hosting server software, you may
have to open this window (Ethernet Device) and make sure the
Statically set IP addresses option is activated (instead of
DHCP).
Windows Client host computer

To set the IP address of a Client computer running on WindowsTM, do
the following:
Windows XP
1. From the Start menu, choose Settings, then Network
Connections.
Figure 4-10
2. Right-click on the Local Area Connection and select Properties.

January 11, 2011

3. Click on Internet Protocol (TCPIP) in the list box and then click
on the Properties button.
4. Choose “Use the following IP address”.
5. In the IP address field, enter the IP address you want to assign to
the Client computer on the 172.27.128._ network (e. g.
172.27.128.2). See Networking on page 40.
6. In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.255.0. 4
172.27.128.2
255.255.255.0
Figure 4-11
7. Click OK.
Windows7
1. Select Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network
Connections.
Figure 4-12
2. Right-click on the Local Area Connection interface and select

Properties.
3. In the Local Area Connection Properties box, select Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties.

January 11, 2011
Figure 4-13
4. Choose “Use the following IP address”.

5. In the IP address field, enter the IP address you want to assign to
the Client computer on the 172.27.128._ network (e. g.
172.27.128.2). See Networking on page 40.
6. In the Subnet mask field, enter 255.255.255.0.
7. Click OK.

January 11, 2011
Client software patches

Note To install/uninstall server patches, see Server software patches
(page 107).
Installing a Client software patch
IMPORTANT
4
Software patches, if any, provided to you by Sercel must be installed in
incremental order. You must install all Mandatory-type patches.
To install a Client software patch:

1. Log in as user428.
2. On a Linux host, double-click on the Patcher icon on the desktop.
On a Windows host, select the Patcher menu item from the Start >
Programs menu.
e-428 e-428
Windows Start
e-428
menu bar
e-428
Figure 4-14
This opens the Patch Installer window. The left-hand pane shows
which patches are already installed, if any.
e-428 client
Click
Figure 4-15

January 11, 2011
3. Click on the Install New Patch button in the Patch Installer

window.
4. Click OK to dismiss the warning box saying that you must close
the application (you must have done that at step 1).
5. In the dialog box that shows up, go to the folder containing the
patch to install (on a Linux host, choose /media/cdrecorder for a
CD-ROM, /media/usbdisk for a USB stick), and select the patch.
6. Click on the Open button. This installs the patch and updates the
Patch Installer window.
e-428 client
Click
e428 (client)
Figure 4-16
The “Interface Level” field may or may not be incremented,

depending on the changes implemented by the patch. To view the
Interface Level, click on the top-level folder in the Patch Installer
window, then click on the Details tab. The Interface Level is used
to check for compatibility between Server and Client software
each time any user connects to the server (if interface levels do not
match, an error message appears and the connection request is
rejected).
7. Click on the new patch in the Patch Installer window, then click
on the Readme tab for more information on the patch you
installed.
Uninstalling a Client software patch

If, for any reason, you wish to uninstall any patches, you must do that
in decremental order, starting from the highest number.

January 11, 2011

To uninstall a patch, right-click on it in the Patch Installer window and
select Uninstall from the menu that pops up.
e-428 client
e428 Right-click
4
Figure 4-17

January 11, 2011
Remote access to Server from a Linux Client
Remote access to Server from a Linux

Client
You can use the procedure below to type commands or browse through
files on the Server computer from a Linux Client computer, for example
if the Server computer has no keyboard or display.
1. Open a Terminal window on the Client computer (right-click on
the desktop and choose “Open Terminal” from the popup menu).
2. Type the command
xhost + 172.27.128.1
(this allows the Server to display text in the Client computer’s
Terminal window).
3. Still in the Client computer’s Terminal window, type the
command
rlogin 172.27.128.1 –l user428
(in place of “user428”, you can use any other account dedicated to
the e428 application).
4. Type the password for the Server’s user428 account (normally
without pressing Return).
5. After logging in to the Server, type the command
setenv DISPLAY 172.27.128.X :0.0
(where 172.27.128.X is the IP address of the Client computer on
which you typed the previous commands).
6. To launch the Linux file explorer, type
nautilus &
7. To log out, type
logout
By default, none of the above commands is persistent.

January 11, 2011
Remote access to Server from a Windows Client

Remote access to Server from a Windows
Client
If Client software is hosted on a Windows computer, Cygwin provides
a Linux-like interface on the Win32 platform, allowing you to start, stop
or restart the server even though the server host has no keyboard or
display.
4
WARNING
The Cygwin user interface will not work unless the Windows user
account is the same as the Server user account (user428).
Installing Cygwin software

1. On the 428XL client PC, log in as Administrator.
2. Open the “cygwinInstaller” directory on the Cygwin CD-ROM.
Double-click on the cygwin_setup.exe file.
3. In the Cygwin Setup window, click Next.
Figure 4-18
4. Choose “Install from Local Directory”. Click Next.

January 11, 2011
Figure 4-19
5. You must select the root directory (c:\cygwin) as the directory

where to install Cygwin. Choose the recommended options (All
users, Unix/binary). Click Next.
Figure 4-20
6. Use the Browse button to select the CD-ROM drive and the
cygwinInstaller directory. Click Next.
Figure 4-21
7. Choose to install all packages (click on the arrow to choose

“Install” instead of “Default”). Click Next.

January 11, 2011

Click to choose
“Install”
Figure 4-22
4
8. Wait until installation is complete.
Configuring Cygwin
To set up Cygwin parameters for the 428XL, do the following:
1. Log in with the 428 user name. See Windows user account
(page 129).
2. Open the cygwin directory on the e-428v5.0 CD-ROM.
3. Double-click on the sercel_config.exe file.
4. Choose to uncompress the file to the C:\cygwin directory.
5. In the C:\cygwin directory, double-click on the sercel_config
directory.
6. Set up the Sercel configuration by double-clicking on the
confX.cmd file. As a result the following icons should be
available on the desktop: cygwinmain, startddterm, startdttfile,
startSga.

January 11, 2011
Figure 4-23
Working with Cygwin
Starting the X-server

The X-server needs to be started only once, by double-clicking on the
cygwinmain icon:
Figure 4-24
As a result the X-server appears in the taskbar.
Opening an xterm Terminal window

Double-click on the startxterm (for Linux) icon:
startxterm
Figure 4-25

January 11, 2011

Opening a Nautilus file manager window
Double-click on the startNautilus (for Linux) icon:
startNautilus
Figure 4-26
4

January 11, 2011
First-time log-in
First-time log-in
If you are using your 428XL system for the first time, see Opening a
user session (page 38) in User’s Manual Vol. 1 to launch the e428 GUI
and then select the appropriate options and settings in the Install
window (licence code, etc.) and in the Configuration window to match
your survey requirements.

January 11, 2011
Licence code

Licence code
The 428XL system will not be fully functional until the licence code
(password) supplied to you by SERCEL is entered in the Install
window.
Figure 4-27
The licence code is based on the “Server Id” code displayed with the
Server Id option button. Record the code prompted. You will need that
Server Id code if, for any reason, you contact SERCEL to get a new
licence for your system.
Because you have to enter the licence code again whenever you reinstall
e428 software, be sure to save it (e. g. on a USB stick) and keep it in a
safe place.

January 11, 2011
Uninstalling 428XL Client software
Uninstalling 428XL Client software

If, for any reason, you need to uninstall 428XL Client software, use the
following procedure.
1. Login as user428.
2. Close all 428XL windows.
3. On a Linux host, double-click on the Uninstall icon on the
desktop. On a Windows host, select Programs > e-428-client >
Uninstall from the Start menu
Windows Start
menu bar
e-428 e-428
e-428
e-428
Figure 4-28
4. This opens the usual Installshield. Follow the instructions

prompted.
Figure 4-29
5. Click Next in the successive windows, and finally click Finish.

6. Reboot the computer.

January 11, 2011
Chapter
5 Peripherals
In this chapter:
• Screen management (page 152)

• Plotters (page 157)
• Tape drives (page 163)
• NAS server (page 181)
• FTP server (page 196)
• MDR or RVT300 virtual tape recorder (page 200)
• Vehicle Tracking box (page 203)

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Screen management
Screen management
In this section:
• Installing a screen management driver for Linux (page 152)
• Multi-screen management (page 153)
• Updating the NVIDIA driver (page 155)
Installing a screen management driver for Linux

After first-time installation of e428V5.0 software, follow the procedure
below to run the NVIDIA driver installation script (graphicInstall.sh)
from the e428 DVD supplied by SERCEL, located in this folder:
/media/<cdrom_name>/e428v5.0/linux/tools
To install the driver from the e428 DVD:
1. At the Linux Login Panel, log in as root and type administrator
as password.
2. Open a Terminal window.
3. Type cd / media/E428V5.0/e428v5.0/linux/tools/
4. Type ./graphicInstall.sh <Nber_of_screen> nokvm
(for example: ./graphicInstall.sh 2 nokvm
for 2 screens connected and no “kvm” box installed).
5. Type reboot
Note To change the number of screens, change 4/3 to wide, etc. see
Multi-screen management (page 153).

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Screen management

Multi-screen management
Each computer can be equipped with up to four display screens. You
have to install the adequate number of graphic cards in the computer.
IMPORTANT
After adding a Graphic card and connecting an additional display unit,
or moving a Graphic card to another slot, you need to reinstall the
Operating System and e428 software.
If you have two or more screens, use the procedure below to configure 5
the system:
1. Open a Terminal window.
2. Type:
cd /usr/local/binsh
./configureDisplay.sh <n> <type of resolution> <orientation>
where <n> = number of screens connected, i. e. 1 to 4
<type of resolution> (optional) = standard or wide
<orientation> (optional) = linear or matrix (defaults to
linear).
3. Type reboot
Be sure the display screens are connected to the appropriate graphic
accelerator card port so that the mouse pointer can jump to the suitable
border from one screen to the other when moved horizontally. (Either
change the connections or move the screens as required).
See Figure 5-1 on page 154.
WARNING
Use either SVGA-type or DMI-type cables. Do not mix the two types.
Do not use any SVGA/DMI converter. (The display units you purchase
from SERCEL are supplied along with the necessary cables).
Note To connect “wide” 22 in. screens, preferably use the VGA ports
on the client computer.

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Screen management
2 4
“Matrix”
setup
1 3
Figure 5-1 : Multi-screen workstation

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Screen management

Updating the NVIDIA driver
If for any reason the NVIDIA driver that is already running on the
computer, from a previous installation, needs to be updated, a new
driver is delivered in an e428 software patch.
Copy the patch to a USB stick, then install the new driver as follows:
1. Boot the computer in Single mode.
2. Install the driver from the USB stick.
Booting in Single mode 5

1. Wait for the Linux GRUB window.
2. Press any key.
3. Keep the first line selected:
Red Hat Enterprise Linux WS (2.6 .... ELsmp)
4. Press the “e” key (within 10 seconds).
5. Select the second line.
6. Press the “e” key.
7. At the end of the line, type single (with a space character ahead).
8. Press the Return key. The new line should look like this:
<t ramdisk_size ........ single
9. Press the “b” key (this causes the computer to boot up).
10. Wait a few seconds for the single-mode boot to be complete until
the prompt “sh-3.00#” appears.
Installing the driver from a USB stick

1. Insert the USB stick. If for any reason the USB stick is not
recognized, see USB stick management (page 116).
cd /media/... (replace /media/... by the file system).
cp graphicInstall.sh /tmp
January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Screen management
cd /tmp
chmod +x graphicInstall.sh
./graphicInstall.sh 1 nokvm
umount /media/... (replace /media/... by the file system).
3. Remove the USB stick.
4. Type reboot.
See Multi-screen management (page 153).

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Plotters

Plotters
The switches on the rear panel of the plotter should be set as shown
below:
2 (On)
Power On/Off
1 (Off)
5
Ethernet port
AC
Power
Figure 5-2 Plotter rear panel
Mount parts
4 screws, M6×50
4 screws, Mount plate

M5×12 756084647
Figure 5-3

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Plotters
8 screws,
M6×16
Mount plate
756084647
4 standoffs,
756085132
4 screws, Mount plate

M6×50 756084647
Figure 5-4
8 mounting holes
(dia. 6.2)
Mount plate
756084647 242 300 350
492
514
Figure 5-5 Mounting dimensions in mm

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Plotters

VERITAS V12 plotter settings
Note If you want to reuse a plotter from a 408UL system, it must be
upgraded with an Ethernet port (upgrade kit part No.
1L21084066). See Ethernet port upgrade (page 160).
Physical interface configuration

- Remove the 2 screws securing the hinged rear panel, and flip it
open.
- Make sure the 40-pin ribbon cable is connected to the “Short
5
Line” connector.
- Make sure the 2-pin jumper (J15) is set to “S”.
- Close the rear panel.
Configuration procedure
• Power on the plotter. The display should read "IDLE M1".
• Press <ON/OFF LINE>. The display should read "OFF LINE".
• Press <MENU>. The display should (briefly) read the first option
label "SEL MODE", and its value "USER M1".
• Examine options from "SEL MODE" to "BEEPER" using the
following sequence:
• Change the current option value if necessary using <up> or <down>
blue key, the display should read the new value of the option (see
table below).
• Press <MENU> to display next option label.
When done press <ON/OFF LINE>. The display should read "IDLE
M1".

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Plotters
V12 / 428XL settings

(Firmware version 3.1 or higher).
Table 5-1 V12 / 428XL settings

Option Label value Comment
SEL MODE USER M1 User configuration location

SEL TEST INACTIVE Auto test launcher
CONTRAST C5 (or higher) Plot contrast
SPEED 4.0 IPS Paper speed
Paper thickness.
MEDIA LT/HV PAPER
For later-production paper choose “HV Film”.
SCALING NO SCALE Plot scaling
VERT EMU 203 spi Vertical resolution in scans per inch
FF LENGTH 2" LONG Form feed length in inch
SCANWIDTH 296 bytes Plot width in bytes per scan (1 byte = 8 dots).
BEEPER PULSED Paper out audio beep.
Ethernet port upgrade

An Ethernet port is required on the Veritas V12 plotter in order to attach
it to the 428XL system. To install the upgrade kit (SERCEL part No.
1L21084066), if required, do the following:
1. Remove the left side cover.
2. Flip open the rear panel.
3. Unplug the ribbon cable from the plotter printed circuit board.
4. Remove the DB37 connector mount bracket. Remove the
connector and ribbon cable assembly.

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Plotters

Remove the two screws
securing the rear panel
Notch required for Ethernet
card mount bracket
Figure 5-6
5. Remove the slotted plastic strip. Using cutting pliers and a file or a
soldering iron, cut off two teeth from the plastic strip as shown in
Figure 5-6 in order to make a notch in it so that the Ethernet card
can be mounted.
6. Put the slotted plastic strip back in place.
7. Slip the ribbon cable from the Ethernet card into the cabinet and
then secure the Ethernet card.
8. Secure the Ethernet port panel and the Ethernet card mount
bracket.
9. Connect the ribbon cable from the Ethernet card to the interface
card.
10. Plug the ribbon cable from the interface card into “Short Line”
connector on the plotter printed circuit board.
11. Put the self-adhesive interface card mount plate in place and
secure the interface card to it.

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Plotters
Self-adhesive Ethernet port

mount plate panel
Interface card
Plotter printed
circuit board
Ethernet card
L S
J15
Short Line
Figure 5-7
12. Set the J15 jumper to the “S” position.

13. Put the left side cover and rear panel back in place.

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Tape drives

Tape drives
Tape drive shock-mount assembly
Figure 5-8 : Tape drive shock-mount parts
For CD490-E: shock-mount assembly part No. 752075848A.

For CD590: shock-mount assembly part No. 1653077133A.
(Dimensions in mm)
340
0
320
340
20
0
320
20
0
20
0
20
6 mounting holes
6 mounting holes (dia. 7)
(dia. 7)
1653077133A 300
752075848A 250 (CD590)
(CD490-E)
480 580
500 600
Figure 5-9 : Tape drive mount plate

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Tape drives
Supported tape drives

To see the list of supported tape drives, open the following file in the
text editor:
/export/home/sn408Xxl/sn408Sol/workSpace/tapes/devices.par
This file does not only contain the list of supported devices but also the
parameters for each of them.
Example:
"FUJITSU ", "M2488ED ", 3490E_CLASS, 2, 0x9005, 0;
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
The following parameters must be supplied:
• Vendor Id (a)
• Product Id (b)
• Device class (c)
• Write retry page code (d)
• Write retry param code (e)
• Space to OEM support (f)
The device class should be one of the following: 3592_CLASS,
3480_CLASS, 3490E_CLASS, 3590_CLASS, DLT_CLASS,
LTO_CLASS, DAT_CLASS or NEW_CLASS.
You can add new devices, with the appropriate parameters.
CAUTION
Extreme care is required if you add any device that has not been tested
by Sercel, because it may not be exactly compliant with the SCSI
standard and may need a software patch to work properly.

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Tape drives

FUJI 3490-E or 3590 SCSI address
Setting 3490-E or 3590 SCSI address

The SCSI device address on the cartridge drive is properly set prior to
shipment from SERCEL. However, after replacement or after
connecting one additional cartridge drive, for example, you may need
to change the SCSI address. This can be done using the five keys
(SHIFT, TEST, START, UNLOAD, RESET) and the LED display on
the front panel of the cartridge drive. The necessary instructions are
provided below. 5
• Power up the cartridge drive.
• Wait for self-tests to be completed (about 30 seconds).
• If any cartridge is loaded in the drive, remove it.
At this stage the front panel display should read : * or *0
• Change the target ID.
WARNING
With the 428XL system, only addresses 0 to 5 are allowed.
Note Remove medium changer magazine (if mounted) prior to

performing the procedure below.
The following procedure describes the steps required to set the Target
ID.
• Step 1 Press and hold both the TEST and UNLOAD keys, wait
for OFFLINE to be displayed then release both keys (if
there is an outstanding SCSI command or if there is a tape
loaded in the tape drive then Off-line mode cannot be
entered). Once the keys are released then the first item,
DIAGMODE, in the main Off-line menu will be
displayed. (Keys must be held for approximately 2
seconds before Off-line mode is entered).

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Tape drives
• Step 2 Press the START pushbutton until SETTING is

displayed.
• Step 3 Press the TEST pushbutton.
• Step 4 The first option, 70: S.TAR, is displayed. Press TEST to
view the setting. The setting may be incremented by
pressing START or decremented by pressing SHIFT and
START.
• Step 5 Press TEST to return to 70: S.TAR
• Step 6 Press SHIFT and START until 89: (3490-E) or 92: (3590)
WTROM is displayed.
• Step 7 Press TEST to view settings at option 89: WTROM.
• Step 8 Press START until y is displayed.
• Step 9 Press the TEST pushbutton to write the setting to ROM.
• Step 10 Press TEST to return to WTROM.
• Step 11 Press RESET twice to return to *.
After self-tests are complete (this takes about 30 seconds), the display
should read *0 or * unless the SCSI address display option is enabled
(see below). The drive is ready for use with its new address.
Displaying SCSI address on FUJI 3490-E or 3590 operator panel

The Target ID (see above) can optionally be displayed on the cartridge
drive operator panel when no cartridge is loaded.
• Power up the cartridge drive
• Wait for self-tests to be completed (about 30 seconds)
• If any cartridge is loaded in the drive, remove it.
At this stage the front panel display should read: * or *0 (unless the
SCSI address display option is already enabled).
Note Remove medium changer magazine (if mounted) prior to

performing the procedure below.

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Tape drives

The following procedure describes the steps required to display the
Target ID (SCSI address) on the operator panel.
• Step 1 Press and hold both the TEST and UNLOAD keys, wait
for OFFLINE to be displayed then release both keys (if
there is an outstanding SCSI command or if there is a tape
loaded in the tape drive then Off-line mode cannot be
entered). Once the keys are released then the first item,
DIAGMODE, in the main Off-line menu will be
displayed. (Keys must be held for approximately 2
seconds before Off-line mode is entered). 5
• Step 2 Press the START pushbutton until SETTING is
displayed.
• Step 3 Press the TEST pushbutton.
• Step 4 The first option, 70: S.TAR, is displayed. Press START
until 74: S.*N is displayed.
• Step 5 Press TEST to view the setting. The setting can be
changed by pressing START or SHIFT and START.
The display should read *N: YES for the SCSI address to appear on
the operator panel
• Step 6 Press TEST to return to 70: S.TAR
• Step 7 Press SHIFT and START until 89: (3490-E) or 92: (3590)
WTROM is displayed.
• Step 8 Press TEST to view settings at option WTROM.
• Step 9 Press START until y is displayed.
• Step 10 Press the TEST pushbutton to write the setting to ROM.
• Step 11 Press TEST to return to WTROM.
• Step 12 Press RESET twice to return to *.
After self-tests are complete (this takes about 30 seconds), the display
should read *N (where N is the SCSI address).

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Tape drives
Resetting M2488 T4 drive initialisation parameters

In the event of record errors on a 3490E M2488 T4 FUJITSU drive, use
the procedure below to reset the initialization parameters.
1. Power off the drive.
2. Connect an RS cable between a PC Com port and the drive Com
port.
Use one of the following cables according to the PC Com port:
DB25 socket to DB9 socket DB9 socket to DB9 socket
2 (tx) _______ 2 (rx) 3 (tx) _______ 2 (rx)
3 (rx) _______ 3 (tx) 2 (rx) _______ 3 (tx)
4 (rts) _______ 8 (cts) 4 (dtr) _______ 6 (dsr)
5 (cts) _______ 7 (rts) 5 (gnd) _______ 5 (gnd)
6 (dsr) _______ 4 (dtr) 6 (dsr) _______ 4 (dtr)
7 (gnd) _______ 5 (gnd) 7 (rts) _______ 8 (cts)
20 (dtr) _______ 6 (dsr) 8 (cts) _______ 7 (rts)
3. Open a new Hyperterminal

session by selecting:
Start menu > Programs
> Accessories
> Communication
> Hyperterminal
Figure 5-10

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Tape drives

4. Click on Configure and set
the following parameters:
- 19200 bauds
- 8 data bits
- No parity
- 1 stop bit
- Hardware flow control
5. Connect to the Com port
(Click on the Call icon).
5
6. Power on the drive. The
display should read the
startup internal tests result.
7. Wait for the final SYSTEM Figure 5-11
INITIALIZATION
COMPLETE message:
Figure 5-12
8. Type Help to get help on current menu available commands:

>help
OPPANEL Emulate offline operator
panel
SERVO Servo code debug menu
HARDWARE Hardware support menu

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Tape drives
CODELOAD RS-232 codeload operations

menu
DEBUG Debug menu
CODE_REVISION Print code revision
HELP Display help for current
menu
****** MAIN ******
9. Type Hardware
>hardware
****** HARDWARE ******
q - return to prior menu group
10. To see the Hardware menu available commands, type Help

help
DDMT Disable deadman timer
EDMT Enable deadman timer
NVRAM-DEFAULTS Set NVRAM to default
values & reset
HELP Display help
11. To restore the factory configuration and reset the drive, type
nvram-defaults
>nvram-defaults
PROCESSOR RESET (after offline, running
from WCS)
Copyright (c) 1995-1999 Fujitsu Limited
Code built: 990527 04 UCT

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Tape drives

Version: 7 B01
OS START
OS TASK INITIALIZATION COMPLETE
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION COMPLETE
12. Power Off the drive.
5
LTO drive SCSI address
The SCSI device address on the cartridge drive is properly set prior to
shipment from SERCEL. However, after replacement or after
connecting one additional cartridge drive, for example, you may need
to change the SCSI address. This can be done using the buttons on the
rear panel.
1. Power off the drive.
2. Press the + or - button to choose the desired SCSI address.
0 1 5 Press + or - button to
set SCSI address
Figure 5-13 : LTO rear panel

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Tape drives
CYPRESS 3490E-DIF
The procedure below is for configuring a CYPRESS 3490E-DIF SCSI
tape recorder based on an MP-8400-series cartridge drive.
Prior to using the tape drive with the 428XL, the EMULATION
parameter must be set to STK, and the COMPRESSION parameter
must be set to OFF. All other parameters must be left at the default
setting. To do that, use the three buttons available under the display.
(For details, refer to the manufacturer’s User Manual).
STAND BY 18/36w
OFL
1 2 3
Figure 5-14
Configuring the tape drive

- Power up the tape drive. Wait until the self-test is completed.
- After “STAND BY” appears on the front panel display, do the
following:
STAND BY 18/36w
OFL Press button 1 to go to Offline.
OFFLINE UNLOADED
ONL DEN func Press button 3 (Func).
SCSI ID 5
func CHG EXIT Press button 1 (Func).
MENU FUNCTIONS
CONF DIAG >>> Press button 1 (Conf).
ENTER PASSWORD
EXIT ---- ---- Press 3, then 2, then 3 (this enters the
password).

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Tape drives

CONFIGURE
SCSI DRIVE >>> Press 2 to select DRIVE
COMPRESSION ON
EXIT CHG >>> Press 2 (CHG) to turn compression OFF.
COMPRESSION OFF
EXIT CHG >>> Press 3 (>>> ) three times until EMULATION
is selected.
EMULATION ECHO
EXIT CHG >>> Press 2 (CHG) to change Emulation to STK. 5
EMULATION STK
EXIT CHG >>> Press 1 (EXIT).
SAVE SETUP ?
YES NO TEMP Press 1 to save.
ARE YOU SURE ?

YES EXIT Press 1 to confirm.
CONFIGURE
SCSI DRIVE >>> Press 3 (>>> ) twice.
CONFIGURE
18WRT EXIT >>> Press 2 (EXIT).
MENU FUNCTIONS
CONF DIAG >>> Press 3 (>>> ) twice.
MENU FUNCTIONS
---- EXIT >>> Press 2 (EXIT).
OFFLINE UNLOADED
ONL DEN func Press 1 to go to On Line.
STAND BY 18/36w
OFL

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Tape drives
Changing the SCSI address

Power up the tape drive. Wait until the self-test is complete. After
“STAND BY” appears on the front panel display, do the following:
STAND BY 18/36w
OFL Press button 1 to go to Offline.
OFFLINE UNLOADED
ONL DEN func Press button 3 (Func).
SCSI ID 5
func CHG EXIT Press button 2 as many times as necessary
to set the desired SCSI address (with the
428XL, only addresses 0 to 5 are allowed).
SCSI ID X
func CHG EXIT Press 3 (EXIT).
SAVE SETUP ?
YES NO ---- Press 1 to save.
ARE YOU SURE ?

YES EXIT Press 1 to confirm.
SCSI ID X
func CHG EXIT Press 3 (EXIT).
OFFLINE UNLOADED
ONL DEN func Press 1 to go to On Line.
STAND BY 18/36w
OFL

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Tape drives

3592 cartridge drive
Firmware revision
3592 Firmware level required: D3I0_4E9 or higher.
Note Cartridges may be shipped preformatted. In case of use of
preformatted cartridges, note that the E05 cartridge format is
not compatible with J1A tape drives. Using an E05-formatted
cartridge with a J1A tape drive will:
- either give rise to an error on the tape drive (no operation 5
allowed on the tape).
- or cause the tape drive to regard the tape as empty, whatever its
actual content.
(The behaviour depends on the firmware level).
QLA card installation

A QLOGIC Optic FC Dual port PCI card (QLA2342L-CK) must be
installed in the 428XL server computer. The card must be equipped with
the appropriate bracket for installation in a full-height PCI slot.
See also Tape drive interface cards (page 64).
Connecting 3592 drives
Note Put dustcaps in place on unused connectors.

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Tape drives
Port
0 1
0 1
QLA card Server computer’s
rear panel
LC/LC multi-mode FC cable

Power
Figure 5-15 Rear view (2 drives)
Port
0 1
0 1
Server computer’s
QLA card
rear panel
LC/LC multi-mode FC cable

Power
Port
0 1
0 1
Power
Figure 5-16 Rear view (4 drives)
To set the parameters of each drive, install the Service control panel on
top of the enclosure and connect the serial cable from the control panel
to the desired drive’s serial connector on the front panel.

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Tape drives

Service
Service control panel
control
panel
Navigate
Upper drive
Serial
cable
Lower drive Software Up Down
Reset (1) (3) (4)
Lower Upper Maintenance Select
(2) (Enter)
(5)
Figure 5-17 Front view 5

Setting drive parameters
1. Be sure no cartridge is loaded in the drive.
2. Use the standard shutdown procedure to power off the 428XL
server computer.
3. Connect the serial cable from the Service panel to the desired
drive’s serial connector on the front panel.
4. Press the software Reset button (see Figure 5-17 on page 177). As
a result the OPTIONS menu is available on the Service panel.
OPTIONS
Use to scroll through menu
SERVICES
Use to select
or enter
or scroll through options
Figure 5-18 SERVICES menu
WARNING
Do not use the FORCE ERROR DUMP menu.
5. Press the maintenance button (see Figure 5-17 on page 177).
- Select CE OFFLINE MODE.

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Tape drives
- Select CONFIG-INSTALL. Be sure “FORCE ER LOG IS

OFF” is selected (otherwise fugitive errors might arise during
recording).
- Select DRV. OPTIONS then DRV. FEATURES. Be sure "J1A
RACK" is selected. Note that some tape drive enclosures may
require rack mount library information in the DRV. OPTIONS
menu.
- Press the software Reset button to quit the maintenance menu.
This takes you back to the OPTIONS menu.
6. Select SERVICES.
7. Select SET ONLINE.
- Select PORT 0 (assuming the ports are connected as shown in
Figure 5-15 on page 176).
8. Still from the SERVICES menu, select FIBRE OPTIONS.
- Select SET PORT 0.
- Select SET SPEED.
- Select 2 GB, then YES.
- Select SET TOPOLOGY, then L-PORT, YES.
- Select SET HARD ADDRESS.
SET HARD ADDRESS
CANCEL
e0 --VALID--
e1
SAVE DATA
Figure 5-19
- Make sure the right-hand column reads “VALID” for the

selected address.
- Select SAVE DATA, then YES.

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Tape drives

Note The SCSI address is automatically assigned by Linux itself. If
two or more 3592 tape drives are attached to the system and
you want to know which address is assigned to each drive,
insert a cartridge into one drive and look at the indicators in the
Export window to see which drive has a cartridge inserted (or
move the mouse pointer to each Tape indicator to display the
status popup).
9. Press the software Reset button.
10. Power up the computer. See if the drive appears in the Recorder
main window. 5
Manual calibration
With firmware code level D3I0_4E9 or higher, automatic calibration is
intentionally inhibited in order to preclude any spurious interruption of
recording. As a result, if the drive determines that a calibration is
required, then a “CALIB” message will appear on the drive message
display (on the bezel) and on the Service panel (if connected) every
time the tape is unloaded, until a manual calibration is done by using the
following procedure:
1. Connect the control panel to the desired drive (see Figure 5-17 on
page 177).
2. Be sure the drive is powered up, no jobs are running, no tape is
loaded.
3. Push the maintenance button (2).
4. Select CE OFFLINE.
You may get a CONFIRM OFFLINE MENU at this step if drive
believes a job might be running.
5. Select UTILITIES.
6. Select CALIBRATE DRIVE. This takes you to the LOAD
SCRATCH TAPE MENU.
7. Load a scratch tape in the drive.

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
Tape drives
8. After the tape is loaded and “Ready”, select PROCESS

LOADED TAPE. The CE WAIT MENU should appear.
Wait until the procedure is complete (this takes approximately 4 to
5 minutes).
9. After the procedure is complete, the CE DIAGS GOOD or CE
DIAGS FAILED MENU is displayed.
10. Select UNLOAD DRIVE (you need not wait for Unload to
complete).
11. Select BACK TO CE MENUS. This takes you back to the CE
OPTIONS MENU.
12. Push the settings button (2).
13. Select OPERATOR MODE.
Note If a tape is already loaded before you get to step 7, you have to
Unload it before proceeding.
Note If the tape loaded is File Protected, a "Tape write prot'd" Status
message will be displayed at step 8. Unload it and then proceed
with an unprotected tape.
Note The Calibration procedure will write on the tape, but it writes in
an area that does not contain customer data. The tape used does
not need to be new or unused, but should be a known “good”
tape.
Note If the Calibration procedure succeeds, the new values are saved
in non-volatile memory.
Firmware update
If, for any reason, firmware needs to be updated, use an FMR cartridge
from IBM or created from another 3592 drive. See IBM documentation.

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
NAS server

NAS server
Overview
The 428XL NAS (Network
Attached Storage) system comes in
different versions: Model B (white
enclosure), Model C (black
enclosure), Model D or later (black
enclosure too, with a label
mentioning the “Model”). 5
The 428XL NAS system is supplied
Model XA
by SERCEL with the following
configuration:
• Linux (Storiq) Operating System. Figure 5-20 Model XA
• RAID1 (mirror) mounted disks
with a 380 Gbyte storage capacity.
• Dual-Ports Gigabit network card.
• On a Model-B system, the100MB network card on the motherboard
is unused. On a Model-C system, the 1-GB network port available
from the motherboard is used. On other models, the 1-GB network
port is available from the PCI slot.
• root login with spider77 as password for console mode general
administration and using Webmin.
• storiq login with spider77 as password for graphical mode.
IMPORTANT
Affix a sticker on the enclosure to identify it as Disk# 1 or Disk# 2.
The 428XL NAS system is fully configured prior to shipment from
Sercel. Apart from setting networking parameters, you do not normally
have any software installation work to do (if required, see Operating
System software reinstallation on page 190).

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
NAS server
IMPORTANT
To power off the NAS system, briefly press the POWER button
on the front panel.
Shock-mount assembly
Shock-mount assembly part No. 756083303.
Adjustable stop
position
See below
Figure 5-21 : NAS shock-mount parts
250
4 mounting holes
(dia. 7)
230
340
320
(Dimensions in mm)
Figure 5-22 : Lower mount plate

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
NAS server

Attaching a NAS system to the 428XL local network
NAS server
eth0
eth2 (User Network)
428XL
(Service port)
PCI
server
eth1
(428XL
172.27.128.1 local network)
Ethernet switch
172.27.128.41
(42) 5
Figure 5-23 Model-B system (Operating Software version 1.0)
NAS server
eth1
eth0 (User Network)
428XL
(428XL
PCI
server
local network)
eth2
(User Network)
172.27.128.1
172.27.128.41
Ethernet switch (42)
Figure 5-24 Model-C system (Operating Software version 1.1 or 2.0)
NAS server
eth0
eth2 (428XL
PCI
428XL
local network)
server (User Network)
eth1
(User Network)
172.27.128.1
172.27.128.41
Ethernet switch (42)
Figure 5-25 All models except B and C

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
NAS server
Note To power up the NAS system, press the POWER button

on its front panel. (To power off, briefly press the POWER
button).
Setting up NAS parameters

To configure the NAS disk, connect a standard PC display, mouse and
keyboard to the enclosure.
PCI
PCI
VGA PS2 mouse VGA

display PS2 keyboard display
USB USB
Model B Other than Model B
Figure 5-26
Setting the NAS disk identification number

The NAS disk should be identified as Disk# 1 or Disk# 2, by means of
a sticker visible on its enclosure.
For the host name number to be consistent with the identification
number appearing on the sticker, you may have to change the setup
parameters by doing the following:
1. Depending on which model you are using, log in as storiq or root:
- On a Model-B system: enter storiq as Username and spider77
as password. Click on the Xterm icon in the toolbar at the foot of
the desktop (or select it from the ICEWM menu). In the
Terminal window, type:
su - root (press Return).
spider77 (the password is not viewed). Press Return.
- On other systems, enter root as Username and spider77 as
password.
2. Change directory to /usr/local/binsh, by typing:

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
NAS server

cd /usr/local/binsh
3. To configure the disk as Disk# 1, type:

./setNas1Id
or, to configure it as Disk# 2, type:

./setNas2Id
4. Reboot (type reboot in the Terminal window).

Note The default assignment of network ports, depending on which
NAS model you are using, is shown in Table 5-2. 5
Table 5-2 Default port assignment
NAS enclosure NAS port
Software
Model eth0 eth1 eth2
version
B 1.0 User Network 428XL local network
C 1.1 or 2.0
D 2.0
E 3.0
428XL local Network User network User Network
XA 3.1
FX 4.0
GX 4.1
Should any malfunction appear on the 428XL local network

port, you can use the setNas command to reassign the ethernet
ports of the machine, as an interim solution. To do that, use the
following syntax:
./setNas<x>Eth<y>
replacing <x> by 1 for Nas1, or 2 for Nas2

<y> by 0 or 2 or 1.
The setNas1Id command returns the system to the default port
assignment.

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
NAS server
Note For Model-B users only:

- It is important to note that only the Gigabit ethernet ports (eth1
and eth0) have been qualified by Sercel. Using the Fast Ethernet
port (eth2) may result in lesser performance.
- With software version 1.0, the default IP address automatically
assigned to the eth1 port (by loading software or using the
setNas1Id command) is one for a 408UL network. You have to
enter the address for the 428XL network (172.27.128.41 or 42)
manually. See Figure 5-29 on page 187.
NAS IP address on the User Network

To attach the NAS disk to a network other than the 428XL local
network, use the following procedure to configure the User Network
port:
1. Power up the machine.
2. Unless this is a Model-B system, log in with root as Username
and spider77 as password, and then type gdm to get inside
“GNOME desktop manager”;
3. Log in as storiq with spider77 as password.
4. Launch Mozilla (click on the icon at the foot of the desktop or
select it from the ICEWM menu).
5. In the Mozilla window, click on the “StorIQ Administration”
shortcut. Accept licence notifications if any. This opens the
Webmin login window.
6. Log in with root as Username and spider77 as password.
7. Click on the Networking tab, then on the Network
Configuration icon.

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
NAS server

Networking
Logout
Network
configuration
Figure 5-27
8. Click on the Network Interfaces icon. 5

Network
Interfaces
Figure 5-28
9. Depending on which model you have, see Figure 5-29, or Figure 5-

30 below.
Click on eth0 to enter

User Network
Name Type IP Address Netmask Active at boot?
address
eth0
eth1 172.27.128.41 255.255.255.0
eth2
Figure 5-29 Model B (software version 1.0)
Note With software version 1.0, the IP address automatically

assigned to the eth1 port is one for a 408UL network. You have
to enter the address for the 428XL network (172.27.128.41 or
42) manually.

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
NAS server
Click on eth1 or
eth2 to enter User Name Type IP Address Netmask Active at boot?
Network address eth0 150.10.128.41 255.255.0.0
eth0:1 (virtual) 172.27.128.41 255.255.255.0
eth1
eth2
Figure 5-30 All systems except Model-B
Note With software version 1.1 or above, the eth0 interface is visible
to a 408UL or 428XL local network with no need to make any
changes.
10. Set the appropriate IP address and Netmask for the ethernet port to
be visible to the user’s private network.
Figure 5-31
Click Save.
11. In the Network Configuration window, click on the Apply
Configuration button (see step 8).
12. Click on Logout on the right-hand border of the Webmin window
(see step 7).
13. Remove the display, mouse and keyboard. See Attaching a NAS
system to the 428XL local network (page 183).

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
NAS server

WARNING
Your changes are lost after you run the setNas1Id command (used to set
the system’s identification number). The setNas1Id command returns
the system to the default port assignment (see Table 5-2 on page 185).
Attaching a 428XL NAS system to another network

The settings of the User Network port (eth0 interface for Model B, eth1
interface for other models), should allow the disk to be visible to the 5
desired external network. See NAS IP address on the User Network
(page 186).
IMPORTANT
Be sure appropriate network security services are implemented within
the user network you are attaching the NAS system to.
You can connect the User Network port to an Ethernet port on a UNIX
workstation and mount the exported (/mnt/raid) directory at the
workstation’s mount point, using the command:
mount <Host name or IP address>:/mnt/raid /<mount point>
To copy your SEGD files from the NAS system to a tape, you can also
use the Copy+ software tool available from SERCEL on a computer
running on Linux or a personal computer running on Windows (and
equipped with an SCSI port). See 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3
(“Copy+” software tool on page 19).

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
NAS server
Operating System software reinstallation

If, for any reason, you need to reinstall software, connect a standard PC
display, mouse and keyboard to the enclosure, then install the
appropriate software version, depending on which NAS model you
have:
• NAS Sercel version 1.0 (page 190) for a Model-B system;
• NAS Sercel version 1.1 or above (page 192) for other models.
NAS Sercel version 1.0

1. Power up the NAS unit.
2. Insert the NAS Sercel version 1.0 StorIQ CD-ROM into the drive
so that the machine can boot on the CD-ROM. To boot on the CD-
ROM, briefly press the Power button, wait until power off is
complete, and then briefly press the Power button again.
3. When “boot” is prompted, press Return (or wait half a minute).
The log-in window should appear.
4. Log in under the following account:
- User: storiq
- Password: spider77
5. Double-click on the “StoriQ Installation” icon (in the upper
right corner of the screen).
6. Enter the password: spider77
7. Click OK to dismiss the message that shows up.
8. When “Installation process is finished” appears (in the
“Finished” window), click “OK”.
9. Wait until the RAID 1 reconstruction is complete (this may take
about 2 hours or more). The reconstruction progress can be
monitored using the command “cat /proc/mdstat”. The message
“resync” followed by a percentage should appear, meaning that
the RAID 1 reconstruction is in progress. Periodically relaunch

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
NAS server

the “cat” command by simply pressing the up arrow key (), then
Return to see if reconstruction is complete.
10. To eject the CD-ROM, briefly press the Power button. Follow the
step-by-step instructions prompted and wait until the system
power is off.
11. Press the Power button to power up the system. Wait until the
StorIQ “Welcome” window appears.
12. Log in with storiq as Username and spider77 as password.
13. Click on the Xterm icon in the toolbar at the foot of the desktop 5
(or select it from the ICEWM menu). In the Terminal window,
type:
su - root (press Return).
spider77 (the password is not viewed). Press Return.
cd /mnt
chmod 777 raid
14. Press Ctrl D

15. Press Ctrl D
16. Launch Mozilla (click on the icon at the foot of the desktop or
select it from the ICEWM menu).
17. In Mozilla window, click on the “StorIQ Administration”
shortcut button. Accept licence notifications if any. This opens the
Webmin login window.
18. Log in with root as Username and spider77 as password. Click
NO to dismiss the message that shows up.
19. Click on the System tab.
20. Click on Bootup and Shutdown.
21. Use the scrollbar to go to proftpd, and then click on the proftpd
link.
22. Choose “Yes” for the “Start at boot time?” option.

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
NAS server
23. Click on Save. (This should set “proftpd” to “Yes”).

24. Briefly press the Power button to power off the system.
NAS Sercel version 1.1 or above

1. Power up the NAS unit.
2. Insert the NAS Sercel version 1.1 (or above) StorIQ CD-ROM
into the drive so that the machine can boot on the CD-ROM. To
boot on the CD-ROM, briefly press the Power button, wait until
power off is complete, and then briefly press the Power button
again.
3. When “boot” is prompted, press Return (or wait half a minute).
The log-in window should appear.
4. Log in under the following account:
- User: storiq
- Password: spider77
- Click OK.
5. Double-click on the “StoriQ Installation” icon (in the upper
right corner of the screen).
6. Enter the password: spider77 and click “OK”.
7. Click OK to dismiss the message that shows up.
8. When “Installation process is finished” appears (in the
“Finished” window), click “OK”.
9. To eject the CD-ROM:
- Briefly press the Power button.
- Wait for the CD-ROM to be ejected.
- Follow the step-by-step instructions prompted and wait until the
system power is off.

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
NAS server

10. Press the Power button to power up the system. After the system
has booted up, the yellow light on the front panel remains on,
meaning that RAID 1 reconstruction is in progress.
11. Wait until reconstruction is complete (this may take about 2 hours
or more). To see if reconstruction is complete, do the following:
- Log in as root, with spider77 as password;
- Type the command raid_cli info
- You can periodically relaunch the “raid_cli info” command by
pressing both Shift and 1 twice and then Enter. (The command 5
returns the percentage completed, or OK when complete).
12. After reconstruction is complete, reboot the NAS (briefly press
the Power button to power down).
NAS system rescue mode

If the main system software isn't usable for some reason ( hardware of
software failure) it's still possible to operate the StorIQ system in
"rescue" mode.
The system software is installed on both internal disk drives (sda and
sdb). “rescue” mode will boot up from the secondary drive.
How to start in rescue mode

If the system is powered but unusable, you may power it down by
keeping the power button pressed for 5 seconds.
If the primary drive (sda) still works

Power up the system. After the "XPC" splash screen, an “intellique”
screen is displayed. If the primary drive is working, you'll see a text
menu with two options:
“storiq”
“rescue”

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
NAS server
Use the keyboard cursor keys to highlight "rescue" and hit "enter" key.
The system will start in rescue mode (from the secondary disk drive,
sdb).
If the primary drive is unavailable (disconnected or unreadable):

The system will display only one option at the "Intellique" screen:
“rescue-critical”
If the screen stays Chassis front

blank
If the "INTELLIQUE"
screen doesn't show up
SATA connectors
and the screen stays
blank, the disk controller
may be locked up by a
failed disk drive or cable
(hardware failure).
Trying disconnecting
the primary (sda) drive
may help.
To do so, power down
the system, unplug
power cord, open
chassis and unplug the
primary drive (sda)
SATA connector.
Chassis backside
Identifying the primary
(sda) connector
Facing the back of the Figure 5-32
system (model
SK22G2), the primary disk is connected the right SATA connector on
the motherboard. See Figure 5-32.

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
NAS server

Working in rescue mode
"rescue mode" should operate normally. However you should
immediately proceed to back up your data before reinstalling the system
(in case of a software problem) or returning the system for maintenance
(in case of a hardware failure).

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
FTP server
FTP server
Installing server software
1. Insert the 428XL CD-ROM into your PC’s drive and open the
PCTOOLS directory. Double-click on the
FILEZILLA_SERVER_x_x_x.exe file.
2. In the Licence Agreement window, click “I accept”.
3. In the Choose Components window, click Next.
4. In the Choose Install Location window, choose the folder in
which to install server software. Click Next
Figure 5-33
5. In the Startup Settings window, click Install. Follow the

instructions prompted. After FTP server software is installed, see
Server settings (page 197).
Figure 5-34

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
FTP server

Server settings
1. Double-click on the FTP server user interface icon on the desktop.
In the Connect to Server window, click OK. This opens the
server user interface window.
5
Figure 5-35
2. From the Edit menu in the FileZilla Server window, select Users.
3. In the General page, click on the Add button to create a user
account.
Figure 5-36
4. In the User account window, enter the same User Account name
as in the 428XL GUI Export window. See 428XL User’s Manual
Vol. 1.
Figure 5-37
Click OK.

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
FTP server
5. Still in the General page, choose Password and enter the same
Password as in the 428XL GUI Export window. Be sure Enable
Account is enabled.
Click to enter
password
Figure 5-38
6. Select the Share Folder page. Be sure the Show Relative Path
option is enabled.
Set permissions
Be sure “H”
appears here Set as Home
directory
Enable “Show
relative path”
Figure 5-39
Note Be sure the letter “H” appears ahead of the shared folders. If
that is not the case, click on the “Set as Home dir” button.

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
FTP server

7. From the Edit menu in the FileZilla Server window, select
Settings.
Enter 0 5
Figure 5-40
8. Be sure the No Transfer timeout setting reads 0.

9. Click OK to save your settings.

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
MDR or RVT300 virtual tape recorder

Instead of writing and reading to and from tape, the Mirage Data
Recorder (MDR) or Removable Virtual Tape recorder (RVT300)
utilizes two Removable Disk Modules (RDMs) with RAID 1 protection
against data lost. The RDM pairs can be written to, dumped from,
stored, erased, and returned to the field for re-use like conventional tape
cartridges.
Key locks
Disk 1
Disk 2
Power switch
Figure 5-41 Front panel
The MDR (RVT300) attaches to the 428XL server computer via an

SCSI port, and emulates a standard tape cartridge system. It allows you
to create cartridges that are 100% inter-changeable with a conventional
tape cartridge drive, by archiving to an IBM3590 or LTO tape drive
attached to its Archive (LVD SCSI) port.
HOST (Port 0)
to 428XL server computer
ARCHIVE (Port 1)
to tape drive
Figure 5-42 Rear panel

January 11, 2011
Peripherals

The table below shows a typical way of handling acquired seismic data
in the field with two pairs (A and B) of Removable Disk Modules.
Recording truck Base camp
1 - Record to MDR.
Upper
(pair A Disk 1) 5
Lower
(pair A Disk 2)
2 - Remove pair A and take Disk 1 to base camp. - Insert Disk 1 (from pair A) into upper slot.
3 - Insert pair B. - Launch Archive function.
Upper Upper 3590

(pair B Disk 1) (pair A Disk 1)
Lower
(pair B Disk 2)
- Record to MDR. - Erase volume when Archive complete.

- Remove Disk 1; take it to recording truck.
3 - Remove pair B and take Disk 1 to base camp. - Insert Disk 1 (from pair B) into upper slot.
4 - Insert pair A. - Launch Archive function.
Upper Upper 3590

(pair A Disk 1) (pair B Disk 1)
Lower
(pair A Disk 2)
- Erase volume when archive complete.

- Record to MDR.
- Remove Disk 1; take it to recording truck.
5 and so on and so forth.
The first time two blank disks are installed in an MDR (RVT300), they
are configured with identical ID numbers to run in mirrored mode. Each
disk should be marked with whatever convention you like, specifying

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals
which pair and which slot it is assigned to (Disk1 in the upper slot /
Disk2 in the lower slot). For example, you might affix a sticker reading
“A1” and standing for “Pair A, upper disk”.
If one disk fails during acquisition, recording is allowed to continue so
long as the other disk keeps working properly.
After the disk pair is removed from the MDR (RVT300), for example
because recording space is running out, only one of the mirrored disks
should be transported (e. g. to the base camp) at any time. This prevents
any accidental loss of data if the disk is damaged during transport.
You cannot reuse a disk pair until one of its disks has all its data volumes
marked as archived, verified and erased by using the Archive function.
The other disk in the pair does not need to be erased.
If, for any reason, you need to reconfigure a disk pair, use the
“Configuration” menu on the MDR (RVT300).
For details on how to use each menu, see the Users Guide supplied
together with the MDR (RVT300).

January 11, 2011
Peripherals
Vehicle Tracking box

The tracking box connects to the computer through a serial line (A and/
or B port of the server computer).
Position
Port A Port A
Waypoint, service message
Tracking Server
box computer
Service message Port B
or printer
5
Figure 5-43 : Vehicle tracking box serial ports
See also 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1 (Positioning -Vehicle tracking).

January 11, 2011
5 Peripherals

January 11, 2011
Chapter
In this chapter:
• Installing CN3e PC applications (page 206)

• Installing GoBook PC applications (page 216)

January 11, 2011
Installing CN3e PC applications

You may need the information contained in this section if you did not
purchase your CN3e handheld PC from SERCEL, or if it fails to start
up, or on a first-time startup, or to install the latest release of 428XL
software (e. g. LT428), etc.
Intermec CN3e
Navigation bar
Scroll up/down buttons
Command bar (onscreen

keyboard icon, icons to any
applications that are running)
Shortcut to
Shortcut to “Term428”
“LT428”
application
application
Figure 6-1 Intermec CN3e
Battery
You must fully charge the battery before you can use the CN3e. The
battery is fully charged when the battery status LED shows a steady
green.
Battery status LED
Figure 6-2

January 11, 2011
Handheld PC software

Battery Status Description
Steady green The battery is more than 95% charged and CN3e is
on a charger.
Blinking red The battery is low. CN3e goes into Suspend mode.
Charge or replace the battery.
Steady red and the CN3e is attached The battery is charging.
to external power.
Steady red and the CN3e is not The software is not working properly.
attached to external power.
Steady amber The battery is missing or is unable to charge because
the temperature is outside of the charging range.
Off The CN3e is not on external power and the battery is
operating normally.
6
Stylus
Your computer has a stylus for selecting items and entering information
on the touch screen.
Action Description
Tap Touch the screen once with the stylus to select options, open or close
applications, or launch menus from the Command bar.
Drag Hold the stylus on the screen and drag across the screen to select text and
images.
Tap and hold Tap and hold the stylus on an item to see a menu of actions available for that
item. On the pop-up menu that appears, tap the action you want to perform.
Touch screen
If the touch screen does not respond when you tap it with the stylus, you
may need to calibrate the screen.
To calibrate the touch screen:
1. Tap Start > Settings > the Systems tab > Screen.
2. Tap Align Screen and follow the instructions to align the screen.
3. Click ok.

January 11, 2011
If the touch screen is so out of alignment that you cannot open the Start
menu, you may need to align the screen menu using only the keypad or
as a last resort you can perform a clean boot. For more information
about performing a clean boot, see Clean Booting the CN3e (page 209)
To align the touch screen using the keypad:
1. Press the Windows button on the upper left of the keypad.
2. Press the Down button to select Settings.
3. Press Enter.
4. Press the Tab button until the Settings tabs are highlighted.
5. Press the Right Arrow button to select the System tab (on some
keypads this will be the orange button and down button).
6. Press tab until the Screen icon is highlighted.
7. Tab to Align Screen and press Enter follow the instructions to
align the screen.
8. Click ok.
Resetting the CN3e

You rarely need to reset the computer. If the computer does not resume
after pressing the Power button, or if the computer or an application
lock up, you may need to reset the CN3e. The CN3e uses the
configuration currently saved in flash memory during the boot process.
There are three ways to reset the CN3e:
• Warm Booting the CN3e (page 208).
• Cold Booting the CN3e (page 209).
• Clean Booting the CN3e (page 209).
Warm Booting the CN3e

You may need to perform a warm boot to correct conditions where an
application stops responding to the system.To warm boot the computer:

January 11, 2011

• Press and hold the Power button for 10 seconds or right-click on the
CN3e via the SmartSystems Console and select Intermec Power
Tools > Warm Boot Device.
The computer systematically shuts down, restarts, and goes through the
initialization process.
Cold Booting the CN3e

In some cases where the computer completely stops responding, it may
be necessary to perform a cold boot. Because cold booting may result in
data loss, only use this method if all other recovery methods have failed.
To cold boot your CN3e: 6
1. Press the Power button to suspend the CN3e.
2. Remove the battery pack from the CN3e.
3. Press the Reset button on the back of the CN3e.
Reset button
Figure 6-3
Clean Booting the CN3e

When you clean boot the CN3e, it loads only those files and programs
that are absolutely required by the operating system. Use the clean boot
to troubleshoot the CN3e by getting it up and running so that you can
perform diagnostic tests to determine which elements of the normal
boot process are causing problems.

January 11, 2011
WARNING
The clean boot process will erase the memory in the mobile computer,
including all applications and data files found in the object store. You
will have to enter the LT428 licence code again.
To clean boot the computer:
1. Press the Power button to suspend the CN3e.
2. Remove the battery pack from the back of the CN3e.
3. Use the stylus to press the Reset button on the back of the CN3e.
4. Insert the battery back into the CN3e, and immediately press and
hold the Power button and both blue buttons on the left side.
5. Continue to hold the Power button and both buttons on the left
side until a Warning message appears on the display.
6. Release the Power button and both buttons on the left side, read
the message, and press either button on the right side to continue.
7. Wait for the CN3e to load files from its ROM.
Installing 428XL software on CN3e

You may need to reinstall 428XL software to install a new release, or
prior to starting using a CN3e PC that was formerly used in another
crew.
Prerequisites
First remove the former LT-428 release. (Select Settings from the Start
menu. Select the System tab, then Remove Programs. Select the
“LT428” program. Tap on the Remove button). When the system asks
you if you want to delete existing files, choose to delete all.

January 11, 2011

Figure 6-4
To install LT-428 software on a CN3e handheld PC, the following is

required:
- A desktop or laptop PC, to be used to copy the lt428WMV_.cab file 6
(from the e-428 software DVD-ROM or any other medium) to the
CN3e.
- A USB communication cord.
IMPORTANT
Make sure the “Read Only” option is selected in the “Properties” of the
lt428WMV_.cab file you are going to copy to the CN3e.
ActiveSync must be installed on the desktop or laptop PC (ActiveSync

is a free Microsoft utility that allows you to share and update
information between your CN3e and a PC under Windows®). To install
ActiveSync:
- Using Windows® Explorer, open the appropriate directory on
the e-428 CD-ROM (/lt428V_._).
- Double-click on the MSASYNC.EXE file. This launches the
ActiveSync installation wizard. Follow the instructions
prompted.

January 11, 2011
Installing LT428 software

1. Connect the PC to the USB port on the CN3e dock adapter, using
the USB cord.
Dock
adapter
USB cord
Figure 6-5
- This window should appear:
Figure 6-6
2. Click Cancel.

January 11, 2011

Figure 6-7
3. Click on Explore.
6
Figure 6-8
4. Click on My Windows Mobile-Based Device directory, then

Flash File Store > UserAutoInstall.
Figure 6-9
5. Drag and drop the lt428WMV_.cab file from the e428 DVD-
ROM to the UserAutoInstall directory.
Figure 6-10
6. Click OK on the “File Conversion” popup window.

January 11, 2011
Figure 6-11
7. On CN3e:
- Tap on Start > Programs.
- Tap on the File Explorer icon.
Figure 6-12
- Tap on the dropdown menu button and choose My Device.

- Tap on Flash File Store.
Figure 6-13
- Choose the UserAutoInstall folder. Tap on lt428WMV_.

January 11, 2011

Figure 6-14
6
- Tap on Device then Install. Wait untill the installation process is
complete.
Installing shortcuts
After installing a new release, you have update the preset shortcuts (see
Intermec CN3e on page 206) as follows:
1. Uninstall the former shortcuts (select Settings from the Start
menu. Select the System tab, then Remove Programs. Select the
“LT428 Shortcuts” program. Tap on the Remove button).
Figure 6-15
2. Install the shortcuts .cab file from the e428 DVD-ROM, using the
same procedure as for Installing LT428 software (page 212).

January 11, 2011
Installing GoBook PC applications

You may need the information contained in this section if you did not
purchase your GoBook from SERCEL, or if it fails to start up, or on a
first-time startup, or to install the latest release of 428XL software (e. g.
FDPA428, LT428), etc.
GoBook PC touch screen calibration

On a first-time startup, or after a hardware reset, the GoBook
automatically launches the touch screen calibration procedure. Simply
follow the instructions prompted on the display.
GoBook Q200
For detailed information, see the manufacturer’s documentation.
Start menu
Turns on/off backlight
(if white function key
Press this function key is pressed)
prior to typing any
orange character
White function key

(enables blue keypad or
Decreases backlight backlight on/off key)
(if orange function
key is pressed)
Increases backlight
(if orange function
Power On key is pressed)
Figure 6-16

January 11, 2011

Resetting your GoBook Q200 PC
If your GoBook gets stuck or fails to start up, try one of the following.
Software Reset
Press and hold down the power-on key along with the function key used
to type orange characters, for about 5 seconds (until the screen flips).
This performs a software reset. No information is lost.
Hardware Reset
Press and hold down the power-on key along with the function key used
to type orange characters, plus the key used for the blue keypad, for
about 5 seconds. This performs a hardware reset. Information normally 6
saved in the Operating System and in the RAM memory is lost
(configuration parameters, touch screen calibration, etc.). Use hardware
reset only as a last resort.
GoBook Q200 connection parameters

Connection parameters MUST be set on a first-time startup, or after a
hardware reset, BEFORE installing 428XL software.
- From the Start menu, select Settings >
Control Panel.
- Double-click on the PC Connection icon.
- Choose the “Enable direct connections to
the desktop computer” option (under the
PC Connection tab).
- The “USB default” connection option is
selected by default.
- If USB is not supported by the Operating
System (e. g. NT4), click on the “Change
Connection” button and select the “Com1 @
115200” option.
- Click on OK (in the upper right corner of Figure 6-17
the window).
January 11, 2011
GoBook Q200 battery conservation parameters

- From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.
- Double-click on the Power icon.
- Click on the Schemes tab.
- From the “Power Scheme” option button, select “Battery Power”.
- From the “Switch state to Suspend” option button, select the desired
time option for entering reduced power states (1 to 30 minutes or
Never). The time choices represent the amount of time that must pass
before the system will switch to the next power conservation state.
Shorter times will help conserve batteries.
- Click on OK.
GoBook Q200 display backlighting

- From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.
- Double-click on the Display icon.
- Click on the Backlight tab. Choose the desired options (these
options save battery life by automatically turning off the
backlight when not needed).
- Click on OK.
- To decrease the backlight, press both the orange function key and 7.
- To increase the backlight, press both the orange function key and the
letter O.
About the batteries in the GoBook Q200

The handheld computer’s primary battery is a rechargeable Lithium-Ion
pack. Charge at least 7 hours to ensure the internal backup battery is also
fully charged.
If the main battery pack is fully discharged or removed, the internal
backup battery will only last for 24 hours. If this happens, the unit will
hard reset the next time it is powered up. A hard reset will cause loss of

January 11, 2011

data and custom data. To ensure data integrity, the main battery should
always be kept charged, and important data should be saved in non-
volatile memory, such as the system Compact Flash card.
Charge installed Li-ion battery packs every 21 days to maintain their
charge capacity. Charge uninstalled packs every 6 months.
To backup and restore the contents of files and registry, use iRescue
(from the Start menu, select Programs > iRescue). See the
manufacturer’s documentation for details.
Installing 428XL software on Q200 6

You may need to reinstall 428XL software to install a new release, or
prior to starting using a GoBook PC that was formerly used in another
crew, reinstall 428XL software. When the system asks you if you want
to delete existing files, choose to delete all.
Prerequisites: To install 428XL software on a GoBook handheld PC,
the following is required:
- A desktop or laptop PC. A USB port is recommended (Windows®98
or higher). Installation through a serial port is allowed but lengthy.
- A USB or serial communication cable (supplied along with your
GoBook PC).
- e-428 software CD-ROM.
1. Installing Microsoft ActiveSync
Use the procedure below to install ActiveSync on the desktop or
laptop PC (ActiveSync is a Microsoft utility that allows you to
share and update information between your GoBook and a PC
under Windows®).
- Using Windows® Explorer, open the appropriate directory on
the e-428 CD-ROM (e. g. /fdpa428V_._ or /lt428V_._).
- Double-click on the MSASYNC.EXE file. This launches the
ActiveSync installation wizard.

January 11, 2011
Figure 6-18
- Click Next. A default installation folder is prompted.
Figure 6-19
- Click Next.
- Power on your GoBook PC so that it can be detected.
- Connect the GoBook PC to the USB port of the desktop or laptop
computer (or use a serial port, depending on your connection
parameter settings).

January 11, 2011

6
Figure 6-20
- Click Next.
Figure 6-21
- In the Set Up a Partnership window, choose No and click Next.

- As a result, the GoBook gets connected as a Guest.

January 11, 2011
Figure 6-22
2. Installing 428XL software

Still in the same directory on the e-428 CD-ROM, double-click on
the setup.exe file. This causes the following window to appear:
Figure 6-23
- Click Yes.
- Do not click on OK until the GoBook screen remains still.
After downloading is complete, click OK. This completes the
installation of 428XL software.
GoBook Q200 backup procedure

After a hardware reset, or in the event of a low battery, you will have to
use a PC to reinstall 428XL software, unless you save a backup copy of
your program files and registry to the Compact Flash memory of your
GoBook Q200.
It is advisable to set your GoBook Q200 for an automatic backup. To do
that:
• Select Programs > iRescue (from the Start menu) and choose the
Backup tab.

January 11, 2011

• Choose the option for automatic backup on a hardware reset, and also
the option that does an automatic backup in the event of a low battery;
• Click the Schedule button and choose the daily, or weekly, or
monthly backup option, and choose the week’s day on which to do the
backup.
• Click OK.
Use the Help button for details on the available options.
GoBook Q200 restore procedure

You will need to reinstall 428XL software on your GoBook Q200 after
a hardware reset or if any program file has been damaged, or if your 6
GoBook was formerly used in another crew.
When the system asks you if you want to delete existing files, choose to
delete all.
If you have saved a backup copy of your program files to the Compact
Flash memory (using the above procedure), you do not need to use the
e-428 CDROM. Instead, do the following:
• Select Programs > iRescue (from the Start menu) and choose the
Restore tab.
• From the available backup dates, choose the copy to restore.
• If the intent is to reinstall 428XL software, choose to restore all files
(Registry and program files).
• Click OK.
Use the Help button for details.

January 11, 2011

January 11, 2011
Chapter
This chapter only covers wireline telemetry (for radio

telemetry, see Chapter 9). It includes the following sections:
• Warnings and Cautions (page 226)

• Wireline telemetry equipment (page 229)
• Power supply requirements (page 249)
• Auxiliary channels (page 253)
• Spread layout conventions (page 255)
• Submersible (ULS) field electronics (page 258)
• Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU) (page 266)
• Quick Tester (page 271)

January 11, 2011
Warnings and Cautions

WARNING
It is highly recommended to disconnect Line and Transverse cables in
case of impending lightning, in order to protect personnel and
equipment.
To provide an easy path for any bolt of lightning from a telemetry line
to earth, the metal parts of each LAUL or FDU should be in contact with
the ground. The ground nut of the LAUX should be connected to a
ground stake.
To ensure correct electrical connection between both ends of an FDU-
428, the coupling nut should be tightened to 2.2 Nm torque (4 Nm for
an FDU408). In areas susceptible to lightning, it is advisable to check
each FDU’s ground nut for adequate tightening.
WARNING
Connector sockets are tightened with optimal torque and locked with
glue prior to shipment from the factory.
Do not attempt to re-tighten the sockets of any unit!
IMPORTANT
Whenever any connector is unused, put its connector protective cap in
place.

January 11, 2011
Field equipment deployment

CAUTION
To disconnect a battery from an LAUL or LAUX, do not disconnect
the battery cord from the battery terminals unless and until you
have unplugged it from the 12V connector on the LAUL or LAUX.
(Damage to the LAUL or LAUX may result if the battery cord is left
connected and its conductors are inadvertently shorted while
hot-swapping the battery).
YES
12 V NO
battery
7
12 V 12 V
battery battery
CAUTION
Do not rest the metal housing of any unit (e. g. LAUL, LAUX, LRU) on
the positive terminal of the battery or this will blow the ground circuitry
inside the unit. In order to minimize the risk of damages, we
recommend to use batteries with plastic protective caps over their
terminals, or to place batteries inside adequate plastic containers.

January 11, 2011
IMPORTANT
In order to clean FM4 plugs, only use fresh water. Do not use any
aggressive chemicals (like petrol or gasoline) liable to attack plastic.
Prior to connecting any plug, make sure there is no water inside
connectors.
IMPORTANT
Cleanse units with fresh water after shallow-water operations.
WARNING
In shallow-water operations, any unused Line or Transverse connector
should be terminated with a watertight end-of-line plug.
WARNING
For sacrificial anodes to provide effective protection against corrosion,
it is essential to keep them free of mud. Brush and/or wash off mud
whenever possible.
Avoid conductive contact between any metal body (especially stainless
steel attachments) and the metal housing of an LAUL or LAUX, etc.

January 11, 2011
Wireline telemetry equipment

In this section:
• FDU-428 (page 229)
• Links (page 232)
• SH Sercel geophone string connectors (page 233)
• DSU-428 (page 234)
• LAUL-428 and LAUX-428 (page 245)
• Transverse Fibre Optics extender (TFOI) — page 246
• Transverse Repeater (TREP-428) — page 248
• End-of-line plug (page 248) 7
FDU-428
LCK2 socket
LED
Grounding clamp
Figure 7-1 FDU-428
• Operating temperature: -40° to +70°C

• Storage temperature: -40° to +70°C
• Maximum water depth: 15 m with WPSR cable, 1 m with ST+ type
cable.
The FDU is equipped with an LCK2 socket used to connect the input
sensor.
After an FDU is inserted into a line, its LED indicator is:
• normally off;

January 11, 2011
• slowly blinking if self-test errors are encountered;

• rapidly blinking if field test errors are encountered (e. g. because no
geophone is connected).
Note If the LSI option is enabled (in the Install main window on the
GUI), the LED on FDUs involved in serial communications
between the recorder and the distant blaster controller is not
indicative of any errors. Instead, it means (when blinking) that
the operator is allowed to plug or unplug the LSI box.
IMPORTANT
To provide protection against lightning, the grounding clamp must be in
contact with the ground.
WARNING
For optimal performance, keep FDUs at least 25 m away from any LRU
relay antenna, and at least 10 m away from any LAUR.
IMPORTANT
For shallow-water operations, use only watertight (lock-type) plugs on
the LCK2 socket.

January 11, 2011

CAUTION
Prior to turning and tightening the locking ring of the geophone plug, be
sure correct mating is achieved or else damage to the connector may
result. Do not fumble about for the mating position! Do not try to
tighten the locking ring until mating is correct!
1. Mate the connectors without fumbling about.

2. Push the plug straight in and press firmly against the socket.
7
2
Figure 7-2
3. Tighten the locking ring by hand.
Figure 7-3

January 11, 2011
Links
Links are made up of one or more FDUs, with customized cable lengths.
Below are three typical examples of links. For assembly instructions,
see 428XL Technical Manual.
FM4 plug FM4 plug

27.5 m 27.5 m
55 m
1-FDU Link
FM4 plug FM4 plug

55 m
165 m
3-FDU Link
FM4 FM4
plug plug
55 m
330 m
6-FDU Link
Figure 7-4 : FDU links
WARNING
FDU links are not designed for use on cable drums.

January 11, 2011

SH Sercel geophone string connectors
SH17
SH2
Figure 7-5
When used in severe environmental Area to

lubricate
conditions, SH connectors should be
lubricated periodically.
7
1. Clean the area to lubricate with a
dry wiper.
Clean with
dry wiper
2. Spray the area to lubricate with

SIL JET RHODORSIL or
equivalent silicone oil.
3. Check for a silicone film deposit

all round the mating areas and in
between.
Spray all round
and in between
4. Put the protective cap in place.

(Lubricated areas should not be
exposed to dirt or sand).
Figure 7-6

January 11, 2011
DSU-428
DSU3-428 DSUGPS
DSU3BV-428
DSU1-428
Figure 7-7
Line segments made up of DSUs can be incorporated anywhere into a

428XL spread (“line segment” refers to any portion of line delimited by
two LAUs). DSU line segments should be homogeneous, i. e. not
including any FDUs, but an LSS can be inserted into a DSU segment.
Within a DSU segment, you can use both DSU3-428 and DSU3BV-428
links, but you cannot use both DSU1-428 and DSU3-428 links. Also
note that a DSU segment should not include both DSU-408 and DSU-
428 links.
To optimize the noise performance of the DSU when using a GPS
receiver to synchronize the system, it is mandatory to use LCI-428
version C and 428XL firmware V4.13 or above. In that case, either a
Trimble Acutime Gold (Sercel P/N 087062) or a Novatel Propak
(Sercel P/N 3310233 — PROPAK-V3-OCXO-L1-A[SRCL]) GPS
receiver must be connected to the LCI-428. For DSUGPS units, the
Propak type is mandatory.
With no GPS receiver, LCI-428 version B can be used with 428XL
firmware V4.13 or above.
In both cases, it is recommended to limit the number of lines connected
on either side of the LCI-428 to 14. Additional LCI-428's can be used

January 11, 2011

to connect more lines if necessary. In multi-LCI-428 configuration,
only the master LCI-428 needs to be a version C if a GPS receiver is
connected.
The number of DSUs (DSU3-428, DSUGPS, DSU1-428, DSU3BV-
428) on either side of a LAUX-428 should not exceed 300.
For the maximum allowable number of DSUs between two LAUs, see
LAU spacing Vs DSU spacing on page 251.
If an LSS is used, remember it is equivalent to two FDU channels in
terms of power drain.
Remember the maximum real-time capacity for each LCI-428 is
20000 channels @ 4 ms, 10000 channels @ 2ms,
5000 channels @ 1ms.
7
DSU3-428 and DSU1-428
A drilling tool kit (P/N 1C94083571) for DSU1 and DSU3 units (except
DSU3BV-428) is available from SERCEL, with two types of auger:
• P/N 0110230 for ice (diameter: 38 mm);
• P/N 0110231 (diameter: 36 mm) for other types of soil.
Figure 7-8 Drilling tools
When boring a hole to plant a DSU3-428 or DSU1-428, the auger

should be held as vertical as possible. To help adjust the verticality of
drilling, the use of a spirit level (attached to the drilling tool) is
recommended.

January 11, 2011
In order to make sure DSUs are properly planted, it is advisable to do a

Tilt test from time to time. This can be automated with the AutoLook
option (see 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 1).
If the tilt angle of the DSU3 or DSU1 exceeds the limit set up on the
GUI for the Tilt test, the indicator light (LED) on the cable takeout
overmould is blinking, and the DSU is displayed in red (instead of
green) in the Instrument view on the GUI. With no tilt error the indicator
remains off and the DSU is green on the GUI.
Unlike for a DSU3-428, the orientation of a DSU1-428 does not matter.
Only its tilt angle is important. For a DSU1-428, the maximum
allowable Tilt angle on the GUI is 10°.
A planting tool is available that allows juggies to adjust the orientation
of a DSU3-428, which is denoted by the arrow engraved on the cable
takeout overmould. The system will regard the direction of the arrow as
the “Inline” direction.
Planting tool
Indicator is Off if no tilt,

otherwise blinking
Figure 7-9 Planting tool for DSU3-428

All DSU3 units within a link are connected in the same direction. When
planting DSU3s, juggies should make sure all arrows point to the same
direction, using the compass on the planting tool.

January 11, 2011

ch3 c h3
ch2 (C) c h2 (C)
ch1 (I) ch1 (I)
(V) (V)
Low or Ty-rap High or
High port Low port
ch3 ch3
ch2 (C) ch2 (C)
ch1 (I) ch1 (I)
(V) (V)
Figure 7-10
DSU3-428 links are reversible, meaning that the orientation of the link
itself does not matter. Only the orientation of the DSU3 units is
important (all arrows should point to the same direction).
7
The control unit (LAU) will
automatically place the
channels in the correct order
ch1 ch2 ch3 ch2 ch3

ch1
(V) (I) (C) (V) (I) (C)
Figure 7-11
Note: A "Ty-rap" cable tie is fitted close to the cable takeout overmould
of each DSU3, facing the head of the arrow pointing to the In-line
direction, that can be used to determine the In-line direction more easily
(for example, if the arrow is covered with mud).
In-line
Figure 7-12 DSU3

January 11, 2011
DSUGPS
When using DSUGPS links, no staking is required, and there is no need
to use a compass to finely adjust the orientation. The system takes care
of that itself, using the data from the built-in dual-antenna GPS receiver
to do the necessary position calculations.
Figure 7-13
In case of poor satellite reception, in obstructed areas such as dense

woodland, the DSUGPS may need to remain stationary for up to 24
hours in order to achieve the expected positioning accuracy.
An area providing unobstructed satellite visibility must be found for the
GPS reference station attached to the LCI-428.
Each LAUX-428 can control up to 600 DSUGPS units (with a
maximum of 300 on either Line port). DSUGPS line segments should
be homogeneous.
Note that the DSUGPS does not allow the use of an Ethernet Radio
Bridge.

January 11, 2011

Line cable
300 max 300 max
600 max
Figure 7-14 Maximum number of DSUGPS receiver points on a Line
See also LAU spacing Vs DSU spacing (page 251).
DSU3BV-428
7
Designed for burying at depths of up to 15 m, the DSU3BV-428
provides increased coupling with the ground. It can be used in all sorts
of land areas, including marshes and shallow water.
In-line FM4 plug Takeout Line cable
direction
Nameplate
Wide
slot
Pull-out cord Drop cable
DSU-428-BV
canister
Figure 7-15 DSU3BV-428

January 11, 2011
The diameter of the DSU3BV-428

canister is 62 mm, therefore a 62-mm Blade
diameter drilled hole will provide
ideal coupling. Note that if the
temperature is below freezing, the
canister should be inserted soon after
drilling the hole, otherwise the hole
might need drilling again as the low
temperature will cause it to shrink.
For burying depths of more than
50 cm, it is advisable to drill to a
wider diameter (63 mm) so that the
canister can be inserted to the desired
Figure 7-16
depth more smoothly.
It is also advisable to fit a small slanting blade at the top of the drill in
order to enlarge the top of the hole and prevent lumps of earth from
tumbling into the hole.
A special planting tool is available from SERCEL, to be used as
explained below.
Compass
Cam-cleat
Planting tool
stick
Pull-out cord
Figure 7-17

January 11, 2011

1. Release the lock knob on the compass, and then rotate the
compass dial until the blue arrow agrees with the In-line bearing
specified for the seismic survey (North in the example below).
Tighten the knob again to lock the dial at the desired bearing.
In-line direction
Lock
knob
Blue arrow
Compass
adjustable
dial
7
Cam-cleat
Figure 7-18
2. Fit the end of the planting tool onto the top end of the
DSU3-428-BV canister. At the end of the planting tool are two
docking pins, different in width, to be engaged into the matching
slots at the top end of the canister.
Docking pin
Figure 7-19

January 11, 2011
End of
planting tool
Docking pin
Top end of
DSU3BV-428
canister Docking slot
Docking
slot
Figure 7-20
3. Push down the canister to the desired depth into the prepared hole,
stretching the pull-out cord and wedging it into the cam-cleat in
order to hold it tensioned so that the tool remains docked to the
canister (see Figure 7-21).
4. Keeping the compass away from any nearby metal parts such as
keys, belt buckle, etc., grasp the handles of the planting tool and
rotate the DSU3BV-428 until the magnetic needle points to 0°
(North) on the compass dial.
5. Release the cam-cleat.
6. Lift the planting tool to undock it from the canister without
rotating it, and remove it from the hole.

January 11, 2011

Cleat
pull-out cord
to keep it tensioned
Figure 7-21 Planting tool docking to DSU3BV-428 canister
To prevent the drop cable and pull-out cord

from picking up any surface vibration Sand
bag
(caused by wind for example) and
transmitting it to the DSU3BV-428, it is
advisable to pin them to the ground, for
example by placing a sand bag over the
hole.
Figure 7-22

January 11, 2011
To remove the DSU3BV-428 from the hole, use the pull-out cord. Do
not pull abruptly. Be careful not to damage the drop cable. Clean the
unit with fresh water. Do not bang it against anything. Stow it into a
protective case.
Maintenance information
The sacrificial anode on a DSU3BV-428 should be replaced after 50%
of its volume is eaten away. Be sure to put lockwashers back in place.
Torque to 0. 9 Nm.
Except for the sacrificial (zinc) anode, pull-out axle, pull-out cord and
the spike, the DSU3BV-428 has no user-serviceable part. To prevent
damage to the DSU3BV-428 and the compass during transportation,
use the special carrying box provided. See page 208 in 428XL
Technical Manual for maintenance instructions.
The planting tool comes in two standard lengths: 1 m or 2 m. The
2-metre model is expandable as shown in Figure 7-23.
Orientation
Two M5 hex groove
head screws towards
In-line
direction
Notch in
joint sleeve
should line up Match locating rib
with and groove
orientation
groove on
stick
Two M5 hex
head screws
Figure 7-23

January 11, 2011

Item Part No. Description
1 36J64190353 Top stick, 1m.
2 36J64190355 Middle stick, 1 m.
3 36J64190354 Bottom stick, 1m.
4 36J64190356 Joint sleeve.
You can extend the length by removing the four M5 hex head screws,
fitting as many 1-m sticks as required, and putting the screws back in
place. When using two or more sticks, be sure to line up the orientation
grooves on all sticks. To lock the joint sleeve, turn as indicated by the
“lock” arrow.
LAUL-428 and LAUX-428

• Operating temperature: -40° to 12 VDC
7
+70°C.
12 VDC
• Storage temperature: -40° to
+70°C.
FM4 plugs
• Maximum water depth: 15 m.
• LAUL weight: 2.4 kg (5.3 lbs.)
Figure 7-24 LAUL-428
• LAUX weight: 5.5 kg (12.1 lbs.) 12 VDC
• LAUX size (HxWxD):

137 x 312 x 242 mm
(5.4 x 12.3 x 9.5 in.).
The amber LED indicator may be 12 VDC
blinking or frozen:
• Blinking if the LAUL or
LAUX is working properly. Figure 7-25 LAUX-428
• Frozen if internal errors are occurring.

January 11, 2011
Check the green LED indicator associated with each 12 VDC socket on
the LAUL or LAUX, to see if the battery connected to it is low (i. e.
below 10.3 V). The green LED is flashing if a battery is connected and
its voltage is above 10.5 VDC.
Note To prevent the line from being disrupted when you are
replacing a low battery on an LAUL or LAUX, first connect the
fresh battery to the spare 12 VDC connector, then remove the
low battery.
The line portion delimited by two LAUs is referred to as “Line
segment”. Note that as a general rule, a line segment should be
homogeneous, i. e. include a single type of unit. FDU-428, DSU3-428,
FDU-408 are examples of types of units that can be used in different
line segments, but never to be used jointly within the same line segment.
Also note that if any line segment includes 408-technology units, then
you have to use the Form Line setup in the Line window to set the data
rate to 8 Mbit/s on that segment.
See also LAU spacing Vs FDU spacing (page 250) and Spread layout
conventions (page 255).
Transverse Fibre Optics extender (TFOI)

The fibre optics extender (TFOI) is available in different lengths
(550 m, 600 m, 750 m, 1000 m, 2000 m, up to 10 km).
Fibre optics cable

(up to 10 km)
TFOI interface
(one at either end)
FM4 plug
Figure 7-26 TFOI fibre optics interface and cable

January 11, 2011

The wireline end of the TFOI interface box must be connected direct to
one of the Transverse ports of an LAUX-428 or LCI-428, or the wall-
mount input panel on the recording cab. Do not use any other cable in
between (because the LAUX-428 or LCI-428 needs to be informed of
the presence of a fibre optics extender, by sensing a special device
inside the FM4 plug of the TFOI interface box).
Because a different interface card is used at either end, the colour of the
interface box is different (green/red), but you can connect it in either
direction: you can connect, say, the green end to a Right Transverse port
(then connect the red end to a Left port), or the other way round.
In transition zone operations, the Transverse equipment may be
subjected to high tension as a result of currents exerting stress on cables
and terminations: the longer the cable length between anchoring points,
the higher the tension. Therefore, it is recommended to clamp 5-kg 7
ballast blocks on the fibre optic cable every 50 m, using bend-stiffeners.
It is also recommended to pull on the rigging of the LAUX-428 rather
than the fibre optic cable when retrieving the Transverse equipment.
Buoy
Warning
Pull on rigging rather than
TFOI cable when retrieving!
5 kg
ballast block
12 VDC Bend stiffener
TFOI-428
50 m 50 m
Figure 7-27

January 11, 2011
Transverse Repeater (TREP-428)

The TREP-428 is a repeater unit used between two standard Transverse
(SRHRF) cables to extend the Transverse.
Between two Transverse ports (i. e.
between two LAUX-428 units or
between the LCI-428 and the next
LAUX-428), you can connect up to
six 125-m lengths of Transverse
(SRHRF) cable, with five repeaters.
Figure 7-28 TREP-428
LAUX
125 m 125 m 125 m 125 m 125 m 125 m

TREP TREP TREP TREP TREP
LAUX
5 TREPs max.
Figure 7-29 Max. length between Transverse ports
End-of-line plug
In shallow-water operations, any unused Line or Transverse connector
should be terminated with an end-of-line plug.
(Part Number 512210121).
End-of-line plug
Dustcap
Figure 7-30

January 11, 2011
Power supply requirements

The LAUX-428 or LAUL-428 operates from a standard 12 V battery
(9 to 13.5 V). It is equipped with two power input connectors that allow
battery replacement without causing any disruption in the power supply.
FDUs and DSUs operate from the DC voltage supplied by the next
LAUL or LAUX or LAUR on one side or the other. To determine the
maximum allowable number of channels between an LAUX and an
LAUL, or between to LAULs, you cannot simply divide the available
power output by the power drain per channel. Three limiting factors
need to be considered:
• Software: the transmission protocol is designed for a maximum of
120 channels with a line data rate of 16 Mbits/s, 60 channels @
8 Mbits/s;
7
• Hardware: the voltage drop in cables increases with the cable length;
• The line data rate: the power drain per channel is higher at
16 Mbits/s.
See LAU spacing Vs FDU spacing (page 250) and LAU spacing Vs DSU
spacing (page 251).

January 11, 2011
LAU spacing Vs FDU spacing

The table below gives the maximum allowable number of FDU-428s
between two LAULs or between an LAUX and an LAUL (inclusive of
passive channels if any), depending on the cable length and on the Line
data rate.
Table 7-1 FDU spacing

Max. cable Max. number of FDUs between LAUs
length between
FDUs @ 8 Mbps @ 16 Mbps
5m 60 102
10 m 60 90
15 m 60 81
20 m 60 74
25 m 60 68
30 m 60 64
35 m 60 60
40 m 59 57
45 m 56 55
50 m 54 52
55 m 52 50
60 m 50 48
70 m 47 45
80 m 44 43
90 m 42 40
100 m 38 NA
110 m 37 NA

January 11, 2011

LAU spacing Vs DSU spacing
The tables below give the maximum allowable number of DSU units
between two LAULs or between an LAUX and an LAUL (inclusive of
passive channels if any), depending on the cable length and on the Line
data rate.
Table 7-2 Max. number of DSU3-428’s between LAUs

Max. cable length
@ 8 Mbps @ 16 Mbps
between DSU3-428’s
5m 20 40
10 m 20 40
15 m 20 40
20 m 20 40
25 m
30 m
20
20
40
40 7
35 m 20 40
40 m 20 40
45 m 20 39
50 m 20 37
55 m 20 36
60 m 20 34
70 m 20 32
80 m 20 30
90 m 20 29
100 m 20 NA
110 m 20 NA
Table 7-3 Max. number of DSUGPS’s between LAUs

Max. cable length between DSUGPS’s @ 16 Mbps
20 34
25 32
30 30
35 m 28
40 m 26
55 m 24
70 m 20
90 m 18

January 11, 2011
Table 7-4 Max. number of DSU3BV-428’s between LAUs

@ 16 Mbps
Max. cable length
@ 8 Mbps
between DSU3BV-428’s
5-m drop cord 15-m drop cord
15 m 20 36 26
25 m 20 32 24
40 m 20 28 22
60 m 20 26 NA
Table 7-5 Max. number of DSU1-428’s between LAUs

Max. cable length
@ 8 Mbps @ 16 Mbps
between DSU1-428’s
5m 60 78
10 m 60 71
15 m 60 66
20 m 60 61
25 m 60 58
30 m 56 55
35 m 54 52
40 m 51 50
45 m 49 48
50 m 48 46
55 m 46 45
60 m 44 43
70 m 42 41
80 m 40 38
90 m 38 37

January 11, 2011
Auxiliary channels

Auxiliary channels
Wireline auxiliary channels
The signals to be recorded as auxiliary traces can be connected to the
LCI-428 via an AXCUL-428 box. For each channel, a sticker indicates
the Serial Number of the associated FDU-428 unit. The FDU Serial
Number is associated with the auxiliary signal on the GUI, in the “Aux”
Layout Setup.
Signals from To other AXCUL-428

source controller (or FDU link)
Low Line
(typically)
7
FDU-428
Serial Number
Figure 7-31 AXCUL-428
You can also use an Auxiliary Interface Box (AIB, Part No.
1C14079115). The AIB box is equipped with four pairs of banana jacks
used as inputs, and four output cords that connect to the auxiliary FDUs.
Signals from source controller

Low Line or
High Line Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4 (banana jacks)
AIB
Aux 1, 2, 3, 4
Auxiliary channels (max. 120)
Figure 7-32 AIB
FDUs anywhere in the spread can also be used as Auxiliary channels.

For input voltage specifications, see FDU-428 input connector on
page 409.

January 11, 2011
Auxiliary channels
Vibrator signal recording (VSR)

See Rooftop-mount
VE464 whip antenna
DSD (page 331) LAUX
Similarities
Vibrator motion
signals from
SIMILARITIES
connector
Wireline to
AIB
recorder
truck
Battery
LRU
GND 12 V
LAUR
Battery
Figure 7-33 Auxiliary channels from VE432 DSD
Some vibratory seismic techniques require the recording of vibrator

motion signals on each vibrator. The 428XL allows the signals picked
up on the vibrators to be radioed to the central control unit in real-time
(as soon as each sweep is complete), using standard radio telemetry
units (LAUR), so that they can be recorded as auxiliary channels in the
SEGD file. See also Operating Mode and Options (page 266) in 428XL
User’s Manual Vol. 1.
The case of the LAUR should be tied to the case of the DSD and
grounded (use the grounding wing nut).
• Ref and Force scales: 31833 daN/V (differential outputs).
Max ~56000 daN: 1.76 Vpeak-peak.
• Acceleration scale: Max 70 ms-2: approx. 1.6Vpeak-peak.
318330 –2
Mass: --------------------------
-ms /V
Mass_mass
Baseplate: 318330 –2
--------------------------ms / V
Base_mass
(1 daN = 2.248089431 lbf)

January 11, 2011
Spread layout conventions

WARNING
Be sure the Low/High and Left/Right ports of each LAUX are properly
oriented. When looking for the elements in the spread, the central unit
will identify every element and determine the geometry of the spread in
relation to the Low/High and Left/Right ports of the LAUX units it
encounters.
Unlike the LAUX, links and LAULs are reversible with no effect upon
the identification of the elements in the spread.
7
n+1 n+2 n+3
Towards lower Towards higher
receiver positions receiver positions
Left Transverse
port High
Line port
LAUL-428
LAUX-428
Right Transverse
port
Transverse
• 125 m max with no repeater;

• up to 6 125 m with five TREP-428 repeaters
Left
Figure 7-34 (2-D spread)

January 11, 2011
Each line can handle up to 2000 active channels with a 16 Mbits/s data
rate (with FDU-428 field electronics). Each LCI-428 unit can control up
to 10 000 active channels.
n+1 n+2 n+3

Toward lower Toward higher
Left Transverse
port High
Line port
Right Transverse
port
• 125 m max with no repeater;
Transverse
• up to 6 125 m with five TREP-428 repeaters

Left
Transverse
Right
Left Transverse
port
Right Transverse
port
Figure 7-35 (3-D spread)

January 11, 2011

LAUX
100 Mbps
Figure 7-36 Snaking layout
Secondary Transverses can be used in order to provide redundant data

paths, allowing the data to be retrieved even though a line is disrupted.
7
LAUX
Secondary Transverse
LAUX LAUX
100 Mbps
Figure 7-37 Secondary Transverse
LAUX LAUX
LAUX LAUX
Figure 7-38 Data path redundancy

January 11, 2011

Deployment
Submersible line units (FDU2S and LAULS) are reversible, meaning
that their Line connectors can be used indiscriminately as Low or High
ports.
You can place a maximum of 30 FDU2S units between two LAUs, with
a maximum of 110 m between the FDU2S units.
You can insert a submersible segment anywhere in a standard 428XL
telemetry line, using a ULS Adapter (P/N 1P41081653) at either end.
The following jumpers are available:
- LAULS/FDU2S jumper cable (3 m, P/N 512500211).
- LAUX/FDU2S jumper (55 m, P/N 512500210)
- ULS back-to-back adapter (P/N 1P42081654),
WARNING
On line segments where you are deploying 408ULS field electronics,
you have to set the Line data rate to 8 Mbit/s, using the Form Line setup
in the Line window, or else they will not be visible to the system
(408ULS field electronics does not support the 16-Mbit/s Line data
rate).
Note Unused channels at standard/submersible junctions are

automatically skipped by the system (they do not need to be
entered into the Detour setup on the GUI).
ULS-matable
Standard 428XL connectors
connector (8-pin)
ULS-matable
connectors
(8-pin)
ULS adapter (1P41081653) Back-to-Back adapter (1P42081654)
Figure 7-39 Adapters

January 11, 2011

Connecting to an FDU
This channel is
not used
159 160 161 162
FDU2S FDU2S FDU FDU
55-m jumper (512500210)

FDU2S or
3-m jumper + ULS adapter
(512500211 + 1P41081653)
Figure 7-40
Connecting to an LAUXS
7
Power Left Trans IMPORTANT
(red) (blue)
Unused connectors should be
protected with watertight caps:
- P/N 512210065 for Line and
Low Line LAUXS High Line Trans connectors;
(blue) (blue) - P/N 354700035 for XDEV
connector.
XDEV Right Trans

(black) (blue)
3 m Jumper
(P/N 512500211)
104 105
FDU2S FDU2S LAUXS FDU2S
Low Line High Line
Transverse cable
P/N 512300032 (550 m)
Figure 7-41

January 11, 2011
Connecting to an LAUX
Jumper P/N 512500210 Jumper P/N 512500210

LAUX
This channel is This channel is

not used not used
104 105
FDU2S FDU2S FDU2S FDU2S
Figure 7-42
Connecting to LAULS
LINE POWER
(blue) (red)
XDEV (black) LINE (blue)
3 m Jumper
102 (P/N 512500211) 103 104
FDU2S LAULS FDU2S
Figure 7-43
IMPORTANT
Unused connectors should be protected with watertight caps:
- P/N 512210065 for Line connectors;
- P/N 354700035 for XDEV connector.

January 11, 2011

Note You can use an LAULS in place of an LAUL in a standard FDU
8 Mbit/s line segment.
FDU FDU LAULS FDU FDU
55-m jumper (512500210)

(or 512500211 + 1P41081653)
Figure 7-44
End of line
If a line ends with an ULS segment, it must end with an FDU2S unit
101 102
Unused channels 7
End
FDU2S FDU2S of Line
(cap P/N 512210065)
Unused channel
101 102 103
End
FDU2S FDU2S of Line
(cap P/N 512210065)
Unused channel
101 102 103
FDU2S FDU2S FDU2S End

of Line
(cap P/N 512210065)
Unused channel 103 104
End
FDU2S FDU2S
of Line
(cap P/N 512210065)
Figure 7-45
See how to configure the Line Survey setup window in 428XL User’s
manual Vol. 1.
January 11, 2011
Handling and service information
Connector mating
When connecting a cable to an LAUXS, LAULS or FDU2S, it is
important to make sure the threads are free of any scraps or sand grains.
Also, be sure the plug and socket are perfectly aligned prior to trying to
turn the locking ring. This will ensure correct mating and prolonged
connector life.
Push straight in
Right Wrong
Figure 7-46
Unless the plug and socket are perfectly aligned, the locking ring will
fail to grasp both thread ends on the socket, which may tear off the
threads and/or crack the receptacle (Figure 7-47).
Thread end (one on either side) Crack
Figure 7-47

January 11, 2011

Protection against corrosion
Protection against corrosion on FDU2S and LAULS units is provided
by a sacrificial anode which should be replaced after 50% of its volume
is eaten away. Be sure to put lockwashers back in place. Torque to
0. 9 Nm.
Avoid conductive contact between any metal body (especially stainless
steel attachments) and the housing of an FDU2S or LAULS.
WARNING
For sacrificial anodes to provide effective protection against corrosion,
it is essential to keep them free of mud. Brush and/or wash off mud
whenever possible.
Line, Trans, Power, XDEV connectors 7

Prior to any underwater mating, lubricate Line connectors with corn
oil.
GeoSpace-production takeouts
Prior to any underwater mating, lubricate takeout connectors with corn
oil.
AG-production takeouts
In order to prevent conductor fatigue and ultimate failure of
AG-production takeouts, avoid sharp bends at the takeout connectors,
by fitting a stiffener on each takeout and clamping it as shown below.
Tools and materials required:
- Ty-Rap cable tie tool (P/N 257 300 016).
- Ty-Rap 25M cable ties (P/N 316 070 007).
- Stiffeners (P/N 316 900 029).
- Adhesive tape, BULLDOG GEOREX (P/N 186 300 016).

January 11, 2011
1 2 3
Push cable into

stiffener Push stiffener
against locking ring
Press line cable against

4 groove in stiffener
Cut flush
Wrap in adhesive Attach in the middle

6 with cable tie
tape
Tie a double knot.

7 Cut end of adhesive tape
Split end of adhesive tape

in two halves about 20 cm
long
Figure 7-48

January 11, 2011

IMPORTANT INFORMATION
MATING
Before shipment, AG-production takeout connectors are lightly sprayed with an AEROSOL non-
water soluble silicon lubricant, in preparation for the first connection.
For subsequent matings, the connectors should be

cleaned to remove any contamination and silicon
build-up, then re-lubricated. This procedure will insure
correct mating as well as prolonged connector life.
Only use SILICON SPRAY approved for
POLYURETHANE application. DO NOT use WD40,
CRC or any other organic-based solvent spray. DO
NOT use heavy silicon greases like DC111.
7
LOCKING RINGS
Mating of Locking Rings should be DONE BY HAND only
Use of a wrench or pliers can cause thread damage and lead to failure of the
locking rings.
For trouble-free service, use a light machine oil or anti-seize DIELECTRIC product
to lubricate threaded portion of the stainless steel locking rings.
PULLING APART
Do not BEND or TWIST.
Pull STRAIGHT across connectors, or anchor

with foot and pull STRAIGHT up.
Figure 7-49

January 11, 2011
Inserting a blaster into a line (LSI and HSU)

The LSS (Line Shooting System) allows you to use the 428XL
telemetry network rather than a radio link to synchronize a remote
shooting system with the recording truck, for example in situations and
over stretches of land where radio communications are difficult.
Shooting with an LSS does not require any audio communications
between the observer in the recording truck and the shooter. The LSS
consists of an LSI unit associated with an HSU.
• The LSI (Line/Source Interface) allows you to connect a blaster
controller along an acquisition line instead of connecting it to the
control unit’s Blaster connector. It acts as a remote Blaster connector.
• The HSU (Hand-Shake Unit) is used by the shooter to supply the
status of the firing device and the number of the corresponding shot
point to the central unit.
All types of extensions are still allowed where an LSI is used (LRU
relay, Fiber Optics Link, Laser Link).
LSI
LRU
HSU
Blaster controller
You can connect another
shooting system on the second
Blaster connector
Figure 7-50

January 11, 2011

Note: With two or more LCI-428 modules (multimodule
configuration), you cannot use the LSS system.
Note: Software version 6.0.3 or 6.1.18 or higher is required.

The power for the LSI is supplied by the line and is equivalent to the
power drain of four FDUs. As a result the maximum allowable number
of FDUs between two LAUs, specified on page 250, must be decreased
by 4 if an LSI is inserted.
When the LSI is supplied with power, its "Line OK" indicator is lit.
The HSU operates from a 12 V battery.
Connecting an LSI
7
When FDUs are blinking, you are allowed to disconnect an FDU link
in order to plug an LSI. The LSI comes with two FM4 plugs so that you
can insert it between two FDU links, or between an FDU link and an
LAUL or LAUX, close to the shot point.
LSI
HSU
Blaster
controller
140 m
cable Blaster
Figure 7-51
Do not connect more than one LSI between any two LAUs.

January 11, 2011
The resulting maximum distance from the LSI to the blaster depends on
the number of FDUs making up the links, on the trace spacing and on
the line spacing. For example, with links made up of four FDUs spaced
by 60 m, you will be able to insert the LSI within about 140 m of the
shot point.
30 m 60 m 60 m 60 m 30 m
120 m max. 120 m max.
Shot point
Figure 7-52
Connecting an HSU
The blaster can be any shooting system, other than Opseis 815 RF
blaster, compatible with the Firing Order generated by the LSI (see
page 402).
The following signals from the blaster controller can be input to the
LSI:
• Analog signal from Up-Hole geophone, converted to digital on the
first channel in the LSI;
• CTB (Confirmed Time Break) analog signal, converted to digital on
the second channel in the LSI;
• ASCII message with a format supported by the 428XL (e. g. Macha).
See 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3 (Source controller formats).
WARNING
You can connect a Shot Pro blaster controller to the LSS but the serial
line normally required between the LCI-428 and the Shot Pro Encoder
is not supported. As a result, the Shot Pro Encoder does not return any
ASCII message via the serial ports of the HSU.

January 11, 2011

MACHA blaster controller
FM4
+ A Controller LSI
CONTROL A FO
F - B LINE OK
FO
DISCONNECT EN
DATA A + C HSU
(C wired to D) B RS232 - D ARM-EN
+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 UH (Analog)
SYSTEM C UH E LSI
D - F FTB (Analog)
Macha E + G
Controller F FTB H
ARM ARM SEND RS422
- EN SET
CTS
AB LINE
See Chapter 12
FM4
A B LINE 140 m cable, P/N 512000196.
Firing +12V
Macha Blaster UH
Figure 7-53
See pin assignment in Chapter 12
7
See the wiring diagram on page 421. Use a radio link between the
Macha Controller and Blaster in preference to a wireline link.
Shot Pro Encoder/Decoder
FM4
+ Controller LSI
K FO A
W - B LINE OK
FO
+ DISCONNECT EN
L C HSU
M RS232 - D ARM-EN
Shot Pro
Encoder + 1 2 3 4 5 6 Analog Aux 1
g E LSI
UH -
R F NISO TB Aux 2
J + G
X
TB ARM ARM SEND RS422
- H EN SET
N
CTS
See Chapter 12
FM4
Shot Pro Decoder Firing +12V 140 m cable, P/N 512000196.

UH
See pin assignment in Chapter 12
Figure 7-54
See the wiring diagram on page 422. Use a radio link between the Shot
Pro Encoder and Decoder in preference to a wireline link.
January 11, 2011
Operating instructions
The two indicators on the LSI are used as follows:
• Line OK: lights up when the LSI is connected and supplied with
power.
• Disconnect En: lights up when the shooter is allowed to unplug an
LSI.
The controls on the HSU are used as follows:
1. The shooter dials the shotpoint number with the rotary switches,
and then presses the Send pushbutton to send the shotpoint
number to the recording truck.
2. The Arm En indicator lights up after the source is selected in the
recording truck and the spread is formed, meaning that the shooter
is allowed to arm the firing device.
3. The shooter presses the Arm Set pushbutton to tell the recording
truck the firing device is armed.
Note For detailed calibration and operating instructions, see 428XL
User’s Manual Vol. 1 (Operation main window).

January 11, 2011
Quick Tester

Quick Tester
You can connect the QT-400 quick tester
anywhere on a line to check transmission
and power supply at a glance.
The QT-400 has three green indicators:
• A “Voltage” indicator (blinking if the
power supply is correct).
• Two “Transmit” indicators, one of
them blinking if transmission is
correct (one for the 8 Mbps data rate
and the other for 16 Mbps). The
QT-400 automatically determines 7
which data rate is used.
Figure 7-55
The QT-400 is counted as an FDU
channel in the GUI’s Line window.
For submersible (ULS) line segments, a ULS-matable

specific quick tester must be used connector
(QT408ULS).
Figure 7-56 QT408ULS

January 11, 2011
Quick Tester

January 11, 2011
Chapter
8 LT428 Line Tester
This chapter is a guide to using an LT428 line tester. It

includes the following sections:
• Introduction (page 274)

• Connecting the handheld PC (page 276)
• Getting started (page 277)
• The main menu (page 280)
• Running Line tests (page 290)
• Running Transverse tests (page 300)
• Working with results (page 303)
• Auxiliary functions (page 309)

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
Introduction
Introduction
The LT428 is a pocket terminal (a handheld PC with LT428 software)
that connects to the XDEV connector of an LAUL-428 or LAUX-428,
used to check the performance of a line section. The test results are
displayed on the pocket terminal.
Note Noise or distortion measurements performed with an LT428
should not be used as acceptance tests. To check FDUs for
compliance with acceptance specifications, launch those tests
on the 428XL GUI computer instead.
Navigation bar
Scroll up/down buttons
Command bar (onscreen

keyboard icon, icons to any
applications that are running)
Shortcut to “LT428”
Shortcut to “Term428”
application
application
Figure 8-1 Intermec CN3e

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
Introduction

Start menu
Turns on/off backlight
(if white function key
Press this function key is pressed)
prior to typing any
orange character
White function key

(enables blue keypad or
Decreases backlight backlight on/off key)
(if orange function
key is pressed) 8
Increases backlight
(if orange function
Power on key is pressed)
Figure 8-2 GoBook

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
Connecting the handheld PC
Connecting the handheld PC

Note Prior to connecting the handheld PC to any LAU, be sure the
LT428 application on the PC is not running and the LAU is
disconnected from the 428XL network.
1. Connect a 12 VDC voltage to one of the 12VDC inputs of the
LAUL or LAUX.
2. Connect the handheld PC to the XDEV socket on the LAUL-428
or LAUX-428, using the cable provided (see Connectors and
cables on page 401). This turns on the power supply in the LAUL
or LAUX.
CN3e P/N 1D17082539

snap-on
adapter
12 VDC
LAUL-428
Use right-hand
(ruggedized) port of
Gobook PC
12 VDC
P/N 1C50078588
LAUX-428
Figure 8-3
Note The handheld PC operates from its built-in rechargeable

battery. See Getting started (page 277).

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
Getting started

Getting started
WARNING
Be sure the battery inside the handhled PC is properly charged. See the
manual that came with your handhled PC for detailed information on
the battery (checking, storage, charging, replacement, etc.).
Prior to starting using a handhled PC that was formerly used in another
crew, remove and then reinstall LT428 software. When the system asks
you if you want to delete existing files, choose to delete all.
To install LT428 software on your handhled PC, see Handheld PC
software (page 205).
Launching the LT428 application

1. Connect the handhled PC to an LAU (see page 276). 8
2. Power up the handhled PC.
3. Select the LT428 program from the Start menu.

Note Every time you start the LT428, the
program checks for licence information
Enter the Licence
(on a Gobook PC the licence information code here
is saved in a key.dat file in the “\”
directory). If for any reason the licence
information has been deleted or is
incorrect, you have to enter the licence
code that came with your LT428. If you
have any difficulty recovering that code, Figure 8-4
you can get it again from SERCEL: you
simply have to supply the Serial Number displayed on the
handhled PC.

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
Getting started
Note It is a advisable to save the key.dat file to a safe, non-volatile

medium, e.g the integrated compact flash memory card on a
Gobook PC, using the File Explorer (data in the compact flash
memory is not erased by a hardware reset). Afterwards, if the
system asks you to enter the licence code, as will be the case
when launching the LT428 application after a hardware reset,
you’ll simply have to copy the key.dat file from the compact
flash memory to the “\” directory (then you can launch the
LT428 application).
On a CN3e, you have to enter the licence code if you are launching the
LT428 application after a Clean Boot.
Figure 8-5
Note If you launch the LT428 application with an LAU already

connected, then a message appears asking you to unplug the
computer and plug it back (Please disconnect and
reconnect the PDA plug).
Note If the VXWorks boot program fails, unplug the power cord
from the LAUL or LAUX, then plug it back in.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
Getting started

A window shows up after you launch the
LT428 tool, prompting the IP address
(172.30.201.1 by default) to assign to the
LAUX-428 attached to the palmtop computer.
You do not normally need to change that
address (unless an LCI-428 is present on the
network). You can choose any of the nine
addresses from 172.30.201.1 to 172.30.201.9
(tick the "Connect to Remote LAU" option
and enter the desired address into the "Host IP Figure 8-6
Address" field).
After the boot is completed successfully, the LAUL or LAUX generates
a POWER UP report containing information about the identity of the
LAUL or LAUX, its power supply voltage and the results from its self-
tests.
Pressing (clicking OK)takes you to the main menu. 8
Figure 8-7

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
The main menu
The main menu

The main menu includes three pages. One is used to set parameters,
another one to run tests and the third for utility functions.
Note: On a CN3e, the tabs for the different

pages are displayed at the foot of the window
Virtual keypad
Figure 8-8
Note The Tap Test function is not available until you perform Power
On or Form Line. It can only be used on the line the LT428 is
attached to, not on a remote line.
Note The About menu displays the LT428 software version.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
The main menu

Parameter setups
Figure 8-9 8
Note The Rcv Nb Incr parameter is only available if the Advanced
mode is enabled in the General Parameters menu.
Set LT Position
Used to specify the position of the Line Tester within the spread. If you
wish to test a line other than the one which the Line Tester is connected
to, you have to change the Tested Line Number parameter.
Set General Parameters

Used to specify a few parameters normally supplied by the central
control unit (Sample Rate, Filter Type, Gain) and an operating mode for
the LT428. If you choose the Advanced mode, then another menu page
is available.
Set Test Limits

Used to specify the limits for the battery voltage, Field tests and
Instrument tests.

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
The main menu
Field units
Used to choose the FDU type.
Test functions
Figure 8-10
Exec Line Test

Opens a secondary menu used for testing lines.
Exec Transverse Test

Opens a secondary menu used for testing Transverses.
Tap Test
Used to determine the polarity of the signal generated by a sensor. It is
not available until a Power On or Form Line is performed. It can only
be used on the line the LT428 is attached to, not on a remote line.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
The main menu

The LT428 Position menu
Selecting Set LT Position from the main menu opens the following
menu page that allows you to specify the position of the Line Tester
within the spread.
Advanced mode only

(defaults to 1)
Figure 8-11
Note See the General Parameters menu for the Advanced mode.
8
Line Tester Position:
Transverse
Adjacent receiver number on

its Low side: #148
Low side High side
Line
100 101 148
FDU-428 LAUL-428
12 VDC 12 VDC
LAUX-428
Figure 8-12
LT Line Nb
(1 to 99999) Number of the line which the Line Tester is connected to.
The Line Tester assumes the line number of the first stake encountered
on the Low side of the LAUL or LAUX it is connected to.

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
The main menu
Line Nb Inc.
(1 to 99999) Increment of line numbering.
LT Rcv Nb
(1 to 99999) The Line Tester assumes the number of the first
topographic stake encountered on the Low side of the LAUL or LAUX
it is connected to.
Note If the LAUL or LAUX is located at the very beginning of a line,
then it assumes the number of the first stake encountered on the
High side, minus the Rcv Nb Increment (see below).
Line Tester Position:

Adjacent receiver
number on its Low
Low side
side: #99
100 101
LAUL-428 FDU-428
12 VDC 12 VDC
Figure 8-13
Rcv Nb Increment
(1 to 99999) Increment of topographic stake numbering. This parameter
is only prompted if the Advanced mode is enabled. See The General
Parameters menu (page 285).
Tested Line Nb
(1 to 99999) Line to be tested. If the Line Tester is implemented on an
LAUX, you can test a line other than the one it is connected to (except
for a Tap test of a Save RCV Tilt Model function).
• To specify the adjacent line on the left side, simply decrease the LT
Line Nb by one step (Line Nb Inc.).
• To specify the adjacent line on the right side, simply increase the LT
Line Nb by one step (Line Nb Inc.).

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
The main menu

The General Parameters menu
Selecting Set > General Parameters from the main menu opens the
following menu page that allows you to enter a few parameters
normally supplied by the central control unit:
Figure 8-14
• Sample Rate: The following options are available: 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2 or

8
4 ms.
• Filter: The following options are available: 0.8 Lin, 0.8 Min or Eagle.
• Gain: The following options are available: 1600 mV input (0 dB) or
400 mV input (12 dB).
• Mode: The following options are available: Normal or Advanced.
The Normal option is for simple field patterns (one type of sensor,
one sensor on each topographic stake). If you choose Advanced, then
the parameters in the third page allow more complex field patterns to
be tested.
• Nb Sensor/Rcv Pt: (1 to 9) Used to specify the number of sensors
implemented on each topographic stake.
• Nb Sensor Type: (1 to 9) Used to specify the number of sensor types
used.
• Receiver Type Layout: (Regular/Irregular).
• LT Sensor Type Nb: (1 to 9).

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
The main menu
Below are examples of field patterns with the associated mode

(Normal or Advanced).
Configuration: One sensor per receiver point, one sensor type Normal Mode
FDU # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sensor Type 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Rcv Number 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
Configuration: One sensor per receiver point, two sensor types, regular Advanced Mode
FDU # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sensor Type 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Rcv Number 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
Configuration: Two sensors per receiver point, two sensor types, regular Advanced Mode
FDU # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sensor Type 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Rcv Number 101 102 103 104
Figure 8-15
Note If the line segment includes an LSI unit, the LSI will be seen by
the Look function, but it cannot be tested by LT428.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
The main menu

The Test Limits menu
Selecting Set > Test Limits from the main menu from the main menu
opens the following menu page that allows you to set alert threshold for
battery tests, field tests and instrument tests.
8
Figure 8-16
Battery limit
Use this menu to enter the alert threshold for Low battery voltage tests.
Figure 8-17

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
The main menu
Field test limits

Use this menu to specify alert thresholds for field tests. Only those tests
which are selected in this menu will be performed by the Field Test
function (see Running Line tests on page 290).
To select a test, choose the appropriate check box.
Figure 8-18
Enter the desired limits into the appropriate fields.

If the Advanced mode is enabled and two or more types of sensors are
used (see The General Parameters menu on page 285) then this menu is
available for each sensor type. In that case, if you select a test then you
select it for all sensor types.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
The main menu

Instrument test limits
Use this menu to view alert thresholds for instrument tests. Only those
tests which are selected in this menu will be performed by the
Instrument Test function (see Running Line tests on page 290).
To select a test, choose the appropriate check box.
Figure 8-19
8
The preset thresholds are displayed. You cannot change them.

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
Running Line tests
Running Line tests
Figure 8-20
Note The Direction option is only for the Form Line function on an
LAUL. With an LAUX, both Low and High branches are
looked up.
Note Save Rcv Tilt Model can only be used on the line the LT428 is
To run line tests, select Exec > Line Test from the main menu. This
opens the following menu pages.
See Note (1)

below
See Note (2)

below
Figure 8-21
Note (1) This menu toggles between “Power On” and “Power Off”
functions. At the outset, “Power On” is prompted. Then,
running the function prompted causes the menu to toggle to the
other function.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
Running Line tests

Note (2) Save Rcv Tilt Model can only be used on the line the
LT428 is attached to, not on a remote line.
WARNING
The Power On and Form Line functions identify a set of field units on
which the other tests (field, instrument, Xmit) are performed.
For these tests, LT428 software sends a command to all LAUs
connected, then it collects the corresponding results sequentially,
jumping from one LAU to the next.
If any LAU fails to respond, the message
Wait for LAUL/X #xxxx field/instrument/xmit test on low/high
is displayed continually. In that case, you have to depress ESC twice to
quit the test and display the results collected from those LAUs which
responded properly.
To preclude that message from appearing, use Power Off then Power 8
On to have the connected units properly re-identified.

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
Running Line tests
LAUL Orientation
With an LT428 implemented on an LAUL, an Orientation parameter is
prompted when you launch the Power On or Form Line function. You
have to choose the appropriate orientation (Direct or Reverse),
depending on how the LAUL is connected in the line.
(for LAUL only)
Figure 8-22
The Low port of an LAUL is on the same side as the 12 VDC B

connector.
Choose Direct if the Low port of the LAUL is connected toward “Low”
receiver points, Reverse otherwise.
12 VDC B
“Low” port
Toward “Low” Toward “High”

receiver points receiver points
Figure 8-23 Direct-oriented LAUL-428

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
Running Line tests

Power On
The Power ON function identifies all the elements encountered on the
line. Transmit tests, Field tests and Instrument tests run subsequently
will address all of the elements identified (LSI units are viewed by the
LT428, but not tested).
With an LAUL, a secondary menu appears that allows you to choose the
orientation of the unit and the branch (High/Low) to be turned on and
tested. See LAUL Orientation (page 292).
Whatever the display mode enabled, the location (Receiver number) of
the first FDU and last FDU in the line section is displayed in the foot
row. Errors are denoted by an asterisk.
Figure 8-24
Power Off
Selecting Power Off turns off the selected branch (High/Low). Power
off takes about five seconds to complete (the message Wait for
Power Off is displayed while the LAUs are being turned off).
Form Line
The Form Line function only identifies the elements encountered in the
receiver section you specify. You have to choose the branch (Low or
High) and the stake number of the farthest unit in the section.

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
Running Line tests
Figure 8-25
For an LAUL, see also LAUL Orientation (page 292).

Transmit tests, Field tests and Instrument tests you run subsequently
will only address the elements identified in that receiver section.
The Farthest Rcv Nb parameter is reset each time a Power On
function is performed.
Form Line returns the same kind of results as Power On. (See Working
with results on page 303).
Xmit Test
The Xmit Test function transmits random data and checks the
associated CRC codes in real time.
The test applies to all the elements identified by the Power On or Form
Line function.
Select Run Xmit to start the test.
To end the test, select Stop Xmit.
The total count of CRC errors and the elapsed time since the function
was launched are displayed.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
Running Line tests

Figure 8-26
If no error is encountered, pressing ESC takes you back to the previous

menu without any results being displayed.
Figure 8-27

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
Running Line tests
Save Receiver Tilt Model

The Save Rcv Tilt Model function is used to measure the response of a
sensor to a pulse and save it as a model for tilt tests on that type of
sensor. Be sure the sensor used as a model is planted properly.
Note Save Rcv Tilt Model can only be used on the line the LT428 is
If two or more Sensor Types are used (i. e in Advanced mode with
Irregular as Receiver Type Layout option, or in the case of a receiver
with two or more types of sensors), the Rcv Type Nb parameter allows
you to choose a type of sensor. A model should be saved for each type
of sensor used, or else you will not be able to run the Tilt Test function.
Click OK
Figure 8-28
After you perform Power On or Form Line, this function is also

available from the main menu’s auxiliary functions.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
Running Line tests

Instrument Test
The Instrument Test function runs those tests you selected using the
Set Test Limits menu. (See The Test Limits menu on page 287).
1
1
Figure 8-29
Unless no cell is selected, you can use the scrollbar or the horizontal
8
arrow keys on the keypad to scroll through the result fields.
The following result fields are displayed:
• RCV: topographic stake number of each FDU.
• CH: always 1 for FDU-428; channel number for a multi-channel unit.
• TEST: Pass/Fail decision.
• Result value for each test selected: the value is expressed in the same
unit as in the Set Instr Test Limits menu.
- Those results which exceed the programmed alert threshold are
highlighted.
- If the value is too large to fit in the result display field, then the
maximum value of the field is displayed instead (e. g. 9999 in the
case of a four-digit result field).

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
Running Line tests
Field Test
The Field Test function runs those tests you selected using the Set
Test Limits menu. (See The Test Limits menu on page 287). Only those
receivers that were identified on the latest LOOK or FORM LINE are
tested.
1 1
1 1
Figure 8-30
WARNING
If the Tilt test is selected and no model is saved for any one of the
different sensor types used, then you cannot run the function.
If two or more Sensor Types are used (i. e in Advanced mode with
Irregular as Receiver Type Layout option) then the Line Tester
requests you to choose one sensor type prior to running the tests.
Unless no cell is selected, you can use the scrollbar or the horizontal
arrow keys on the keypad to scroll through the result fields.
The following result fields are displayed:
• RCV: topographic stake number of each FDU.
• TEST: Pass/Fail decision according to your field test limits.
• TYPE: Only appears in Advanced mode if two or more sensor types
are used.
• Result value for each test selected: the value is expressed in the same
unit as in the Set Test Limits menu.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
Running Line tests

- Where relevant, the + sign is implicit (i. e. not displayed).
- Those results which exceed the programmed alert threshold are
highlighted.
- If the value is too large to fit in the result display field, then the
maximum value of the field is displayed instead (e. g. 9999 in the
case of a four-digit result field).

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
Running Transverse tests

To run Transverse tests, select Exec Transverse Test from the main
menu. This opens the following menu page.
See Note
below
Figure 8-31
Note This menu toggles between “Power On” and “Power Off”
functions. At the outset, “Power On” is prompted. Then,
running the function prompted causes the menu to toggle to the
other function.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester

Power On/Off
When you launch the Power On or Power Off function, a Look
function is performed too.
Figure 8-32
Form Transverse
The Form Transverse function only identifies the elements
8
encountered in the Transverse section you specify. You have to specify
the stake number of the farthest line in the section.
After a Power On is performed on a
Transverse, the farthest line identified
earlier is prompted by default.
Transmit tests you run subsequently will
only address the elements identified in
that Transverse section.
Form Transverse returns the same kind
of results as Power On.
Figure 8-33

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
Xmit Test
The Xmit Test function transmits random data and checks the
associated CRC codes in real time.
The test applies to all the elements identified by the Look or Form
Transverse function.
Select Run Xmit to start the test.
To end the test, select Stop Xmit.
The total count of CRC errors and the elapsed time since the function
was launched are displayed.
Figure 8-34
Figure 8-35

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
Working with results

After test results are displayed
on the palmtop computer, you
can scroll up or down using the
up/down or left/right arrow
key to select any result row.
With test results displayed, Save or export
Display mode Search
you can change the display
mode, enter comments, view
details, save and export results. Figure 8-36
Display mode
In the normal display mode, all results are 8
viewed. The Mode button allows you to
filter the results.
• Normal: All results are displayed
(passed, failed, errors).
Note If an LSI is encountered on the
line segment, it is viewed as two
FDUs. The serial number of the
LSI is displayed in the “RCV”
field with “LS” as a prefix.
Neither the LSI nor the HSU can
be tested by the LT428. Figure 8-37

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
• Condensed: The Condensed mode is

1
only allowed where appropriate. In
Condensed mode, all results are
displayed, but a single result row Failed test
Number of FDUs
appears for each FDU link. The in the Link
number of FDUs in the link is
displayed in place of the Serial
Number. An error flag appears in the
error field if any one of the FDUs in
the link is at fault.
Figure 8-38
• Error: Only faulty results are

displayed.
Figure 8-39
Error details
Selecting any “FAIL” status field in results from a Xmit, Field or
Instrument test may cause error details (e. g. FWD_CRC) to appear at
the foot of the display, depending on the type of error encountered.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester

Searching through the results
The Search button in the result
display opens a menu that allows you
to jump to a topographic stake or an
element (FDU, LAUL or LAUX).
Choose the desired Search Info

option (Rcv point, FDU, LAUL,
LAUX). In the Search Value field,
type the receiver point or serial
number to find. Choose Go.
Figure 8-40
Comments
8
Selecting a result row then pressing
the Enter key allows you to enter a 1
comment (one row on the display) 1
Comment input
1
that will be attached to the selected field
result row.
Use the virtual keypad at the foot of
the display to type your comment
text. As you type it, the comment
appears at the top of the display. Press
Enter again to save the comment.
Figure 8-41

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
After you enter a comment, it appears

1 1
in the status row at the foot of the 1 1
display whenever the result row is 1
selected again. It will also appear in

the file saved or exported.
Comment
Figure 8-42
Saving and exporting results

The File button allows you to save
and/or export the results currently
displayed to a file in the palmtop
computer’s memory. 1 1
1 1
1
Save
This button opens a Save as dialog
box that saves the results to a binary
file, with the “.lt” extension, so that
you can read back that file at a later in
the LT428 application, using the
Utility menu (see Playing back a result
file on page 308). Attached
comments, if any, are saved too.
Unless you wish to use the default
name prompted (e. g. “field_save.lt”
for Field tests), use the virtual keypad
Figure 8-43
to enter a name for the file.
January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester

Export
This button saves the results to a text file
so that you can open that file at a later
date in a spreadsheet application (a Tab
character is used as separator). Attached
comments, if any, are saved too.
The Export button opens a comment
input box that allows you to enter
general comments about the test results
(using the virtual keypad).
After typing the desired comments,
press the Enter key and choose OK.
This opens a Save as dialog box. Unless
you wish to use the default name
prompted (e. g.“field_xprt.txt” for Field
tests) use the virtual keypad to enter a
8
name for the file.
You can rename the file with the xls
extension.
Figure 8-44

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
Playing back a result file

To open a result file saved in the palmtop computer’s memory, select
“Load result” from the “Util” main menu and choose the desired file
from the list prompted (files with the “.lt” extension). This allows you
to view the results but you cannot export them.
Figure 8-45
The “Power Up Result” button allows you to go back to the power up

results.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
Auxiliary functions

Auxiliary functions
Tap Test
The Tap Test function is not available until you perform Power On or
Form Line.
Note Tap Test can only be used on the line the LT428 is attached to,
not on a remote line.
It allows you to determine the polarity of the signal generated by a
sensor, by tapping on top of the sensor and looking at the shape of the
signal recorded by the LT428.
The sensor should not be tied to any fixture. Instead, hold it in one hand
and gently tap the top with one of your other hand’s finger tips. 8
For the signal to be easy to interpret, the tap should not be so strong as
to cause the coil to override its allowable stroke.
Tap here with finger tip
Figure 8-46
• Specify the topographic stake number of the receiver to be tested

(Rcv Nb parameter).
• In the case of a receiver with two or more sensors, the Sensor Nb
parameter allows you to specify the sensor to be tested.
• After a beep is generated by the palmtop terminal, tap the sensor as
explained above. The Tap Test function performs a 5-second
January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
Auxiliary functions
acquisition, isolates the pulse resulting from the tap, and displays the
pulse and the region on either side of it. The time appears on the
horizontal axis and the level (in mV) on the vertical axis.
Figure 8-47
If the signal is clipped on either side (i. e. exceeding the -565 to 565 mV
range), repeat the test with a lighter tap.
The peak value of the signal is positive if the sensor’s coil is in the
correct direction.

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester
Auxiliary functions

Serial port parameters
Select Com Setup from the Util main menu.
COM4 for Gobook

COM1 for CN3e
Figure 8-48

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
The Link configuration update tool

Overview
In the non-volatile memory of each FDU or DSU unit is information
(location of the unit within the link, assembly type) that is used for
graphic views on the 428XL GUI. If you need to update that
information, for instance after changing the number of units in a link,
launch the “Term428” program instead of “lt428” on your Line Tester.
Example
Assuming you have several links with four FDUs or DSUs and you
want to change them into links with two FDUs or DSUs.
1. Make the necessary changes to the cable, to remove two FDUs or
DSUs from each 4-unit link.
2. Connect a 2-unit link to the Low line port of an LAUL or LAUX.
3. Power on the handhled PC.
4. On a Gobook PC, select “Term428CE” from the Start menu. On
a CN3e select My Device > Program Files > LT428 > Term428,
or use the shortcut (right-hand blue) button.
5. Connect the handhled PC to the LAU.
6. Wait for the boot end message "proto---end" and press 'Yes
(' twice.
7. Choose “Link”.
The following messages should appear:
*****************************
**** UPDATE A LINK ****
***** ON LOW PORT *****
*****************************
How many units per link do you want ?

January 11, 2011
LT428 Line Tester

8. Type the desired number of FDUs or DSUs (in this example 2)
and press 'Yes'. (Use whichever keypad is more convenient to
you).
Messages
Entry field
Link
Virtual keypad
The following messages should appear:

Identification
Wait a few seconds 8
Identification completed
Updating
Wait a few seconds
Updating completed
Checking
Wait a few seconds
Identification completed
*****************************
** Successful updating! **
**** LINK UPDATE END *****
*****************************
9. If you want to update another link, start over at step 8.

January 11, 2011
8 LT428 Line Tester
The following errors may arise:

• If you have connected too many or too few FDUs or DSUs:
*****************************
**** ERROR *****
**** n units connected ****
*****************************
• If updating is not correct:
*****************************
**** ERROR *****
**** Updating failed *****
*****************************
• If the Update Link utility finds more than one type of unit in the link:
*****************************
**** ERROR *****
**** A single type *****
**** of unit *****
**** is allowed *****
*****************************
• If the Update Link utility finds a type of unit that is not supported:
*****************************
**** ERROR *****
**** Unsupported unit *****
*****************************

January 11, 2011
Chapter
In this chapter:
• Radio telemetry equipment (page 316)

• Theory of operation (page 321)
• Typical setups (page 326)
• Antennas (page 330)
• Antenna mast (page 340)
• Deployment using the FDPA428 (page 345)

January 11, 2011
Radio telemetry equipment

The 428XL radio telemetry equipment includes a data acquisition unit
(LAUR-428) and a transceiver unit (LRU) that can be used in difficult
areas to avoid all types of obstacles and achieve greater field efficiency.
The LRU (Line Remote Unit) is used as a long range point-to-point
radio relay, or as master transceiver in a radio cell. It can be inserted
anywhere in a spread as an element of the 428XL network to relay the
data transmission on a Line. It connects to any type of 428XL field
electronics (LAUX, LAUL, FDU Link, etc.), except for 100 MHz
Ethernet ports. Built in the LRU is a full performance LAUX,
optimizing the deployment of field hardware.
Note If you want to use any early-production LRU (version A or B),
you have to return it to Sercel for upgrading.
The LAUR-428 is capable of acquiring up to 30 channels of seismic
data at 2 ms sampling rate in real-time. It is controlled by a master LRU,
which can collect up to 240 channels at 2ms in real-time.
You can choose between various configurations, depending on the
required data rate and on the expected transmission range. Using a
pocket terminal (FDPA428 Field Deployment Aid), the radio link can
be set up adequately prior to connecting the LRU to the 428XL network.
The parameter settings can also be changed through the 428XL GUI (in
the LINE main window).
The allowable temperature range for both operating and storage is
-40°C to +70°C.
The power supply used shall be compliant with the rules and regulations
of the FCC, of Canada or with other local regulations. A 12 VDC
battery can be used as a power supply.
The LAUR and LRU operate in a relatively low radio frequency band
(215 MHz to 250 MHz) featuring strong propagation characteristics.
Within that band, they use a minimum 200-kHz bandwidth, on one or
two channels, each with a 800-kHz maximum bandwidth, depending on

January 11, 2011
428XL Radio telemetry

the selected data rate. The user is responsible for inquiring about local
radio frequency regulations and using the frequency band accordingly.
Note The available frequency band depends on the regional settings
chosen by the user when installing software on the 428XL GUI
and on the FDPA428 terminal. For compliance with Canadian
and US communications regulations, the frequency band is
limited to respectively:
• Canada: 217 to 218 MHz and 219 to 220 MHz.
• USA: 217 to 220 MHz (and 216 to 217 MHz by licence prior to
January 01, 2002).
The LRU
Whether it is used in “relay” mode or in “cell” mode, the LRU is a half-
duplex transmission system.
With “Field ON” activated in the Line main window on the 428XL GUI,
the unit connected to the side towards the Central Unit continuously
transmits a time tick signal (every 50 ms) that allows the other end to
9
keep clock-synchronized.
The LRU unit comes with standard 428XL Transverse (except
100 MHz Ethernet port), Line, Power and XDEV connectors. The
Type-N, radio connector is waterproof when connected. Attention
should be paid to put the cap in place on the radio connector whenever
the unit is not in use, in order to keep the connector clean and the unit
waterproof.
The LRU operates from a 10.5 VDC to 15.0 VDC power supply
voltage, with the following power consumption figures:
• Master: 23 W,
• Slave: 80 W when retrieving,
• Sleep state: 1.2 W.
The weight of an LRU is 12.6 kg (27.8 lbs.)

January 11, 2011
7-element Yagi
antenna
12 V
6- to 8-m telescopic portable

mast (less than 20 kg)
12 VDC A
High Low High
Line Line Line
Tx Rx
LAUX
12 VDC B
XDEV
GND
Figure 9-1 LRU
Two types of antenna can be used with the LRU:

• A 7-element directional antenna and 6- to 8-m telescopic portable
mast, typically intended for use in “relay” mode;
• An omnidirectional antenna and mast extender (the same as with an
LAUR), typically intended for use in “cell” mode.

January 11, 2011

The antenna impedance to be used is 50 Ohm. The maximum VSWR
measured at the transceiver output must be less than 1.5:1 at the
operating frequencies.
The LAUR-428
The LAUR allows seismic data acquisition and retrieval on radio line
segments with true zero dead time, real-time QC (seismonitor) just like
you were using wireline telemetry channels through an LAUL. You can
deploy and check your radio line channels while taking shots.
The LAUR is used in a radio cell, replying to queries from the LRU
present in that cell and using a half-duplex transmission protocol. The
clock in the LAUR is locked on that of the associated LRU, which
continuously transmits a time tick signal (every 50 ms) for that purpose.
The LAUR unit comes with standard 428XL Line, Power and XDEV
connectors. The Type-N, radio connector is waterproof when
connected. Attention should be paid to put the cap in place on the radio
connector whenever the unit is not in use, in order to keep the connector 9
clean and the unit waterproof.
You can connect up to 30 channels on either side of the LAUR.
30 channels max. 30 channels max.

Battery
Low Line High Line

port port
n+1 n+2
Toward lower Toward higher

Figure 9-2 LAUR radio line segment
The LAUR’s built-in non-volatile data memory allows local storage of

acquired channels, precluding any loss of data in the event of
transmission or power supply failures. With lossless compression, up to

January 11, 2011
1 hour of seismic data can be saved in the LAUR (with 18 channels @2

ms and a recording-to-operating time ratio of 6/10).
Supplied along with each LAUR
is an omnidirectional antenna. A
mast extender is also supplied. Antenna
The antenna impedance to be

used is 50 Ohm. The maximum
VSWR measured at the
transceiver output must be less
than 1.5:1 at the operating
frequencies.
A rooftop-mount kit including a
whip antenna is also available
(Part No. 1C61085838). See
Rooftop-mount whip antenna
(page 331).
The weight of an LAUR is
12.2 kg (26.8 lbs.).
mast
extender
12 V
The LAUR operates from a 10.5
VDC to 15.0 VDC power supply
voltage, with the following Figure 9-3 LAUR and antenna
power consumption figures:

• When retrieving: 40.6 W with 30 FDUs connected,
• Sleep state: 2.4 W with receive ON,
0.2 W without receiving,

January 11, 2011
Theory of operation

Theory of operation
The 428XL radio telemetry equipment uses a half-duplex transmission
protocol.
Half-duplex
NCS
DTS
(Master) (Slave)
LRU LRU
Figure 9-4 Radio Relay
NCS DTS
(Master) (Slave)
9
LRU LAUR
Figure 9-5 Radio Line segment cell
In the 428XL radio transmission protocol, time is shared between

transmission of Master-to-Slave messages and transmission of Slave-
to-Master messages.
Master-to-Slave messages are called Network Control Sequences
(NCS), used for synchronization, zero-time transmission and control.
Slave-to-Master messages are called Data Transfer Sequences (DTS),
used for data retrieval, seismonitor and collecting test results.
Radio frame
(50 ms) (50 ms)
NCS DTS NCS DTS

time
Figure 9-6

January 11, 2011
Theory of operation
Typically, NCS messages are transmitted every 50 ms. In reply to an

NCS message, the LAUR transmits a DTS message (1.5 to 40 ms long).
The LAUR does not transmit its DTS until and unless its clock is locked
onto that of the LRU.
Frequency management
The RF transceiver in the LRU or LAUR uses a single 2-MHz band for
both transmission and reception. That band is selected between 216
MHz and 249 MHz using the “Center Frequency” parameter.
and US communications regulations, the frequency band is
limited to respectively:
• Canada: 217 to 218 MHz and 219 to 220 MHz.
January 01, 2002).
Within the 2-MHz bandwidth, you can choose which channel(s) to use
for NCS and DTS messages, by specifying:
• a Control Channel Frequency for NCS messages,
• one or more Data Channel Frequencies for DTS messages (one for
a radio relay, up to eight for a radio cell).
Note Because the LRU or LAUR uses a half-duplex protocol, you
can choose the same frequency for the Control Channel and
the Data Channel.
The necessary bandwidth (0.2 to 0.8 MHz) for a Data Channel depends
on the expected Data Rate (256, 512, 1024 or 2048 kbps). See the
diagram on page 323.

January 11, 2011
Theory of operation

Center Default channel
Freq. Available channels
Control Freq.
NCS
- 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8

Center F. 0.2 MHz Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
Data Channel Freq. # 1
DTS
256 k
Center F. - 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
Data Channel Freq. # 1 Data Channel Freq. # 2
DTS
512 k 9
Center F. - 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
DTS
1024 k
Center F. - 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
Data Channel Freq. # 1 Data Channel Freq. # 2
DTS
2048 k
Center F. - 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
Figure 9-7 LRU Relay data channels

January 11, 2011
Theory of operation
IMPORTANT
The two LRU units making up a radio relay should have the same
frequency and data rate settings, and the same Cell Number. Each
LAUR should have the same Cell Number and Center Frequency as
its master LRU.
The LAUR uses QPSK modulation @ 256 kbps, or DQPSK modulation
@ 1024 kbps.
The LAUR must have the same frequency and data rate settings as the
associated master LRU.
Center Default channel

Freq. Available channels
Control Freq.
NCS
- 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8

Center F. 0.2 MHz Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
DTS Data Channel Freq. # 1

256 k (QPSK)
Center F. - 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
DTS
1024 k (DQPSK)
Center F. - 0.8 - 0.6 - 0.4 - 0.2 +0.2 +0.4 +0.6 +0.8 Center F.
-1 MHz +1 MHz
Figure 9-8 LAUR data channels

January 11, 2011
Theory of operation

Desensitization
Note that the maximum covered range may be shorter on desensitized
channels (i. e. channels on which the strength of the received signal is
normally decreased by the presence of spurious signals from the 8-MHz
and 33-MHz master oscillators in the LRU). In the table below are the
channels that may be affected by desentization, depending on the
selected Data Rate.
Centre Freq. Data Rate Desensitization

(MHz) (kb/s) affects on channels
256 & 512 NCS & DTS 221.2
221.0
1024 & 2048 DTS 221.1
221.184 221.2
221.3
221.4
256 & 512 NCS & DTS 229.4
229.2
229.376
1024 & 2048 DTS 229.3
229.4
229.5
9
229.6
256 & 512 NCS & DTS 233.3
233.1
1024 & 2048 DTS 233.2
233.309 233.3
233.4
233.5
256 & 512 NCS & DTS 237.6
237.4
1024 & 2048 DTS 237.5
237.568 237.6
237.7
237.8
256 & 512 NCS & DTS 245.7
245.8
245.6
245.760 1024 & 2048 DTS 245.7
245.8
245.9
246.0

January 11, 2011
Typical setups
Typical setups
CAUTION
If you wish to test a radio relay through a wireline link between the
coaxial connectors of two LRUs, use a 70 dB (minimum), 20 W
attenuator.
Attenuator
20 W
70 dB min.
12 V 12 V
Figure 9-9 Test setup
CAUTION
For optimal performance of the
radio link, do not place any
electric device (including
LRU, FDPA428, etc.) on the
same side as the radiating
NO
LRU LRU
elements!
Do not raise any antenna near 12 V 12 V

electric power distribution lines!
The antenna should be at the top

the mast.
YES
8m
8m
LRU
LRU
12 V
Use the whole cable length to keep
12 V clear from the antenna.
Figure 9-10

January 11, 2011
Typical setups

CAUTION
Antenna height is limited to 6.1 metre near airports.
WARNING
LRU antennas should be kept at least 25 m away from any FDU.
LAUR antennas should be kept at least 10 m away from any FDU
Below are typical examples of setups along with the associated

specifications in terms of covered range and transmission capacity.
Basic Radio Relay
7-element Yagi
Performs LAUX and
antenna
radio functions
Wireline to
(Master)
LRU
1 See below
(Slave)
9
recorder truck
LRU
Coax downlead
12 V
Battery 12 V
Figure 9-11 LRU in “Relay” mode
1 Typical performance (Ground-Wave propagation above flat

terrain):
- Range: 24 km, 60 Ch @ 2 ms, Real time.
See CAUTION on page 326.
For the Left/Right and Low/High ports of the LRU, connect as usual
(Left to Right; Low to High).
The LRU with a wireline connection to the recorder truck must be set to
the “Master” mode. See LRU Main Menu (page 351).

January 11, 2011
Typical setups
Basic Radio Line Segment Cell
Omnidirectional
Performs LAUX and antenna
radio functions
2 See below
(Master)
Wireline to LRU Line Line

LAUR
recorder truck (30 channels (30 channels
Coax downlead max) max)
12 V 12 V
Battery
Figure 9-12 Radio Line Segment Cell
2 Typical performance (Ground-Wave propagation above flat

terrain):
- Short Range: 2 km to 3 km, 60 Ch @ 2ms, Real time, using
2.5-m high LRU antenna.
- Medium Range: 3 km to 8 km, 60 Ch @ 2ms, Real time, using
8-m portable LRU antenna mast.
- Long Range: 8 km to 16 km, 60 Ch @ 2ms, Real time, using
30-m LRU antenna mast.
The LRU must be set to the “Master” mode. See LRU Main Menu
(page 351).

January 11, 2011
Typical setups

Radio relay in series connection
To extend the relay range, you can use two radio relays in series
connection as shown below.
Requirements
- At least 300 m between antennas,
- At least 13 MHz frequency separation.
Wireline to
3 See below
recorder truck
(Master) 3 See below
LRU
(Slave) (Master)
12 V
Battery LRU LRU
(Slave)
12 V LRU
12 V
For optimal
performance,
use vertical
polarization in one Line or
12 V 9
cell and horizontal in Transverse
the other. ports
Figure 9-13 Two-mast series setup
3 Typical performance of each radio relay (Ground-Wave

propagation above flat terrain):
Setups with more than two radio relays in series connection have not
been tested yet.

January 11, 2011
Antennas
Antennas
The LRU is used as a point-to-point radio relay, or as a master
transceiver in a radio cell. For a stationary relay, directional antennas
are used, allowing maximum performance and protection from
interference. Where one of the two LRUs involved in a radio relay is
subject to roving (Marine, Shallow-water operation, etc.), or for an
LAUR mounted on a vibrator, omni-directional antennas are more
suitable.
OWFD1.5 antenna
• Electrical specifications
- Single band, 215 to 250 MHz, no tuning required.
- Impedance: 50 .
- VSWR: < 1.5.
- Gain: 0 dBd, tilt 0°.
- Polarization: vertical.
- Pattern: omnidirectional, ripple < 1dB.
- No ground plane required, apart from LAUR
housing (380x380x150, aluminium, lying flat on the
ground).
- Static electricity dissipation to ground.
- Connection: N-type connector, male, modified.
- Max input power: 40 W.
• Physical specifications
- Operating temperature: -40 to + 70°C.
- Height: 1.68 m (66 inches). Withstands 80 km/hr
wind.
- Sealing: IP 66 standard (antenna connected). Salt
spray resistant. Figure 9-14

January 11, 2011
Antennas

Rooftop-mount whip antenna
For an LAUR to record vibrator motion signals, a rooftop-
mount kit is available (Part No. 1C61085838) including:
- a whip antenna (P/N 99-102202);
- an N-type coaxial adapter (P/N 99-100800);
- two N-type coaxial plugs (P/N 5050296);
- a 10-m length of coaxial cable;
- a DC/DC 24/12V, 15A converter (P/N 364000007).
Figure 9-15
N- adapter.
See details in N-plug.
Figure 9-17 on page 332 See details in
Figure 9-18 on
page 333
DC/DC 24/12V
converter
9
Battery
Ground (24V)
LAUR
Figure 9-16
Specifications
- Single band, 215 to 230 MHz, no tuning required.
- Impedance: 50 .
- VSWR: < 1.5:1.
- Gain: 2 dB with a ground plane, otherwise unity.
- Polarization: vertical.
- Pattern: omnidirectional.
- Height: 0.68 m (66 inches).

January 11, 2011
Antennas
Installation
1. Drill a 16 mm hole in the mounting surface (10 mm thick max.).
2. Thread the hex nut onto the bulkhead connector and place the
lockwasher onto the nut.
3. Insert the bulkhead connector into the hole from underneath.
4. Place the O-ring onto the bulkhead connector.
5. Screw the brass mount flush onto the bulkhead connector.
6. Tighten the hex nut in place.
7. Place the gasket onto the brass mount.
8. Screw the antenna base to the brass mount.
Gasket
O-ring
Antenna base
Brass mount
Contact pin
Gasket
O-ring
Brass mount
flush with
bulkhead connector
Rooftop mount bracket
Lockwasher
Hex nut
Bulkhead
connector
Figure 9-17 Bulkhead connector assembly instructions

January 11, 2011
Antennas

A B C D E F G H
Nut Washer Gasket Top hat Insulator Contact pin Insulator Body
4.3
(.169)
1. Strip as shown.
A B C
2. Slide "A" "B" "C" over cable.
5.0
Braiding (.197)
3. Wrap the braiding backward over "C".

C
9
4. Strip the dielectric as shown.
D
Braiding
E
5. Slide "D" between braiding and F
dielectric.
6. Put centre pin "F" and Teflon "E" on
center conductor
7. Solder centre pin in "Y". Y
A G H
8. Slide "G" into connector body "H".

9. Finally screw "A" on the connector
body "H".
Figure 9-18 N-plug assembly instructions (JYEBAO)

January 11, 2011
Antennas
Clamp nut Washer Gasket Braid clamp sleeve Contact pin Body
Stripping a b c
inch 0.394 0.177 0.059
a
mm 10 4.5 1.5
1. Strip the cable as shown (a).
c
2. Slide the clamp nut, washer and
gasket onto the cable.
3. Slide the braid clamp sleeve over
the braid.
4. Fold back the braid and trim off
b
surplus braid.
5. Trim back the inner jacket as shown
(b).
Solder
6. Solder the inner conductor into the

contact pin.
7. Screw the sub-assembly into the

body.
(Recommended torque 44.25 in.lb).
Figure 9-19 N-plug assembly instructions (Radiall)

January 11, 2011
Antennas

Directional antenna
Below are the specifications of a wide-band, 7-element Yagi antenna
available from SERCEL. This directional antenna can be used either
horizontally or vertically.
A 50-ohm impedance coax cable should be used to connect the antenna
to the LRU. To increase the system performance, a low-attenuation,
double-shield coax cable is recommended.
Prior to using the antenna, especially after assembly, a VSWR check
should be done, including the coax cable. The maximum VSWR within
the bandwidth of interest should be less than 1.5:1 to work in good
conditions.
Specifications
• Type: Wideband 7-Element Yagi
(Sercel P/N: 07-820070-001).
• Frequency: 215 to 240 MHz. 9
• Power Gain: 10.5 dBi, Center frequency.
• VSWR: 1.6:1 Max.
1.3:1 Center frequency.
• Front-to-back Ratio: 20.45 dB, Center frequency
• 3-dB beamwidth: E = 48 degrees.
H = 57 degrees
• Feed Impedance: 50 ohm.
• Connector type Type UHF.
• Antenna Boom length: 1.9 m (75").
• Longest Element: 68 cm (26.772").
• Shortest Element: 48 cm (18.898'').
• Weight: 900 g (2 lb).
• Maximum mast OD: 5 cm (2").
January 11, 2011
Antennas
Assembly Instructions
Your 7-Element antenna exhibits full gain and low VSWR across the
entire rated bandwidth. No re-tuning is necessary or desirable.
Before you begin…

Select an assembly area large enough and comfortable to
accommodate overall antenna dimensions. Some simple tools are
required: a tape measure, screwdriver, 9 mm and 12.7 mm nutdrivers.
To avoid damage to antenna components, be aware that most
components need only be moderately hand-tightened with
screwdriver, not to over-torque nuts and damage components.
Thoroughly unpack shipping box and check components and
hardware against the parts list.

January 11, 2011
Antennas

Description Qty Description Qty
Boom 1 #10-24 hex nut 6
Element #1 1 7/8” (2.2 cm) formed aluminum bracket 6
Element #2 1 Aluminum half washer 6
Element #3 1 #10 internal-tooth lockwasher 6
Element #4 1 2” (5.0 cm) I.D. x 4” (10.1 cm) U-bolt 1
Element #5 1 Mast clamp for 2” (5.0 cm) x 4” 1
Element #6 1 (10.1 cm) U-bolt
Element #7 1 Boom clamp for 2” (5.0 cm) x 4” (10.1 1
5/16” (.8 cm) I.D. lockwasher 2 cm) U-bolt
5/16” (.8 cm) I.D. hex nut 2 1” (2.5 cm) plastic cap 2
5/16” (.8 cm) I.D. flat steel washer 2 ½” (1.2 cm) plastic cap 2
#10-24 x 2” (5.0 cm) machine screw 6
Element #1
(Reflector)
Element #2
9
(Driven)
Element #3
Element #4
Element #5
Element #6
Element #7
Figure 9-20

January 11, 2011
Antennas
Reflector Element Assembly

The reflector (longest element) with a number of 1 is mounted at the
U-bolt end of the boom.
Boom
Plastic cap
Figure 9-21
Driven Element Assembly

Orient the coax connector to the U-bolt end of the boom.
Driven
element
Figure 9-22
Director Element assembly

Director elements 3 to 7.

January 11, 2011
Antennas

Mast Mount Mast clamp
Boom clamp
The antenna uses a single
U-bolt and bracket assembly.
The antenna may be mounted
for horizontal or vertical
polarization.
Figure 9-23
For vertical polarization. Mount driven element with the Reddi-

Match rod pointing up. Keep the mast mount bracket on the opposite
side of the boom from the elements.
This will help to minimize pattern distortion from metallic mast.

January 11, 2011
Antenna mast
Antenna mast
A portable 6- to 8-metre telescopic mast is available from SERCEL. It
is easily and rapidly raised (less than half an hour).
MTB1590S list of material

Item Qty Description Reference
1 1 Base plate 11255
2 1 Telescopic mast pillar 75540C5
3 1 Guy collar 11265
4 3 Guy stake coupler 12046C5
5 6 Guy stake 61730C5
6 3 Lower guy cable 63656
7 3 Upper guy cable 63655
8 1 Protection canvas 11481C5
9 1 Accessories bag 15764
10 1 Inventory for accessories bag 31210
11 3 Sand bag 11257C5
12 1 2kg hammer 9981801
13 1 Operator’s manual in English language NM76606
14 2 Cable strap (Velcro) 9981409
15 1 Pin for stake removal 12623C5
8 9 11 12 13
10
7
6 3
5 2
4
1
Figure 9-24
Figure 9-25

January 11, 2011
Antenna mast

Mast installation instructions
Preliminary checks
Proceed with a full inventory of mast parts and check:
• The condition of the guy cables (no cut yards).
• The condition of the stakes and mast sections.
Site selection
• Night and day, avoid the deployment of the mast under or near
electrical power lines
• Check ground stability. The field must be the more stable and the
flattest possible.
Mast preparation
• Place the base plate at the centre
of the deployment site. 9
• Drive the three anchor stakes in
Align
the holes of the base plate.
• Insert the mast on the base plate
and turn the mast half round.
• Install the guy collar (must rest on
top of bigger tube). Figure 9-26 Installation of base plate
• Hook the lower guys on the guy collar, passing the knots through the
slots.
• Unreel the three guy cables in three directions at 120° (use the
directions given by the base plate).
• Drive in the guy stakes through the stake coupler, giving an
inclination to the stakes of about 30°, the point directed to the mast.

January 11, 2011
Antenna mast
• Attach the lower guys to the stake

couplers.
• Attach the top guys to the mast top
section (the knots must fit in the
slots).
• Unreel the top guys but do not
attach them to the anchorage
points.
Figure 9-27 Anchor point
• Install the antenna and its coaxial
cable on the mast.
Mast deployment
The deployment begins with the top section (dia. 40 mm).
• Lift the tubes one by one and lock each section by turning it
clockwise a quarter of turn, holding the next section below it. Make
sure each section is well locked before continuing the deployment.
Figure 9-28 : Locking of elements through bayonets system
• When all sections are secured, attach the guy cables to the stake
couplers.

January 11, 2011
Antenna mast

Mast recovery
• Release the top guy cables.
• Lower the mast, beginning with the lower section.
• Remove the guy cables (top and lower) from the mast top section.
• Remove the guy collar.
• Extract the guy stakes from the ground.
CAUTION: do not slam on stake sides with the hammer.
Crosspin
9
2 Stake
Pull head
2 Twist
(+/- 30°)
1 Hole
Rotate
(+/- 180°)
Guy position
anchor stake
Figure 9-29 : Stake removal procedure
• Reel the guy cables on their support.

• Protect the mast pillar in its canvas.
• Remove the anchor stakes.

January 11, 2011
Antenna mast
• Store all accessories in the bag, proceeding to the inventory and, if

necessary, to the washing of the material.
Troubleshooting
The most important problem on the field might be the locking of an
element, caused by:
• The ice: lightly slam on the mast tubes with the hammer to break the
ice.
• Dust or sand between the tubes: wash the mast. It might be necessary
to dismount the different tubes. This operation is performed easily by
removing the four screws on mast bottom and the protection cap.
When there are one or two sections locked, you can always try to deploy
the mast with the remaining sections.

January 11, 2011
Deployment using the FDPA428

The Field Deployment Aid Terminal for LRU and LAUR
The Field Deployment Aid (FDPA) 428 is a pocket terminal (GoBook
Q200 handheld PC with FDPA428 software) that connects to the XDEV
port of an LRU or LAUR (Figure 9-30). It allows you to set the radio
frequency (RF) communication parameters of the radio unit (LRU or
LAUR), run basic radio tests, set remote units to a sleep or wakeup state
(if LRU master), and/or set marker information (if LAUR).
Note The handheld PC complies with FCC part 15, Canada ICS-003
class B and NMB-003 class B regulations.
Connecting the FDPA428

Connect the right-hand port of the handheld PC (ruggedized port of the
GoBook Q200) to the XDEV socket of the radio unit, using the cable
provided. This connection turns on the power supply in the radio unit.
Note Be sure the LRU or LAUR is disconnected from the 428XL
9
network (no radio or wireline link).
Note A 12 VDC voltage should be fed to one of the 12 VDC inputs
of the radio unit.
Note The GoBook operates from its built-in rechargeable battery. For
information about batteries in the GoBook, see GoBook Q200
(page 216).

January 11, 2011
GoBook
XDEV Port
12 VDC
LAUR
12 VDC
XDEV Port
LRU
12 VDC
Figure 9-30 FDPA428 with LRU or LAUR
IMPORTANT
Be sure the handheld PC’s built-in batteries are properly charged;
otherwise, it will not be able to turn on the power supply in the radio
unit.

January 11, 2011

Getting Started
To install FDPA428 software on

the handheld PC, see Installing
GoBook PC applications
(page 216).
On a GoBook Q200, select the
FDPA428 icon from the Start
menu as shown in Figure 9-31.
This selection launches the

FDPA428 application. The Sercel
FDPA splash screen (Figure 9-32)
briefly appears, followed by the
serial communication screen
(Figure 9-33). Figure 9-31 Launching the FDPA428
Application 9
Figure 9-32 Splash Screen

January 11, 2011
Figure 9-33 Serial Communication Screen
Serial Menu
When the radio unit is connected,
the operating system boots up,
displaying a succession of
messages (see Figure 9-34). Notice
that the Serial Port Status LED
temporarily turns yellow while the
radio unit is booting.
Figure 9-34 Booting Up

January 11, 2011

If no serial information is received
within 15 seconds, an error
message appears, prompting the
user to Retry or Cancel (Figure 9-
35). Cancelling closes the
FDPA428 application. Retrying
allows the user more time to power
on or reconnect the radio unit.
Figure 9-35 No Serial Communication

Found
License Menu
Note Every time you start the

9
FDPA428, the program
reads license information
from a file (key.dat) saved
on the hard disk. If for any
reason the key.dat file has
been deleted or the license
information is incorrect,
the Enter License screen
appears (Figure 9-36):
If this screen appears, enter the
license code that came with your
FDPA428 and click OK. If you
have any difficulty recovering the Figure 9-36 Enter License Screen
code, you can get it again from
SERCEL; you simply have to supply the Sercel Serial Number
displayed on the GoBook.

January 11, 2011
Note If you restart the FDPA428 with a radio unit already connected,
a message may appear asking you to unplug the computer and
plug it back. (Connect the FDPA to the radio unit. If already
connected, disconnect and reconnect).
Note If the boot program fails, unplug the power cord from the radio
unit and then plug it back in.
Power Up Menu
After the boot is completed successfully, the radio unit generates a
POWER UP command containing information about the identity of the
radio unit, its power supply voltage, and the results from its self-tests. If
any self-test fails, additional error information displays. Figure 9-37
shows examples of the results from POWER UP from an LRU and
LAUR. Click OK to close the screen. Click Refresh to re-retrieve the
POWER UP information, notably the battery level.
Figure 9-37 Power Up Results
IMPORTANT
See Set Radio Area on page 361 to select the appropriate frequency
band for compliance with local regulations.

January 11, 2011

LRU Main Menu
After the POWER UP has completed and the FDPA428 is connected to
an LRU, the LRU main menu (Figure 9-38) appears. If the FDPA428 is
connected to an LAUR, go to LAUR Main Menu on page 363.
Note that an LRU begins in Slave mode. If the Master mode is desired
to control another LRU in Relay mode (see Figure 9-11 on page 327) or
LAURs in Cell mode (see Figure 9-12 on page 328), click the Set
Master button.
Figure 9-38 LRU Main Menu
From the main menu, you can change the LRU RF parameters by
clicking the Set Parameters button and entering information in the Set
Parameters menu (see Figure 9-39 on page 352).
Other Main Menu Screens

Clicking the Utility tab brings up the Utility screen described in The
Utility Menu on page 358. The Wakeup/Sleep tab is enabled if this is
an LRU Master. Clicking this tab brings up the Wakeup/Sleep screen
described on The Wakeup/Sleep Menu on page 362.

January 11, 2011
The LRU Set Parameters Menu

An LRU can be set up to be in either Relay mode or Cell mode (Figure 9-
39). In Relay mode, the LRU is either a Master unit communicating to
an LRU Slave unit, or a Slave unit communicating to an LRU Master
unit. No other radio units are allowed. In Cell mode, the LRU is a
Master unit communicating to a cell of LAURs.
Figure 9-39 LRU Set Parameters Menu
In either Relay or Cell mode, the User option in the Advanced Params
menu allows the user to modify additional parameters. The Default
option displays these parameters, but does not allow the user to change
them (Figure 9-40 and Figure 9-41).

January 11, 2011

Figure 9-40 Relay Mode Frequency Display
Figure 9-41 Cell Mode Frequency Display
Click Flash to permanently save the RF parameters into non-volatile

memory (flash). Thus, if the LRU is powered off and on again, the latest
modifications are recalled. A popup question appears to confirm this

January 11, 2011
action, as shown in Figure 9-42. Click Yes to continue with the Flash
operation. Click No to abort this operation. If this LRU is a Master
(Relay or Cell Mode), the confirmation button and question are “Flash
LRU Cell.” Clicking this button and confirming the popup question
saves the RF parameters in the Master LRU, as well as all LAURs
currently linked in this radio cell.
Figure 9-42 Confirming Flash LRU
Click OK to temporarily save the parameters to local memory. That is,

the LRU will use the modified parameters, but these parameters are not
stored into flash. The next time the LRU is powered off and on again,
the current modifications are lost, and the previously stored RF
information in flash will be used.
Click Cancel to close this screen and not save any modifications made.

January 11, 2011

LRU Parameters
See also Theory of operation (page 321).
Cell Number
(Allowable range 1 to 31). You must enter a distinct Cell Number for
each LRU radio relay or cell in the 428XL network so that it can be
identified by the 428XL GUI. That is, the two LRUs (Master and Slave)
in a radio relay must have the same Cell Number that is different from
any other Cell Number used in the 428XL network. Likewise, all radio
units in a radio cell (LRU Master and LAURs) must have the same Cell
Number, but that Cell Number must be different from any other Cell
Number used in the 428XL network.
Center Frequency
(Allowable range 216.0 to 249.0 MHz, in 0.1-MHz steps). Center
frequency of the 2-MHz band within which to choose the transmission
channels for the radio relay or cell, depending on the frequencies used 9
by other radio relays or cells and on the desired data rate. See Figure 9-
7 on page 323.
Data Rate
(Available options: 256, 512, 1024, 2048 kbps for Radio Relay, 256
kbps for Radio Cell).
• For a radio relay, the 512 and 2048 options require two data
transmission channels. See Figure 9-7 on page 323.
• For a radio cell, the 256 kbps option requires up to 8 data
transmission channels. See Figure 9-8 on page 324.
TX Power Level
(Available options: Standard, Low; defaults to Standard).
• Low: Transmit power is 1 mW (0 dBm) for all radio units in this cell.
This option is helpful for tests over a short range.

January 11, 2011
• Standard: Transmit power is 6 W (38 dBm) for all radio units in this
cell. For standard RF transmission conditions.
Number of Subframes
(Future release, available options: 1, 2 or 4.).
Subframe Number
(Future release, available options: 1 to the value specified for the “Nb
of Radio Subframes.”).
Privacy Code
(Available options: 0 to 7). Address number you assign to your crew in
order to distinguish it from any other crew with radio units in the
vicinity.
Control Frequency (Relay Mode Only)

(Adjustable from Center Freq –0.8 to Center Freq +0.8 MHz in 0.2-
MHz steps; defaults to Center Freq). Center frequency of the 0.2-MHz
channel is used to transmit network control messages (NCS).
Example: if Center Freq = 218 MHz, the list of available Control
frequencies are 217.2, 217.4, 217.6, 217.8, 218.0, 218.2, 218.4, 218.6,
218.8 MHz. See Figure 9-7 on page 323.
Data Channel #1 Frequency (Relay Mode Only)

Center frequency of the 0.2-MHz channel is used to transmit data
retrieval messages (DTS) (Table 9-1). See Figure 9-7 on page 323.
Table 9-1 Data Channel #1 Frequency
Data Rate 256 512 1024 2048

Data From From From From
Channel #1 Center Freq 0.8 Center Freq 0.8 Center Freq 0.5 Center Freq 0.5
Freq to Center Freq +0.8 to Center Freq +0.8 to Center Freq +0.5 to Center Freq +0.5
in 0.2 MHz steps in 0.2 MHz steps in 0.2 MHz steps in 0.2 MHz steps
Default Center Freq Center Freq Center Freq Center Freq
+ 0.1 MHz –0.3 MHz

January 11, 2011

Data Channel #2 Frequency (Relay Mode only)
Center frequency of the second 0.2-MHz channel is used to transmit
data retrieval messages (DTS), depending on the selected data rate
(Table 9-2). See Figure 9-7 on page 323.
Table 9-2 Data Channel #2 Frequency
Data Rate 256 512 1024 2048
Data Not required From Center Freq 0.8 Not required From Center Freq 0.5
Channel #2 to Center Freq +0.8 in to Center Freq +0.5 in
Freq 0.2 MHz steps 0.2 MHz steps
Default Center Freq +0.2 MHz Center Freq +0.3 MHz
Where Data Channel #2 Freq is required, the system checks that the
difference between Data Channel #1 Freq and Data Channel #2 Freq is
at least 0.2 MHz at 512 kbits/s and 0.8 MHz at 2048 kbits/s.
and U.S. communications regulations, the frequency band is
limited to 9
• Canada: 217 to 218 MHz and 219 to 220 MHz
January 01, 2002).
Frequency (Cell Mode Only)

List of frequencies used to transmit control messages (NCS) from the
LRU to LAURs or transmit data retrieval messages (DTS) from LAURs
back to the LRU. See Figure 9-8 on page 324.
Control (Cell Mode Only)

Selection that specifies which one frequency is to be used as the control
frequency (NCS). This frequency is used to send messages from the
LRU to the LAURs. See Figure 9-8 on page 324.

January 11, 2011
Data (Cell Mode Only)

Selection(s) that specify which frequencies (maximum of eight) are to
be used to transmit data retrieval messages (DTS) from LAURs back to
the LRU.
The Utility Menu

On the main menu, clicking the Utility tab (Figure 9-43) brings up a
screen that allows the user to start a Loop Test (see The LRU Loop Test
Menu on page 359), Set Radio Area (see Set Radio Area on page 361),
or Run RF Spectrum (future button, not shown).
Figure 9-43 Utility Menu

January 11, 2011

The LRU Loop Test Menu
This menu lets you check RF communications between the attached
LRU and any distant radio unit. If communications are established with
a distant radio unit, the Loop test returns the attenuation of the signal (in
dB) and rate of retries.
If the LRU is a Master, a list of LAURs and Slave LRU displays in the
Remote Unit # selection box. If no LAUR or Slave LRU has been
detected, the message “Waiting for Remote Unit” displays. Select the
desired Remote Unit and click the Start button to initiate the Loop test.
You can abort the Loop test by clicking Stop. See Figure 9-44 and
Figure 9-45 on page 360.
If the LRU is a Slave, click the Start button to initiate the Loop test and
Stop to abort it. If communications can be established with the master
LRU, the Loop test returns the identification of the Master LRU, the
attenuation of the signal (in dB), and the rate of retries.
The Reset button resets the information displayed. The Close button
closes this menu. 9
Figure 9-44 Starting an LRU Loop Test

January 11, 2011
Figure 9-45 LRU Loop Test
IMPORTANT
The Loop test is not possible on a distant radio unit that is in Sleep
mode. To cancel the Sleep mode, disconnect the radio unit and connect
it back or wake up the radio unit with the Individual Wakeup button (see
The Wakeup/Sleep Menu on page 362).

January 11, 2011

Set Radio Area
Use this menu to choose the appropriate frequency band for compliance
with the local regulations of the country in which the radio unit is to be
used (Figure 9-46):
• Canada: 217 to 218 MHz and 219 to 220 MHz
January 01, 2002).
• Other: 215 to 250 MHz
Figure 9-46 Set Radio Area Menu

January 11, 2011
The Wakeup/Sleep Menu

If the LRU is in Master mode, the Wakeup/Sleep tab is enabled and
allows the user to put remote radio units into sleep or wakeup states
(Figure 9-47). This menu allows the user to put a whole radio cell or
individual LAURs to sleep and then wake them back up again.
When LAURs are detected by the LRU, they are put in the Individual
Sleep list. The user may select one of the LAURs displayed in this list
and then click the Individual Sleep button to put this one LAUR to
sleep. This LAUR is then added to the Individual Wakeup list.
Likewise, if an LAUR is asleep, the user may click the Individual
Wakeup button to wake up this one LAUR.
To put a whole radio cell to sleep, the user may click the Cell Sleep
button. To wake up the radio cell, click the Cell Wakeup button.
Note The Individual Sleep and Cell Sleep methods cannot be used
together. All cells in Individual Sleep should be woken up
before Cell Sleep can be used.
Figure 9-47 Wakeup/Sleep Menu

January 11, 2011

LAUR Main Menu
After the POWER UP has completed and the FDPA428 is connected to
an LAUR, the main LAUR menu appears (Figure 9-48). If the FDPA428
is connected to an LRU, go to LRU Main Menu on page 351.
9
Figure 9-48 LAUR Main Menu
From the main menu, you can change the LAUR RF parameters by
clicking the Set Parameters button and entering information in the Set
Parameters menu. (See The LAUR Set Parameters Menu on page 364).
Specific to the LAUR is marker information—Receiver Line and
Receiver Point. On startup, the existing marker information is retrieved
from the LAUR and displayed on the main menu. To change this
information, modify the Receiver Line and Point numbers and click the
Set Marker button. When the LAUR is reconnected to the 428XL
network, this information is reported back to the 428XL GUI.
Like the main menu for LRU, the Utility tab contains Loop Test and
Set Radio Area buttons (see Figure 9-43 on page 358). Click these
buttons to bring up the associated menus.

January 11, 2011
The LAUR Set Parameters Menu

The LAUR Set Parameters menu (Figure 9-49) contains many of the
same parameters as for the LRU. See LRU Parameters on page 355 for
details on these parameters.
Note An LAUR is a slave of a master LRU that is configured in Cell
mode. The Cell Number and Center Frequency must be the
same as the master LRU.
Figure 9-49 LAUR Set Parameters Menu
Click Flash to permanently save the RF parameters into non-volatile

memory (flash). Thus, if the LAUR is powered off and on again, the
latest modifications are recalled. A popup question appears to confirm
this action, as seen in Figure 9-50. Click Yes to continue with the Flash
procedure. Click No to abort this procedure.

January 11, 2011

Figure 9-50 Confirming Flash LAUR
Click OK to temporarily save the parameters to local memory. That is,

the LAUR will use the modified parameters, but these parameters are
not stored into flash. The next time the LAUR is powered off and on 9
again, the current modifications are lost, and the previously stored RF
information in flash will be used.
Click Cancel to close this screen and not save any modifications made.

January 11, 2011
The LAUR Loop Test Menu

This menu lets you check RF communications between the attached
LAUR and the master LRU (Figure 9-51). If communications are
established with the master LRU, the Loop test returns the identification
of the Master LRU, the attenuation of the signal (in dB), and the rate of
retries. Click the Start button to initiate the Loop test, Stop to abort it.
Figure 9-51 LAUR Loop Test Menu

January 11, 2011

Main Menu Pulldown Items
Figure 9-52 shows the Main Menu pulldown items.
Figure 9-52 Main Menu Pulldown Items

9
Click Setup and then Show Power Up to redisplay the last POWER
UP results or to retrieve POWER UP results again. One purpose for this
selection would be to re-examine the battery level of the connected unit.
Click Setup and then Get Marker to get the Receiver Line and Point
information from an LAUR. Normally, this function is not used because
the Get Marker function is automatically run on startup.
Click Setup and then Set Password to display the License menu to
update the license with a newer one.
Click Help and then About to display the FDPA428 version currently
running on this GoBook.

January 11, 2011
Closing the FDPA428 Application

To close the FDPA428 application, either click the X in the upper right
corner of the screen or click Setup and then Quit from the menu bar.
The user is prompted to confirm whether the application should be
closed, as shown in Figure 9-53.
Figure 9-53 FDPA428 Close

January 11, 2011
Chapter
This chapter describes the LLX400 laser link and provides

the necessary instructions to implement it as a wireless link
in an 8 or 16 Mbps Line or a 100 Mbps Transverse. It
includes the following sections:
• Introduction (page 370)

• Installation (page 372)
• Specifications (page 379)

January 11, 2011
Introduction
Introduction
The LLX400 comes complete with two laser transceivers, each
associated with an LXIU-400 interface unit.
LXIU Laser
transceiver
Figure 10-1 LLX400
The LLX400 is a wireless

bridge relying on infrared
laser transceivers, therefore
not requiring any frequency
licensing. It can be used to
relay the data from an 8 or
16 Mbps Line or a 100 Mbps
Transverse, across a river or a
canyon for instance, over
ranges from 200 m to 3000 m
in clear conditions.
At either end of the link, each
laser unit is equipped with Figure 10-2 TereScope laser transceiver
both a transmitter and a

receiver (TereScope laser transceiver), allowing full duplex
communications.
WARNING
The TereScope transceiver is designed, built, and tested to be eye safe,
even if the output beams are viewed directly, provided that no
magnifying optics are used.
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
(BINOCULARS OR TELESCOPES).

January 11, 2011
LLX400 laser link
Introduction

Figure 10-3 LXIU-400
The laser unit connects to the telemetry Line or Transverse through an

LXIU-400 (Laser Transceiver Interface Unit) secured to the laser
transceiver, used for interfacing the laser transceiver with an LAUL or
LAUX.
When inserted in a Line, the LLX400 also allows remote control of the
power supply for the part of spread located on the other side of the
wireless link.
10
In a Transverse, the power to the associated LAUX is turned on as you
connect the red plug of the cord between the LXIU and the LAUX.

January 11, 2011
Installation
Installation
The LXIU
The LXIU is used as an electric/optic

interface between an LAUX or LAUL
(408 or 428) and the laser unit. The
interface is fitted with an optical Data rate
transmitter and an optical receiver selector
operating at 1310 nm and matching
with the laser system used.
The LXIU relays the battery voltage to
the laser transceiver electronics.
A switch is used to choose the data
rate, depending on whether the LXIU
is attached to a Line (8 or 16 Mbps) or
a Transverse (100 Mbps). Figure 10-4
The laser link connects to the

telemetry Line (8 or 16 Mbps) or
Transverse (100 Mbps) through a
special 2-metre jumper cable
(SRHRF, P/N 512500270) equipped
12 VDC
with a red FM4 plug at one end, and a 512500270

black one at the other end.
Ground
If you are installing the LXIU in a To LAUX-428
Transverse, you have to connect the (or LAUL-428)
red FM4 plug to the LAUX-428, and Figure 10-5

the black plug to the LXIU (because in
the red plug are magnets that tell the
LAUX that an LXIU is attached to it and it must turn on the power to
that LXIU). See Figure 10-6 on page 373.

January 11, 2011
LLX400 laser link
Installation

Black FM4 plug
Laser
transceiver
Red FM4 plug
SRHRF cable (2 m)
LAUX-428
FDU Link
12 V
battery
Figure 10-6 Connecting the LXIU-400 to a Transverse.
Note The LLX is always placed close to an LAUX or LAUL and so

does not need a battery monitoring circuitry of its own. It is
recommended to use the same battery for the LLX and the
adjacent LAUX or LAUL, so as to benefit from the battery
10
monitoring function of that LAUX or LAUL for the laser link.
Note For protection from lightning, use the ground cord provided to
connect the grounding wing nut of the LXIU-400 box to the
grounding wing nut of the LAUX-428 (itself to be connected to
a grounding stake).
The laser unit

The TereScope laser unit comes complete with a tripod stand, four 3/8”
mounting screws, and “Manuals and User Guides” CD-ROM from the
manufacturer.
The laser unit operates from 12 VDC supplied through the LXIU. A
standard battery can be used.

January 11, 2011
Installation
The DIP Switches on the rear panel should be set as shown in Figure 10-
7 on page 374. If you need to change DIP switch settings, undo the four
screws securing the back door (two on each side).
Laser
transceiver
Dip Switch
(set to Open Protocol: Dip Switch
1, 2, 3 OFF; 4 ON) (All OFF)
12 VDC from
LXIU
Tx and RX
Fibre Optic ports
Alignment
Tx and RX Device
Fibre Optic ports
LXIU
Figure 10-7 Rear view
For details, see Setting up an LLX400 laser link (page 375).

January 11, 2011
LLX400 laser link
Installation

Setting up an LLX400 laser link
Line of sight
The two mounting sites for implementing an LLX400 laser link must be
within a clear sight of each other.
Orientation
Avoid as far as possible any link path orientation that could cause direct
sunlight to saturate the airlink receiver and give rise to outages.
Aiming
For the point-to-point connection to work properly, the orientation face
to face of both “transceiving” ends of the link should be done as
accurate as possible (the beam must be positioned symmetrically all
around the remote laser transceiver).
The laser transceiver will not be able to achieve the maximum range
unless it is protected from vibrations (it must be protected from twists
of 1 mrad). The whole setup must be sheltered against strong winds. 10
The alignment procedure below makes use of the telescope and Optical
Power display on the rear panel (see Figure 10-9 on page 377). The
telescope is fitted with an infrared filter and so does not pose any risk of
injury to the operator’s eyes.
Since this alignment procedure does not require any LAUL or LAUX to
be present, aiming can be adjusted before deploying the Line or
Transverse. Only the power supply is required.
WARNING
On the back side of the Alignment Device (Figure 10-8 on page 376) are
two knobs (B and C) used for horizontal and vertical fine alignment. Do
not turn these knobs when the coarse alignment screws (J, L, E) are
locked, as this may damage the fine alignment mechanism.

January 11, 2011
Installation
Coarse alignment
Coarse aiming is firstly done by rotating the tripod stand to the right or
left, and adjusting the height of its legs, then using the following
procedure:
1. Be sure the power to the LXIU is connected and the green Power
indicator on the rear panel of the laser transceiver is on.
2. Loosen all screws (J, L, E).
3. Screws E should be positioned in the middle of the slots, and the
Red Ref. point (M) positioned so that its distance from the
movement range end closer to the front panel is about 1/3 the total
movement range.
Do not touch these screws
J(Front_Left)
J(Back_Left)
J(Front_Right)
J(Back_Right)
Red Ref
E(Front_Left) point
Front
M (far side)
E(Back_Left)
B
C
E(Front_Right)
Four mounting
screws (used to
fasten to tripod
stand) E(Back_Right)
Figure 10-8 Alignment Device
4. Rotate the transceiver left and right, up and down, holding it by

the box and looking through the telescope until you can see the

January 11, 2011
LLX400 laser link
Installation

opposite site. You may have to clean the lens of the laser unit with
a dry cloth (if dew is forming on the lens).
5. If it is difficult to see the opposite site due to the distance or haze,
slowly rotate the transceiver to the right and to the left, up and
down, until the Optical Power display (see Figure 10-9 on
page 377) reads at least 20 to 30.
6. Tighten screw L and then follow the fine alignment procedure
below.
Fine alignment
7. Loosen screws J and E.
8. Use the alignment knobs B & C to place the opposite Tranceiver
exactly in the center of the target of the telescope. Adjust the
knobs until the reading on the Optical Power display is
maximum.
9. Tighten all screws.
L1, L2, L3
10
Air Rx
Flag Optical Power
readout
Fiber Optic Main power

Flag supply Flag
Telescope
Figure 10-9 Rear panel indicators
When the LAUL or LAUX at either end of the link is connected and the
telemetry line is On, the Fiber Optic Rx Flag indicator and red L1, L2,
January 11, 2011
Installation
L3 Laser Status lights indicate that the laser transmitter is On. If the
two laser units are properly aligned, the green Air Rx Flag indicator
should also light up. The Optical Power display reading should
between 200 and 1000, depending on the length of the laser link.

January 11, 2011
LLX400 laser link
Specifications

Specifications
Laser transceiver (Terescope)
Minimum range 200 m

Maximum range (clear conditions, tripod stand
3000 m
protected from vibrations)
Laser wavelength 830 – 860 nm
Total output power (typical) 21 mW
Size (L x W x H), mm 790x390x556
Weight, not including tripod stand 32 kg
Power supply
• From a 12 V battery.
• Power required for each unit:
- LLX (Terescope 4000): 20 W.
- LAUX (or LAUL), including FDU link: 15 W.
• Total power drain from the 12 V battery: about 35 W.
10
Temperature
• Operating: -40°C to +60°C.
• Storage: -40°C to +70°C.

January 11, 2011
Specifications

January 11, 2011
Chapter
This chapter includes the following sections:

• Connections (page 384)
• Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge (page 387)
• Moving an Ethernet Radio Bridge (page 391)
• Arming the Installation Agent (page 392)
• Changing the IP address (page 395)
• Advanced settings (page 397)
• Licence and frequency regulations (page 399)
• Maintenance (page 400)

January 11, 2011
Overview
Overview
The 428 Ethernet Radio Bridge is a 75 Mbps wireless datalink that can
be used in place of a 428XL Transverse cable (each end connects to the
Transverse port of an LAUX-428, or an LCI-428). It can be upgraded to
150 Mbps by software (subject to a licence fee).
Either end includes:
- an interface box developed by SERCEL (428 Ethernet Radio Bridge
box), with a carrying backpack.
- a 5.4 GHz antenna unit (ODU) equipped with a lightning protection
box,
- a GPS receiver (AcuTime Gold2000),
- a tripod stand.
A 12 V battery is required at either end (each can use the same battery
as the LAUX-428 it is attached to).
GPS
receiver
GPS cord
P/N 1L66085197
RF bridge
antenna 428 Ethernet Radio Bridge interface
(ODU) box (later-design)
Lightning
protection
unit
Figure 11-1 Later-design 428 Ethernet Radio Bridge

January 11, 2011
Ethernet Radio Bridge
Overview

The maximum range of the wireless link, typically around 3 km (line of
sight), is dependent on RF transmission conditions and local RF
communications regulations. The least stringent RF communications
regulations allow longer maximum ranges (up to 40 km) to be achieved.
See Licence and frequency regulations (page 399).
11
Note that a GPS receiver is required in the recording truck too, to be
connected to the XDEV2 port of the LCI-428, using the specific cable
supplied (10 m max., P/N 1L13087062).
The Ethernet Radio Bridge interface box comes in two versions which
are only different in size (the later-design box is smaller).
Figure 11-2 Early-design 428 Ethernet Radio Bridge interface box

January 11, 2011
Connections
Connections
Black Two 12 VDC
plug inlets allow for
Connect battery
Red plug hot-swapping
to LAUX
Ground
stake
XDEV2
GPS
receiver
RF bridge
Transverse antenna
12 V
battery (1) (ODU)
(1 m max.)
Figure 11-3 Connecting a later-design box
Note (1): A 72 Ahr (minimum) battery is recommended (the minimum

power consumption is typically 70 W).
Transverse
from recorder
Master (2) Slave
))) (((
LAUX
Distant
Ethernet Radio Ground (3) Transverse
Bridge box
(see detail above)
Figure 11-4 Recommended setup

January 11, 2011
Connections

Note (2): Each end is configured as “Master” or “Slave” prior to
shipment from SERCEL and tagged accordingly so that you can
distinguish between the two. Preferably connect the “Master” end to the
wireline Transverse leg attached to the recorder, as this will allow you
to use advanced frequency channel control features.
11
Note (3):Connect the lightning
protection unit to a separate ground Ground
stake. stake
Figure 11-5
In order to prevent the tripod stand from toppling in the event of wind
gusts, it is recommended to use guy ropes and adequate anchor points
to hold it firmly in place.

January 11, 2011
Connections
Connect Ground Black

Red plug RF plug
bridge stake
to LAUX
antenna
GPS
receiver
Transverse
12 V
battery (1)
(1 m max.)
Figure 11-6 Connecting an early-design box
Transverse
from recorder
Master (2) Slave
))) (((
LAUX
Ethernet Radio Distant

Bridge box Ground (3) Transverse
(see detail above)
Figure 11-7
Note (1): A 72 Ahr (minimum) battery is recommended (the minimum

power consumption is typically 70 W).

January 11, 2011
Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge

Prerequistites: If you want to use two or more Ethernet Radio Bridges
in your crew, first see Changing the IP address (page 395). 11
To install an Ethernet Radio Bridge, do the following:
1. Connect both ends of the Ethernet bridge as shown above (see
Overview on page 382). After power is applied, point each antenna
to the other end of the wireless link. An audible signal should
sound, intended for assisting the installer in pointing the antenna
to the other end. If no signal is heard, make sure the Installation
Agent is “Armed” (see Arming the Installation Agent on page 392).
At both ends, adjust the direction of the antenna for the highest
pitch of the audible tone, until the tone is continuous.
2. In the Line main window, go to Field On.
3. Launch the Web browser on the server computer. In its address
field, type the IP address of the slave Ethernet Radio Bridge box
(http://172.30.210.3 by default). This should open the following
page:
Figure 11-8
NOTE: you cannot access the Web server if the bridge is located in a
secondary Transverse. Also, the default address may not work (if you

January 11, 2011
are using two or more Ethernet Radio Bridges, different addresses are
required). See Changing the IP address (page 395).
With the antennas precisely pointing to each other, the Wireless Link
Status in the Home page should go to Up (with a green background).
Figure 11-9
4. Select “System Administration” from the left-hand side menu.

Click on Login.
Figure 11-10
5. Open the Installation Wizard page. Click on Disarm

Installation Agent.

January 11, 2011

11
Figure 11-11
6. Open the Configuration page.
Figure 11-12
- Be sure the Ethernet Capped Max Wireless Speed option is

Enabled.
- From the Max Receive Modulation Mode option button, select
“256 QAM 0.81”.
- Click Submit Updated System Configuration.

January 11, 2011
7. Likewise, disarm the Installation Agent at the other end of the

bridge and check the configuration (type the other IP address in
the address field and then repeat steps 5 and 6).
8. Open the Status page.
Figure 11-13
Of particular interest is the “Link Capacity”, especially if the wireless

link has many traces to convey. The capacity depends on the quality of
the datalink, which may be affected by the link length, RF interferences,
etc.

January 11, 2011
Moving an Ethernet Radio Bridge

Moving an Ethernet Radio Bridge
Whenever you want to move an Ethernet Radio Bridge to another place,
first you must use the “Installation Wizard” menu to enable the
“Installation Tones” and return each end of the wireless link to the
11
“Armed” mode. As a result, the “Installation Tones” will be enabled
by default when you next power on the radio bridge, making it easier to
point each antenna to the other end accurately. See Arming the
Installation Agent (page 392).
WARNING
After moving the radio bridge and installing it again, be sure to return it
to the “Disarmed” mode, or else you will not get the maximum “Link
Capacity”. See Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge (page 387).

January 11, 2011
Arming the Installation Agent

Prior to moving an Ethernet Radio Bridge to another place, use the
procedure below to return each end of the wireless link to the “Armed”
mode. This will make it easier to point each antenna to the other end
accurately when you next power on the radio bridge.
1. Launch the Web browser on the server computer. In its address
field, type the IP address of the Ethernet Radio Bridge box
(172.30.210.2 or 172.30.210.3 by default).
- If the link status is “Up”, e. g. if you are arming the Installation
Agent prior to moving the Ethernet Radio Bridge to another
place, arm the farthest (slave) end first (172.30.210.3 by
default).
- You cannot connect to the farthest end unless the antennas are
properly oriented. In that case, momentarily connect it to the
wireline Transverse leg attached to the recorder (or direct to the
LCI-428).
- Also, the default address may not work (if you are using two or
more Ethernet Radio Bridges). See Changing the IP address
(page 395).
2. Select “System Administration” from the left-hand side menu.
Click on Login.
Figure 11-14

January 11, 2011

3. Open the Installation Wizard.
11
Figure 11-15
- Click Next.
4. Set the Installation Tones option to Enabled.
Figure 11-16

January 11, 2011
- Click Next.
Figure 11-17
5. Click “Confirm Configuration, Arm Installation Agent and

Reboot”.
As a result the Install Armed status in the Home page should go
to “Armed”.
Figure 11-18
6. Likewise, arm the Installation Agent at the other end of the bridge
(type the other IP address in the address field and then repeat the
above steps).
WARNING
After moving the radio bridge and installing it again, you will have to
return it to the “Disarmed” mode, or else you will not get the maximum
“Link Capacity”. See Installing the Ethernet Radio Bridge (page 387).

January 11, 2011
Changing the IP address

If you want to use one more Ethernet Radio Bridges in your crew, you
have to increment the IP address of each wireless unit (the default
address is 172.30.210.2 or 172.30.210.3). For example you can use
11
172.30.210.4 or 172.30.210.5 for the second bridge, and so on. To do
that:
- Connect either of the 428 Ethernet Radio Bridge interfaces
direct to the LCI-428 (XDEV2 port);
- Launch the Web browser. In its address field, type the default IP
address of the box (172.30.210.2 or 172.30.210.3);
- Select the LAN Configuration menu;
Figure 11-19
- Change the IP address;

- Click Submit Updated System Configuration.

January 11, 2011
- Place a tag mentioning the new address on the box.

- Likewise, change the IP address of the other unit.

January 11, 2011
Advanced settings

Advanced settings
The system automatically finds and selects a frequency channel for the
datalink, but you can connect to the Master unit and use the “Spectrum
Management” menu to choose which channels to enable or disable.
11
Frequency channel
displayed in green if OK
Figure 11-20
The frequency channel is displayed in green if the datalink quality is

correct (otherwise orange or red).

January 11, 2011
Advanced settings
Padlock meaning that

the frequency
channel is disabled
Figure 11-21
You can enable/disable a frequency channel by clicking on it. To save

your changes, click “Submit configuration changes”.

January 11, 2011
Licence and frequency regulations

Licence and frequency regulations
The MOTOROLA licence key controls the maximum transmission
power for compliance with the frequency regulations applicable in the
country for which it was generated. To update the licence key for
11
another country, visit
http://www.motorolaptp.com/support/licensekey.php

January 11, 2011
Maintenance
Maintenance
In the event of a malfunction, first check the performance of each
428-ERB interface box as follows:
- Connect either of the 428 Ethernet Radio Bridge interfaces
direct to the LCI-428 (XDEV2 port);
- Launch the Web browser. In its address field, type the default IP
address of the box (172.30.210.2 or 172.30.210.3) or any other
address you may have assigned to the box. If you can access the
Web server (Figure 11-22) then this means the interface box is in
good repair. Check the other box the same way.
Figure 11-22
If none of the interface boxes is at fault, successively replace the ODU

antenna or lightning protection box or GPS receiver by a spare one, on
either side of the bridge, until you identify the faulty unit. None of these
units has any repairable parts (replace the whole unit if at fault).

January 11, 2011
Chapter
In this chapter:
• LCI-428 (page 402)

• 428-Lite Break-Out Box (page 407)
• Field electronics (page 409)
• Cables (page 415)

January 11, 2011
LCI-428
LCI-428
BLASTER
LCI-428 BLEN1 BLASTER1

BL CR0 CR0_B1
p
BL CR1 CR1_B1
S
BLEN1 FO_B1
T
S_FO S_FO1
FO1B1
M
BLEN1 FO2B1
N
_EGOINB1 Vcc
EGOIN1B1 5 to 12 V
EXT_GO
470 ohm H
_EGOINB2 External
EGOIN2B1 GO
From BLASTER 2 J
GND
BLEN1
_TBINB1 Vcc
S_TB_PLUGS TBIN1B1
470 ohm K
_TBINB2 TB
TBIN2B1
From BLASTER 2 L
S_TB S_TBOUT1
U
BLEN1
CLKO1B1
A
PILOT_CLK PLL CLKOUT17.9
17.9 MHz
CLKO2B1
B
TXB1
C
RXB1
D
BLEN1
_RDYINB1 Vcc
EXT_RDY
RDYIN1B1
RDYEN 470 ohm F
_RDYINB2
From BLASTER 2
G
RDYIN2B1
RDYENB2
From BLASTER 2
RDYENB1
Vcc
E
Jumper
in cable
GNDB1 R
Figure 12-1 Blaster1 connector

January 11, 2011
Connectors and cables
LCI-428

LCI-428 BLEN2 BLASTER 2
BL CR0 CR0_B2
p
BL CR1 CR1_B2
S
BLEN2 FO_B2
T
S_FO S_FO2
BLEN2
FO1B2
FO2B2
M
N
12
_EGOINB2 _EX_GO2 Vcc
To BLASTER 1 EGOIN1B2 5 to 12 V
470 ohm H
External
EGOIN2B2 GO
J
GND
BLEN2
_TBINB2 _ETBIN2 Vcc

To BLASTER 1 TBIN1B2
470 ohm K
TB
TBIN2B2
L
S_TB S_TBOUT2
U
BLEN2
CLKO1B2
A
CLKOUT17.9
From BLASTER 1
CLKO2B2
B
TXB2
C
RXB2
D
BLEN2
_RDYINB2 _EXT_RDY1 Vcc

To BLASTER 1 RDYIN1B2
470 ohm F
G
RDYIN2B2
To BLASTER 1 RDYENB2
RDYENB2
Vcc
E
Jumper
in cable
GNDB2 R
Figure 12-2 Blaster2 connector

January 11, 2011
LCI-428
BLASTER signals
EGOIN1 External GO command (Signal).
EGOIN2 External GO command (Ground).
Used to trigger an acquisition cycle from an external device.
Trigger current; Min.: 2 mA
Max.: 50 mA
A 470  resistor is in series connection with the
optoisolator.
The diagram below illustrates the case where the command
is generated by a relay.
5 VDC
LCI-428
External Go
 EGOIN command
EGOUT
0 VDC
Figure 12-3
TBIN1 External TB (Signal)

TBIN2 External TB (Ground)
Time Break input, from a firing device. Used to
synchronize the detonation with the recording system.
Trigger current:
Min.: 2 mA
Max.: 50 mA
A 470  resistor is in series connection with the
optoisolator.
Minimum pulse duration: 20 µs.

January 11, 2011
LCI-428

FO1
FO2 External Firing Order. Relay contact closed by the Firing
Order generated by the 428XL.
(pulse duration: 200 ms).
Contact rating: 50 mA Max. 12
Contact resistance: 100  max.
See also Source controller interfacing (page 83) in 428XL User’s

Manual Volume 3.
Note: for Micro-seismic operations, pin T must be wired to pin K, and

pin L wired to ground (pin R).
Serial port (TXB, RXB):

• 9600 Bd.
• 8 data bits.
• 1 Start bit.
• 1 Stop bit.
• No parity.

January 11, 2011
LCI-428
XDEV2
Pin Signal
A GND
B CPS_1S A L
C GPS_CLK_P
D GPS_CLK_N B M
K
E CTS_RS232_OUT N S
F RTS_RS232_IN C J
G TX_RS232 P R
H RX_RS232
J READY_IN1 D H
K READY_IN2
L FO_OUT1 E G
M FO_OUT2 F
N TB_IN1
P TB_IN2 Viewed from
R AUX_OUT1 wiring side
S AUX_OUT2

January 11, 2011
428-Lite Break-Out Box

Blaster
Pin Signal
A
B
C
CLK01B1
CLK02B1
TXB1
M A B 12
L N P C
D RXB1
E RDYENB1 K U V R D
F RDYIN1B1 J T S E
G RDYIN2B1 H F
G
H EGOIN1B1
J EGOIN2B1 Viewed from front face
K TBIN1B1
L TBIN2B1
M FO1B1
N FO2B1
P CR0_B1
R GNDB1
S CR1_B1
T FO_B1
U S_TBOUT1
V not connected
XDEV1 connector
Pin Signal
A GND A B C C B A
C 9V5
B RX_ETH_P G F E D D E F G
D RX_ETH_N
E CTS_PC H I J J I H
G TX_BL
H RX_BL
I TX_ETH_P
J TX_ETH_N Viewed from Viewed from
F Earth ground pin side wiring side

January 11, 2011
XDEV2
Pin Signal
A GND
C GPS_1S_P
A L
D GPS_1S_N B M
G GPS_RX_RS232_P K
H GPS_TX_RS232_P
N S
J READY_IN1_BL C J
K READY_IN2_BL P R
L FO_OUT1_BL
M FO_OUT2_BL D H
N TB_IN1_BL
E G
P TB_IN2_BL
F
S Earth ground
Viewed from wiring side
GPS
Pin Signal
1 2 3 4 5
1 RX_GPS_N
6 7 8 9
2 RX_GPS_P
3 TX_GPS_P
4 TX_GPS_N
5 GND
6 GND
7 GPS_1S
8 9V5
9 Earth ground
Serial port
Pin Signal
1 2 3 4 5
5 GND
6 7 8 9
7 CTS

January 11, 2011
Field electronics

Field electronics
FDU-428 input connector
The female (hollow) pin is the

positive terminal. 12
+ + +
- -
Figure 12-4
Applying a positive voltage to the positive terminal, with respect to

the negative terminal, results in a positive sample in the SEGD file and
an upward signal on the camera record.
Auxiliary channel differential input voltage:
• Linear operation: 2.26 V max. with G1600 (0 dB) gain; 565 mV max.
with G400 (12 dB) gain.
• Maximum allowable (safe but clamped): 5 V regardless of gain.
• Destructive: 10 V regardless of gain.
See also Trace Polarity (page 27) in 428XL User’s Manual Vol. 3.

January 11, 2011
Field electronics
LAUL-428 connectors
Power connectors (12VDC-A & 12VDC-B)

Pin 12VDC A 12VDC B
A PW-RC1 PW-RC2
B Vbat1 + Vbat2 +
C Vbat1 - Vbat2 -
XDEV connector
Pin Signal
A GND A B C
B CTS2
C Charger_Out G F E D
D RTS2
E CTS1 H I J
F RTS1
G XD_TX1
H XD_RX1
I XD_TX2
J XD_RX2

January 11, 2011
Field electronics

LAUX-428 connectors
Power connectors (12VDC-A & 12VDC-B)

Pin 12VDC A 12VDC B
A PW-RC1 PW-RC2
B
C
Vbat1 +
Vbat1 -
Vbat2 +
Vbat2 -
12
LINE connector
Pin Signal
A Lout+
C Lout-
B Lin+
D Lin-
case Ground
TRANSVERSE connector
Pin Signal
A TPOut+
C TPOut-
B TPIn+
D TPIn-
case Ground

January 11, 2011
Field electronics
XDEV1 connector
Pin Signal
A GND A B C C B A
B ETH_RX+
C Charger_Out G F E D D E F G
D ETH_RX-
E XDEV1_CTS H I J J I H
F XDEV1_RTS
G XDEV1_TX
H XDEV1_RX
I ETH_TX+ Viewed from Viewed from
J ETH_TX- pin side wiring side
XDEV2 connector
Pin Signal
A GND
B CPS_1S A L
C GPS_CLK_P M
B K
D GPS_CLK_N
E CTS_RS232_OUT N S
F RTS_RS232_IN C J
G TX_RS232 P R
H RX_RS232
J READY_IN1 D H
K READY_IN2
E G
L FO_OUT1
F
M FO_OUT2
N TB_IN1
Viewed from
P TB_IN2
wiring side
R AUX_OUT1
S AUX_OUT2

January 11, 2011
Field electronics

ULS
FDU2S takeout connector

Applying a positive voltage to the positive terminal, with respect to
the negative terminal, results in a positive sample on the tape and an
upward signal on the camera record. 12
+
2
AGMU 1002F
Figure 12-5 Mono-sensor takeout connector
+ +
3 2
To red plug To yellow plug
4 1
AGMU 1004F
Figure 12-6 Dual-sensor takeout connector

January 11, 2011
Field electronics
8-pin Input socket
Pin Signal
G
Transmission pair
F
C
Transmission pair
B
A
Power pair
H
D
Geophones pair
E
Power socket
Pin Signal
G 12 V
H 0V
XDEV socket
Pin Signal
A Gnd
B
C Tx2
D Rx2
E CTS1
F RTS1
G Tx1
H Rx1

January 11, 2011
Cables

Cables
SGD-S Blaster Controller to 428XL
1
2
12
3 Cannon DB9
(not used)
4
5
6
7
8
9
KCK2 plug
Analog Uphole
+-500 mV
to SYSTEM plug of
Controller SGD-SP
D H
TxD 1 R
RxD 2 C G
ExtGo 3 H
GND 4 J A
AngUH 5
ConfTB 6 K N
GND 7 L P
TB 8
FO 9 M L
Shield 10 N M
LCI-428 LAUX-428
BLASTER port XDEV2 port

Manual Volume 3.

January 11, 2011
Cables
ShotPro to 428XL
2 k
UH D +
B 500 
-
Auxiliary
2 k channels
+
200 
-
TB J K N
GND K L P
FO E M L
F N M
GND R R A
TxD P D H
RxD N C G
Shot Pro Blaster

connector LCI-428 LAUX-428

Manual Volume 3.

January 11, 2011
Cables

ShotPro I to 428XL
110 k
12
+
Auxiliary
36  channel
-
TB J K N
GND N L P
FO w M L
K N M
GND R A
TxD L D H
Shot Pro I
Blaster LCI-428 LAUX-428
connector BLASTER port XDEV2 port

Manual Volume 3.

January 11, 2011
Cables
Macha to 428XL
UH C +
D -
Auxiliary
channels
RFTB E +
Macha F -
System
connector
START G H
H J
TB A K N
GND B L P
Macha FO A M L
Control
connector F N M
GND B R A
TxD A D H
Macha
Data C C G
connector D
LCI-428 LAUX-428

Manual Volume 3.

January 11, 2011
Cables

BoomBox to 428XL
2 k
UH 30 +
100 
2 k
-
Auxiliary
12
channels
+
200 
-
TB 16 K N
GND 20 L P
FO 10 T L
M
R A
TxD 8 D H
RxD 9 C G
BoomBox
Blaster LCI-428 LAUX-428
connector BLASTER port XDEV2 port

Manual Volume 3.

January 11, 2011
Cables
LSI/HSU cable – P/N 512000196
SC16S plug SC16S plug

CTS +
A A
CTS -
B B
Tx +
C C
Tx -
D D
UH+ E
E
UH- F
F
CTB+
G G
CTB-
H H
FO +
J J
FO -
K K
ARM-En +
L L
ARM-En -
M M
N N
P P
R R
S Length: 140 m S

January 11, 2011
Cables

HSU/Blaster controller cable
HSU to Macha blaster controller box

Cable part No. 1C30080806
to HSU to Macha blaster box 12

A Red A
B White F Control
C (PT06A-14-12S)
Green
P/N 5011421
D White
E Yellow A
F White B
G Blue C Data
(PT06AB-8-4S)
H White D
P/N 5011347
I
J
C
(P/N 512210061)
D
E System
150  470  F (KPT06B-16-8S)
P/N 5011422
Control
viewed from
wiring side
viewed from wiring side

Data
viewed from
wiring side
System
viewed from
wiring side

January 11, 2011
Cables
HSU to Shot Pro Encoder

The HSU should be wired to the Spider cable of the Shot Pro Encoder
as shown below.
Shot Pro Encoder
HSU Spider cable
A K
+5 VDC (red)
B W
Start Act
C
D
E L
TX (blue)
F M
RX (purple)
G
H
2 k
I g
Analog (red)
J 150  R
COM (black)
2 k
2 k
J
NISO TB (green)
150  X
Start Ret (black)
N
Plug P/N 512210061


January 11, 2011
Cables

HSU to SGDS
The HSU should be wired to the SGDS Blaster Controller as shown
below.
HSU SGDS
FO A
B
9
4
12
GND
Rx C 1
GND D
Up Hole E 5
GND F
470 
CTB G 6
150 
GND H 7
I (Not used)
J (Not used)
Plug P/N 512210061


January 11, 2011
Cables
ULS
LAUX/FDU2S jumper
(P/N 512500210)
FM 4-pin 8-pin Geospace

A B
C C
B G
D F
A
D
E
H
LAULS/FDU2S jumper cable

(P/N 512500211)
8-pin Geospace 8-pin Geospace

A H
B G
C F
D E
E D
F C
G B
H A

January 11, 2011
Cables

PC XDEV cable P/N 1C50078588
2m
PC
12
C B A
5 1
D E F G
9 6
J I H
(Viewed from
solder side)
(Viewed from
solder side)
DB9
Pin Signal ETHERNET RJ45
H XDEV1_RX 2
G XDEV1_TX 3
I
A GND 5
6
E XDEV1_CTS 8
F XDEV1_RTS 7

January 11, 2011
Cables
Mater/Slave Y cable
3m
To VE464 DPG
To Master LCI-428
(RECORDER)
BLASTER connector
14-19S plug 14-19S plug

solder side solder side
5010952 5010952
To Slave LCI-428
BLASTER connector
Length:
1m
k
L

January 11, 2011
Appendix
A Glossary of abbreviations
and acronyms
A
AC Alternating Current.
Acq. An abbreviation for Acquisition.
ADC Analog-to-Digital Converter.
ADS-TA Ancillary Data Standard for Trace Attributes data. Used to

exchange trace and shot domain attributes, in conjunction with
ADS-TE records.
ADS-TE Ancillary Data Standard for Trace Edit data. Used in conjunction
with ADS-TA records, to track trace exclusion information for a
seismic data volume.
AGC Automatic Gain Control.
AIB Auxiliary Interface Box. Used to connect analog pilot signals from
a DPG to FDUs used as auxiliary channels.
API American Petroleum Institute.

January 11, 2011
APS Attribute Processing Support format. A standard for exporting shot

point attributes for source Quality Control tools.
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
Aux. An abbreviation for Auxiliary.
Avg. An abbreviation for Average.
AWD Accelerated Weight Drop.
AWG American Wire Gauge.
B
Bacc. An abbreviation for Base plate Acceleration (vibrator).
BCD Binary-Coded Decimal.
BOB Break Out Box.
BOT Beginning Of Tape.
Bvel. An abbreviation for Base plate Velocity (vibrator).
C
CD Compact Disk.
CD490E Sercel-packaged 3490E cartridge drive.
CD590 Sercel-packaged 3590 cartridge drive.
CDP Common Depth Point. The situation where the same portion of
subsurface produces reflections at different offset distances on
several profiles.
Chan. An abbreviation for Channel.
CMP Common Mid-Point.
CMRR Common-Mode Rejection Ratio. Expresses the ability of a device

to reject the effect of a voltage that is applied simultaneously to both
input terminals.

January 11, 2011
Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms

COG Centre Of Gravity.
Config. An abbreviation for Configuration.

A
Coord. An abbreviation for Coordinates.
Correl. An abbreviation for Correlation.
CR Carriage Return.
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code. An error correction code used to catch

errors in the data.
CT400 428XL Cable Tester. Used to check a length of cable for

compliance with the input/output specifications of 428XL field
electronics.
CTB Confirmed Time Break.
Ctrl. Abbreviation for Control.
D
DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter.
dB Decibel.
DC Direct Current.
DFT Discrete Fourier Transform.
DGPS Differential GPS. The DGPS technique uses a fixed ground-based

reference station to broadcast the difference between the position
indicated by the satellite system and the known fixed position. The
base station broadcasts the difference between the measured
satellite pseudoranges and actual (internally computed)
pseudoranges, so that receiver stations can correct their
pseudoranges by the same amount.
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (protocol for automating the

configuration of computers that use TCP/IP)
DIP Dual Inline Package.

January 11, 2011
DMZ Demilitarized Zone (PCs directly connected online).
DPG Digital Pilot Generator (VE432/VE464). A control unit for the

vibrator electronics (DSD). Connects to the LCI-428.
DPR Dual Port RAM.
DQPSK Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (transmission

encoding).
DSCSI Differential SCSI. See SCSI.
DSD Digital Servo Drive (VE432/VE464). Performs real-time control of

the energy imparted into the earth by a vibrator. Communicates
with a DPG via a radio link.
DSP Digital Signal Processor.
DSU Digital Sensor Unit. An integrated package including station

electronics and three digital accelerometers based on the MEMS
technology.
DTS Data Transfer Sequence.
DVD Digital Versatile Disc.
DXF (1) Drawing Interchange Format (2) Data Exchange Format (3)
AutoCAD File (file extension).
E
e-428 Sercel’s seismic network software based on a client/server
architecture. Totally controls the spread and the operations, and also
performs all the requested computations (stacks, correlations)
before recording data onto tapes or disks.
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory.
EOF End Of File.
EOM End Of Media.
EOT End Of Tape.

January 11, 2011

ESD Electrostatic Discharge.
eSQC-Pro Seismic Quality Control software.

A
Explo. An abbreviation for Explosive.
F
FC Fibre Channel.
FDPA428 Field Deployment Aid for LRU.
FDU Field Digitizing Unit. An analog-to-digital converter for a seismic

or auxiliary channel. Includes a digitally controlled test signal
generator.
FDU2S ULS technology, dual-channel FDU.
FFT Fast Fourier Transform. A Fourier Transform method for

calculating the frequency spectrum, in both magnitude and angle,
for any function of time.
Flt. An abbreviation for Fleet.
FM4 Hermaphrodite connector (4-pin, male and female).
FO Firing Order sent to a source controller.
FPS File Per Source (file including vibrator attributes plus SEGD file
number)
Freq An abbreviation for Frequency.
FT FT analysis: Frequency vs Time representation of the amplitude of

a signal. Alternately, an abbreviation for Fourier Transform.
FTP File Transfer Protocol.
G
GIS Geographical Information System.
GMT Greenwich Mean Time.

January 11, 2011
GPS Global Positioning System. A satellite-based global navigation

system that consists of a constellation of 24 satellites orbiting the
Earth, several in-orbit spares, and a ground-based control segment.
The GPS is owned and operated by the U.S. Department of Defense
but is available for general use around the world. The satellites
transmit signals that are used for extremely accurate three-
dimensional (latitude, longitude, and elevation) global navigation
(position determination), and for the dissemination of precise time.
GPS-derived position determination is based on the arrival times, at
an appropriate receiver, of precisely timed signals from the
satellites that are above the user's radio horizon. The location
accuracy is anywhere from 100 to 10 metres for most equipment.
Accuracy can be pinpointed to within one meter with special
military-approved equipment.
GUI Graphical User Interface.
H
HC High Cut (RF filtering).
HDOP Horizontal Dilution Of Precision (GPS).
Hex. An abbreviation for Hexadecimal.
HFVS High Fidelity Vibratory Seismic. A method for improving the

fidelity of data acquired with a vibratory source. Involves the
measurement and recording of suitable motions from each vibrator
so that these actual motions can be used to separate simultaneous
sources and process the data.
HSU Hand-Shake Unit. An interface between an LSI and a blaster

controller, used by the field operator to tell the central unit when a
firing device is armed and tell the number of the corresponding shot
point.
HV High Voltage.
HVD High Voltage Differential (SCSI interface).

January 11, 2011

I
ID (1) Identification, identity. (2) Inner Diametre. A
Ident. An abbreviation for Indentity.
Incr. An abbreviation for Increment
Info. An abbreviation for Information
Init. An abbreviation for (1) Initialize (2) Initialization.
Instr. An abbreviation for Instrument.
IP Internet Protocol.
ITB Internal Time Break.
K
kN 1000 Newton.
L
LAN Local Area Network. A data communications system that (a) lies
within a limited spatial area, (b) has a specific user group, (c) has a
specific topology, and (d) is not a public switched
telecommunications network, but may be connected to one.
Lat. An abbreviation for Latitude.
LAUL Line Acquisition Unit, Line. An interconnecting unit along an

acquisition line. Used to control the data flow from the acquisition
lines to the recording truck, and for power management on the line.
LAULS ULS-technology LAUL.
LAUR Line Acquisition Unit, Radio telemetry, capable of acquiring up to

30 channels of seismic data at 2 ms sampling rate in real-time on
radio line segments.

January 11, 2011
LAUX Line Acquisition Unit, Crossline. An interconnecting unit along an

acquisition Transverse or a line. Used to control the path of the data
flow from the acquisition lines to the recording truck, and for power
management on line sections.
LAUXS ULS-technology LAUX.
LC Low Cut (RF filtering).
LCD Liquid Crystal Display.
LCI-428 Line Controller Interface (428XL control module that can handle up
to 10 000 channels in real-time at 2 ms sampling rate).
LED Light Emitting Diode.
LF Line Feed.
LLX400 428XL Laser Link. Consists of two laser transceivers for license-
free, line-of-sight, infrared data transmission over obstacles within
a Line or a Transverse. Connects to the wireline electronics via two
LXIU interface boxes.
Long. An abbreviation for Longitude.
LRU Line Remote Unit, used as a long range point-to-point radio relay,
or as master transceiver in a radio cell. It can be inserted anywhere
in a spread as an element of the 428XL network to relay the data
transmission on a Line. Connects to any type of 428XL field
electronics (LAUX, LAUL, FDU Link, etc.), except for 100 MHz
Ethernet ports.
LSI Line Source Interface. A remote blaster connector box used to

connect a blaster controller along an acquisition line instead of
connecting it to the control unit’s Blaster connector. The blaster
controller connects to the LSI via an HSU unit.
LSS Line Shooting System. An LSI connected to an HSU.
LT428 428XL Line tester. A pocket terminal that connects to the XDEV
connector of an LAUL or LAUX, used to check the performance of
a line section. The test results are displayed on the pocket terminal.
LVD Low Voltage Differential (SCSI interface).

January 11, 2011

LXIU-400 Laser Transceiver Interface Unit. Interfaces an LAUX or LAUL
with a laser unit. A
M
MAC Media Access Control data communication protocol. Provides
addressing and channel access control mechanisms that make it
possible for several terminals or network nodes to communicate
within a multipoint network, typically a Local Area Network.
Macc. An abbreviation for Mass Acceleration (vibrator).
Max. Abbreviation for Maximum.
MB Megabyte.
Mbps Megabits Per Second.
MDR Mirage Data Recorder.
MEMS Micro-machined Electro-Mechanical Sensor.
MGA Multipurpose Geophone Analyzer.
Min. An abbreviation for (1) Minimum (2) Minute.
Misc. An abbreviation for Miscellaneous.
MRU Mobile Receiver Unit. A radiopositioning transceiver used for

service vehicle tracking.
MSI Multi-Slave Interface box. Used to connect several (up to four)

VE432 DPG units to a 428XL control module (LCI-428).
MTB1590S 8-metre portable telescopic mast.
Mvel. An abbreviation for Mass Velocity (vibrator).
N
NA Not Available.
NAN Not A Number.

January 11, 2011
NAS Network Attached Storage system
NB An abbreviation for “Number”.
NC Not Connected.
NCS Network Control Sequence
NFS Network File System.
NMEA National Marine Electronics Association.
NMO Normal Move-Out. The variation of reflection arrival time because

of variation in the shotpoint to geophone distance (offset) which
causes an increase of the length of the reflection travel path.
Num. An abbreviation for (1) Number (2) Numerical.
O
Obs. An abbreviation for Observer.
OD Outer diametre.
OS Operating System. Software designed to control the hardware of a

specific data-processing system in order to allow users and
application programs to make use of it.
OVC Open Vibrator Controller.
P
PB Play Back.
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board.
PDF Portable Document Format
PN Part Number.
POSC Petroleum Open Standards Consortium.

January 11, 2011

PPM Parts Per Million.
PPS Pulses Per Second

A
PRM Processing Module in a 428XL system. Software running on the
server computer, for formatting the data to and from the recording
media, to the plotters and eSQC-Pro, and for noise editing,
correlation and stacking.
Proc An abbreviation for (1) Processing (2) Process (3) Processor.
PWB Printed Wiring Board.
Q
QC Quality Control.
QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (transmission encoding).
QT400 Quick Tester. Allows quick checks for transmission and power
supply on a 428XL line (wireline telemetry).
R
RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks.
RAM Random-Access Memory.
Rcv. An abbreviation for Receiver.
RDM Removable Disk Module.
Rdy. An abbreviation for Ready.
Rec. An abbreviation for (1) Record (2) Recorder.
Ref. An abbreviation for Reference.
RF Radio Frequency.
RJ45 Registered Jack - 45 (8 wire connector used in networking).

January 11, 2011
RMS Root-Mean-Square. The square root of the average of the squares of

a series of related values (for a sine wave, 0.707 times the peak
value).
RP Receiver Position.
RTK Real-Time Kinematic (GPS). The RTK technique allows

centimetric accuracy to be achieved.
Rtv. An abbreviation for (1) Retrieve (2) Retrieval.
RVT Removable Virtual Tape.
Rx. An abbreviation for Receive.
S
SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface. SCSI is a system level interface
and as such it uses high level commands, and logical block
addressing. This considerably simplifies the task of the device
driver and saves CPU time on every single I/O. Moreover, because
the SCSI device does operations like “rewind the tape” or “format
this disk” without host intervention, the host saves even more CPU
time.
SD or SDev. Standard Deviation.
SE Single-End.
SEG Society of Exploration Geophysicists. The SEG promotes the

science of geophysics and the education of exploration
geophysicists.
SEG-D One of the formats developed by the SEG for recording seismic
data, used in processing and interpretation software to determine
how the tape should be read.
Seq. An abbreviation for Sequence.
SGA Signal Graphic Analyzer. Software used to analyse radio or

wireline-similarity signals acquired on Sercel systems. Allows the
user to monitor the phase, distortion or force of the vibrator source
signal (on auxiliary traces) in real time.

January 11, 2011

SGT Sercel Geophone Tester.
Simult. An abbreviation for Simultaneous.

A
SMT Surface-Mount Technology.
SN Serial Number.
SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio.
SP Shot Point.
SPL Source Point Line.
SPN Source Point Number.
SPS SHELL Processing Support format. A standard for the transfer of

positioning and geophysical support data from land field crews to
seismic processing centres.
SR Sample Rate. The sampling interval in a seismic acquisition.
SRHRF Strain Relief High Rate Flex telemetry cable.
ST Standard Telemetry cable.
Stat. An abbreviation for Statistics.
STSR Standard Telemetry cable, Strain Relief.
SWR Standing Wave Ratio. The ratio of the maximum to the minimum
amplitudes of corresponding components of a field, voltage or
current along a transmission line or waveguide in the direction of
propagation and at a given frequency. Alternately, the reciprocal of
this ratio.
T
TB Time Break. A time mark indicating the shot instant or the time at
which the seismic wave was generated.
TBP Tape By-Pass.

January 11, 2011
TCP Transmission Control Protocol (with Internet Protocol, the main

protocol of the Internet).
TCXO Temperature-Controlled Crystal Oscillator.
TDM Time-Division Multiplex.
TDMA Time Division Multiple Access.
TE Transmit Error.
TFOI Transverse Fibre Optics Interface.
TMS428 428XL Test and Maintenance system. A PC computer and an

interface unit (TMU428), the core of which is an LAUX fitted with
specific software, used for testing 428XL field electronics.
TMU428 TMS428 system's interface unit.
Topo. An abbreviation for Topographical.
TREP-428 428XL Transverse Repeater.
Tx. An abbreviation for Transmit.
U
UH Up-Hole. (1) Uphole geophone: a geophone placed a few feet from
a shothole to detect the Uphole time. (2) Uphole time: the time for
the first wave from an explosion to reach the surface at or near the
shotpoint.
UL Sercel Ultra-Link product line.
ULS Sercel Ultra-Link Submersible technology.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply.
URL Uniform Resource Locator (world wide web address).
USB Universal Serial Bus.

January 11, 2011

UTC Universal Time Coordinated. Greenwich Mean Time updated with
leap seconds each year to compensate for changes in the rotation of
the earth.
A
Util. An abbreviation for Utility.
V
Var. An abbreviation for Variable.
VE432, Vibrator Electronics, consisting of a control unit (DPG) connecting

VE434 to the 428XL control module (LCI-428), and a vibrator control unit
(DSD) installed in each vibrator truck.
Vib. An abbreviation for Vibrator.
VLSI Very Large-Scale Integration.
VP Vibrator Point. The Shot Point when a vibratory source is used.
VQC88 A standalone field system used for vibrator maintenance or trouble-

shooting, capable of acquiring 7 analog channels (including two
independent accelerometer sensors).
VSR Vibrator Signal Recording. A function used to record actual

vibrator motions from each vibrator.
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. The ratio of the electronic field or
voltage at a voltage minimum to that at the adjacent maximum in a
stationary-wave system, as in a coaxial cable.
W
WGS84 World Geodetic System 1984.
WPSR Water-Proof, Strain-Relief telemetry cable.
WZ WZ velocity: the propagation velocity of the shot wave in the

ground.

January 11, 2011
X
XDEV A connector used to connect an external device (e. g. an LT428) on
field electronics.
Xdump. Extra Dump.
Xmit. An abbreviation for Transmit or Transmitter.
Xtalk. An abbreviation for Crosstalk. The signal picked up by an

acquisition channel because of undesired coupling to another
channel.

January 11, 2011
Index
A B C D E F GH I J K L M N OP QR S T U V W X Y Z
Index
· baseplate, monitoring, VE432 U1: 615
· mass, monitoring, VE432 U1: 615
Acceptance
· tests U3: 247
Account IM: 128
Acquisition
· Error description (SEGD) U2: 26
· graphic view, normal, OVC U1: 666
· graphic view, normal, VE432 U1: 646
· graphic view, normal, VE464 U1: 533
IM = Installation Manual · index, process type U1: 244
U1 = User’s Manual Vol. 1 · Length U3: 273
· Length (SEGD) U2: 23
U2 = User’s Manual Vol. 2 · local, VE432 U1: 630
· local, VE464 U1: 526
U3 = User’s Manual Vol. 3 · Nb, APS U2: 160
· normal, OVC U1: 666
TM = Technical Manual · normal, VE432 U1: 645
· normal, VE464 U1: 532
· Number (SEGD) U2: 26
· numeric view, normal, OVC U1: 668
Numerics · numeric view, normal, VE432 U1: 649
· numeric view, normal, VE464 U1: 536
3592 cartridge drive IM: 175
· test, TMS428 TM: 97
3C · type, OVC U1: 662
· polarity, SEGD U3: 261 · type, Process type U1: 244
408ULS · type, VE432 U1: 611
· Handling IM: 262 · type, VE464 U1: 492
428-Lite Acquisition type tables (SEGD) U2: 25
· connectors IM: 407 Action (see Shortcuts)
· installing IM: 56
Active
· installing, operating system IM: 86,
· swath U1: 93
IM: 92
Activity
· window U1: 94
A ADC
Abort · test, TMS428) TM: 93
· button, Operation U1: 237 Add
· Plot U1: 570 · button U1: 31
· TMS428 tests TM: 52 · to query U1: 432
Absolute · to quick launch, TMS428 TM: 58
· spread U1: 138 Additional
· Spread, tests U1: 203 · blocks (SEGD general header) U2: 17
Accelerated · effects U1: 427
· weight drop U1: 70 Address
Acceleration · 428XL local network IM: 40

January 11, 2011
Index
· Client computer IM: 135 · button U1: 32

· FUJI 3x90, changing IM: 165 · Sensor, Survey setup U1: 119
· FUJI 3x90, displaying IM: 166 APS
· Intranet IM: 74, IM: 75, IM: 82, · File format U2: 157
IM: 89, IM: 95, IM: 123 · report U1: 563
· LCI-428, changing IM: 42 Archiving
· LCI-428, selecting U1: 66 · configuring U1: 71
· LTO, changing IM: 171 · DSUT TM: 159
· MAC U1: 70 · system status U1: 58
· TMS428 TM: 42 Array
Adjusting · Forming (SEGD) U2: 22
· clock, LCI TM: 17 Arrays, sub, number of U2: 90, U2: 140
Administration Assembly
· server U1: 42 · Location (SEGD) U2: 37
Advance II U3: 86 · Serial number (SEGD) U2: 37
Advanced · Type (SEGD) U2: 37
· connection parameters U1: 38 Authorization
· mode, LT428 IM: 285, IM: 296, · granting U1: 43
IM: 298 Auto
· process type U1: 242 · Corr Peak Time U1: 247
Again · Export U1: 439
· Plot U1: 570 · Level, VE432 vib drive U1: 641
AGC · Level, VE464 vib drive U1: 520
· plotter U1: 580 · Lift, VE432 U1: 612
Air · Lift, VE464 U1: 494
· gun (SPS) U2: 76, U2: 124 · Look U1: 143
· pressure psi (SPS) U2: 90, U2: 140 · noise editing U1: 285
Alarm · saving TMS428 reports TM: 58
· Positioning U1: 422 Auto/Manual
Alert · noise editing threshold U1: 285
· system U1: 422 · VE432 U1: 625
Alias filter · VE464 U1: 510
· Frequency at - 3dB point (SEGD) Autocorrelation peak time (SEGD)
U2: 22 U2: 26
· Slope (SEGD) U2: 22 Automatic
Angle from skew (SPS) U2: 72, U2: 84, · Saving, DSUT TM: 146
U2: 120, U2: 134 Automation
Annotation · Continuous, shooting U1: 269
· logging U1: 85 · Discontinuous, shooting U1: 269
Antenna · Look U1: 270
· Height, format U2: 164 · Manual, shooting U1: 270
Append · shooting U1: 268
· VE432 vib (Look) U1: 628 Autonomous
Apply · mode, enabling U1: 267
· All, Survey setup U1: 119 · mode, using U1: 353

January 11, 2011
Index
Aux Basic Type

· Channel contents (SPS) U2: 73, · LOG, dB/Hz, VE432 U1: 598
U2: 86, U2: 121, U2: 136 · LOG, dB/Hz, VE464 U1: 478
· Line U1: 131 · LOG, dB/octave, VE432 U1: 601
· Process Descriptor U1: 248 · LOG, dB/octave, VE464 U1: 481
· Traces, number of U2: 23 · Setup, VE432 U1: 595
Auxiliary · Setup, VE464 U1: 475
· channel, description U1: 131 · Taper, VE432 U1: 595
· channels U1: 131 · Taper, VE464 U1: 476
· channels, Comments U1: 133 · Tn, VE432 U1: 602
· channels, deploying IM: 253 · Tn, VE464 U1: 482
· channels, Gain U1: 132 Batteries (Show/hide) U1: 108
· channels, Instrument tests U1: 204 Battery
· trace scaling U1: 582 · GoBook Q200 IM: 218
· trace, description U1: 248 · Limit, LT428 IM: 287
Average · polarity test (TMS428) TM: 92
· distortion, APS U2: 158 · threshold LED test TM: 91
· force, APS U2: 158 · voltage limit U1: 108
· ground stiffness, APS U2: 158 Baud
· ground viscosity, APS U2: 158 · rate, Raveon radio (VE464) U1: 501
· phase, APS U2: 158 · rate, Tracs TDMA U1: 498
AWD U1: 70 Bearing
· source line, VE432 U1: 623
B · source line, VE464 U1: 508
Beginner U1: 50
Backup Blaster
· GoBook Q200 IM: 222 · Advance II U3: 86
· setup U1: 89 · connector, LCI-428 IM: 402, IM: 403
Backward · controller, in line IM: 266
· playback U1: 451 · controllers U1: 288
Banner · id (SEGD) U2: 24
· setup, plotter U1: 571 · MACHA U3: 93
Base · SGDS U3: 94
· Tracs TDMA U1: 498 · Shallow Sequencer U3: 91
Base scan interval (SEGD) U2: 18 · Shot Pro U3: 87
Baseplate · signals IM: 404
· acceleration, monitoring, VE432 · status (SEGD) U2: 24
U1: 615 · type U1: 69
· velocity, monitoring, VE432 U1: 615 Blasters
Basic · interfacing U3: 83
· pilot signal, VE432 (Acquisition type) Blocking
U1: 612 · trace U1: 444
· sweep signal, VE432 (Acquisition type) Blocks in General Trailer U2: 19
U1: 612 BoomBox U1: 69
· sweep signal, VE464 (Acquisition type) · wiring IM: 419
U1: 493

January 11, 2011
Index
Box · value (SEGD) U2: 36

· type, detour U1: 135 Capacity
Break · Processing U3: 271
· Point U1: 261 Cartridge
Bridge · insertion U1: 465
· radio, ethernet IM: 381 Cartridge drive
Browser · Shock-mount parts IM: 163
· settings U1: 40 Cartridge drive. See Tape drive
Buffer U1: 66 Centre
Build · button (mouse) U1: 110
· feature query U1: 431 Change
Built-in · button U1: 31
· LAUX, upgrading TM: 107 Changing
Button U1: 24 · LCI-428 U1: 64
Bypass · Serial number (TMS428) TM: 105
· file exports U1: 440 Channel
Bytes per scan (SEGD) U2: 17 · auxiliary, description U1: 131
· data error overscaling (SEGD) U2: 39
· edited status (SEGD) U2: 40
C · filter (SEGD) U2: 39
Cable · filter response U3: 41
· BoomBox IM: 419 · gain control method (SEGD) U2: 21
· calibration TM: 53 · gain scale (SEGD) U2: 39
· length, Line IM: 249, IM: 250 · increment (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 95,
· Line cable length IM: 249, IM: 250 U2: 127, U2: 145
· Macha IM: 418 · number (SEGD) U2: 37
· path U1: 114 · process (SEGD) U2: 40
· replacing, LAUL TM: 211 · Raveon radio U1: 501
· SGD-S Blaster IM: 415 · sample to mV conversion factor
· ShotPro IM: 416, IM: 417 (SEGD) U2: 40
· tester TM: 183 · Set End Time (SEGD) U2: 21
Cables IM: 401 · Set Number (SEGD) U2: 31
Calibration · set number (SEGD) U2: 21
· clock, LCI TM: 17 · Set Starting Time (SEGD) U2: 21
· DSUT TM: 118 · set, number of channels in U2: 21
· FDU U3: 111, TM: 84 · sets per record U1: 87, U2: 18
· meter and test cables TM: 53 · skipping U1: 146
· multimeter, TMS428 TM: 30 · Tracs TDMA U1: 498
· TMU428 TM: 109 · type (SEGD) U2: 38
Camp · type id (SEGD) U2: 40
· distance to, alarm U1: 425 · Type Identification (SEGD) U2: 21
Capacitance · type, Log shooting setup U1: 552
· error (SEGD) U2: 36 Channels, number of (SPS) U2: 73,
· high limit (SEGD) U2: 36 U2: 85, U2: 121, U2: 135
· low limit (SEGD) U2: 36 Charge

January 11, 2011
Index
· Depth U2: 89, U2: 139 · Easting, format U2: 164

· Length U2: 89, U2: 139 · elevation, format U2: 164
Chat U1: 62 · file, format U2: 164
Check · log file U1: 563
· Line U1: 212 · Northing, format U2: 164
Checkerboard · radius threshold U1: 393
· view U1: 113 · source position (estimated) U1: 415
Circular bearing of H256 (SPS) U2: 72, · status, format U2: 164
U2: 83, U2: 120, U2: 134 · to source deviation, format U2: 164
Cleaning Comments
· boxes IM: 228 · Auxiliary channels U1: 133
· plugs IM: 228, TM: 275 · LT428 results IM: 305
Click U1: 24 · observer, setup U1: 287
· SEGD U2: 29
· right, Line window U1: 112
· setup, Operation window U1: 263
Client
Common
· Mode Rejection U1: 206
· main window U1: 50
· mode, Field (TMS428) TM: 79
· SPS U2: 71, U2: 81, U2: 119,
· mode, Instrument (TMS428) TM: 83
U2: 131
· mode, test network, FDU calibration
Clipping
U3: 134
· method (noise elimination) U1: 369
· noise editing type U1: 283
Common mode
· rejection ratio, geophones U3: 226
· plotter U1: 585
Clock Communications
· protocol, source controllers U3: 83
· internal U1: 84
· LCI TM: 17 Compound
· time w.r.t. GMT (SPS) U2: 71, U2: 81, · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 608
U2: 119, U2: 132 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 489
Cluster U1: 277 Computation Domain, APS U2: 161
CMRR Connecting
· geophone string U3: 226 · FDU link, TMS428 TM: 60
· Instrument (TMS428) TM: 83 · FDU2S, TMS428 TM: 61
· Instrument test U1: 206 · LAUL, TMS428 TM: 62
· test record result recovery U3: 109 · LAULS, TMS428 TM: 64
· test, FDU U3: 164 · LAUX, TMS428 TM: 63
· test, Field (TMS428) TM: 79 · LAUXS, TMS428 TM: 65
· test, Sensor U3: 186 · LT428 IM: 276
CN3e IM: 206 · TMS428 device under test TM: 60
· Getting started IM: 277 Connection
· installing 428XL software IM: 210 · crew Web site U1: 59
· installing, LT428 IM: 212 · opening a session U1: 38
· resetting IM: 208 Connector (see Replacing)
Code Connectors IM: 401
· Producer U1: 87 · 428-Lite Break-Out Box IM: 407
COG · Blaster1 IM: 402

January 11, 2011
Index
· Blaster2 IM: 403 · factor, FDU calibration U3: 112,

· FDU Input IM: 409 TM: 84
· FDU2S takeoutt IM: 413 · rate, DGPS (Raveon) U1: 501
· LAUL · rate, DGPS (Tracs TDMA) U1: 497
XDEV IM: 407, IM: 410 Correlation
· LAUL-428 IM: 410 · After Stack, process type U1: 255
· LAUX · After stack, theory of U1: 371,
LINE IM: 411 U1: 373
Power IM: 411 · Before Stack, process type U1: 253
TRANSVERSE IM: 411 · data distribution U1: 378
XDEV IM: 412 · Frequency domain U3: 216
Consumption · more about U1: 376
· port, TMS428 TM: 95 · pilot, choosing U1: 245
Continuity · Time domain U3: 216
· test limit U1: 124 Correlator, noise supp (SPS) U2: 75,
Continuous U2: 89, U2: 123, U2: 139
· shooting U1: 269 Corrosion IM: 263
Control CRC errors U3: 233
· type (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 89, U2: 123, Create
U2: 139 · selection U1: 432
· unit serial number (SEGD) U2: 39 Crew
· unit type (SEGD) U2: 39 · name U1: 82
Controller · name, Comment (SPS) U2: 73,
· source, time management U1: 85 U2: 85, U2: 121, U2: 135
Conversion · number, VE432 U1: 592
· sample to mV U2: 40 · number, VE464 U1: 472
Converting · setup U1: 82
· coordinates U1: 433 · VE464 vibrators U1: 472
· samples to mV U3: 219 · vibrators, OVC U1: 661
Coord. status final/prov (SPS) U2: 76, · vibrators, VE432 U1: 592
U2: 90, U2: 124, U2: 140 Crossline
Coordinate location (SPS) U2: 71, · spacing, AGC U1: 582
U2: 81, U2: 119, U2: 131 Crosstalk
Coordinates · Instrument test U1: 205
· converting U1: 433 · Instrument, FDU U3: 167
Copy · test record result recovery U3: 110
· and Paste U1: 34 Crosstalk test
· function (Export window) U1: 452 · DSU3 U3: 202, U3: 212
· tape, file U3: 14 CT400 TM: 183
Copy+ software tool U3: 19 Custom
Copying · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 605
· files to tape U1: 463 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 484
CopyMedia U3: 14 · sweep file, VE432 (how to load)
Copyrights U1: 79 U1: 607
Correction · sweep, loading to VE464 DPG U1: 522

January 11, 2011
Index
Customer · Geoid U1: 434

· support U1: 79 Day
Customizing · of year (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 93,
· TMS428 tests TM: 71 U2: 125, U2: 143
Cut off · of Year, APS U2: 161
· error (SEGD) U2: 36 Dead seis traces, number of U2: 23
· high limits (SEGD) U2: 36 Deboost
· low limit (SEGD) U2: 36 · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 609
· value (SEGD) U2: 36 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 490
Cygwin IM: 143 Default
· Channel type, Log U1: 552
D Delay
· at end of Acq. U1: 278
DAC · at end of VP U1: 278
· Common-Mode resistance, FDU · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 609
calibration U3: 134 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 488
· line current correction, FDU calibration · lift up, VE432 U1: 642
U3: 125 · lift up, VE464 U1: 521
· rough current correction, FDU · no-move alarm U1: 425
calibration U3: 119 · radio, measuring, VE432 U1: 637
Damp coeff, natural freq. (SPS) U2: 74, · radio, VE432 U1: 635
U2: 122 · refraction, process type U1: 243
Damping coeff, natural freq (SPS) · setup, Operation window U1: 278
U2: 87, U2: 137 · speed alarm U1: 426
Data Delete
· archive, DSUT TM: 159 · button U1: 32
· Bypass U1: 440 Deploying
· computation domain, VE432 vib QC · field equipment IM: 225
U1: 618 Depth
· computation domain, VE464 vib QC · charge U2: 89, U2: 139
U1: 504 · towing U2: 90, U2: 140
· record sorting order (SPS) U2: 68, Descale Multiplier (SEGD) U2: 21
U2: 116 Description
Data rate · absolute spread U1: 138
· Line U3: 271 · Auxiliary channels U1: 131
· Transverse U3: 271 · Channels (Aux), Instrument tests
Date U1: 204
· of survey (SPS) U2: 71, U2: 80, · Channels (tests) U1: 203
U2: 119, U2: 130 · Generic Line U1: 141
· SEGD U2: 26 · Generic spread U1: 142
Datum U1: 434 · of grid units (SPS) U2: 71, U2: 82,
· type, setup U1: 388 U2: 119, U2: 133
Datum Type setup · of survey area (SPS) U2: 71, U2: 80,
· Datum U1: 434 U2: 119, U2: 130
· Ellipsoid U1: 434 · Receiver section U1: 121

January 11, 2011
Index
· Survey U1: 120 · Traces per inch U1: 585

Desensitization IM: 325, U1: 191 Distance
Desktop U1: 41 · no-move alarm U1: 425
Detect · simultaneous sources U1: 268
· end of tape U1: 465 Distortion
Detection · Instrument test U1: 205
· fiber, TMS428 TM: 95 · Sensor test U3: 191
Detour U1: 133 · test record result recovery U3: 102
· skipped receiver points U1: 150 · test, FDU U3: 161
Deviation, COG to source, format · test, TMS428 TM: 83
U2: 164 Distortion test
Dialog box U1: 24 · DSU U3: 201, U3: 211
Digital Distortion, APS U2: 158
· pilot, additional U1: 494 Diversity
· pilot, choosing U1: 493 · enhanced (theory of) U1: 373
· pilot, correlation U1: 245 · stack U1: 281
· Sensor Unit, deploying IM: 234 · stack (theory of) U1: 371
Directories Dongle IM: 103, IM: 149
· DSUT TM: 128 Double-click U1: 24
Disable Download
· radio U1: 199 · DSUGPS firmware U1: 158
Disassembling · from crew Web site U1: 60
· DSU TM: 202 · setup (firmware) U1: 223
· FDU TM: 197 DPG
· FDU2S TM: 249 · number of U1: 69
· LAUL TM: 212 · Slave, VE432 U1: 593
· LAULS TM: 253 · Slave, VE464 U1: 473
· LAUR TM: 230 · status code, VE464 U1: 538
· LAUX TM: 218, TM: 224 Drag U1: 24
· LAUXS TM: 259 Drag and drop
· LRU TM: 238 · base camp U1: 407
· TFOI TM: 335, TM: 344 · recording unit U1: 407
· TREP-428 TM: 245 · source (Positioning) U1: 409
Discharge Drilling
· ESD protection TM: 15 · tool, DSU-428 IM: 235
Discontinuous Drive
· shooting U1: 269 · level, APS U2: 158
Disk · level, high, VE432 U1: 641
· buffer U1: 66 · level, high, VE464 U1: 521
· record, setup U1: 89 · level, low, VE432 U1: 641
· space, monitoring U1: 466 · level, low, VE464 U1: 521
Disk space · tape, install U1: 71
· DSUT TM: 128 · transfer to U3: 271
Display Drive. See Tape drive
· mode, LT428 IM: 303 Driver

January 11, 2011
Index
· graphic, Linux · specifications U3: 268

Linux · SPS positions U1: 560
graphic driver IM: 152 DSUT
DSD · Archiving TM: 159
· Get, VE432 U1: 632 · Getting started TM: 131
· Get, VE464 U1: 517 · Installation, hardware TM: 119
· Network, Navigation U1: 291 · installation, software TM: 121
· network, VE432 U1: 593 · Log-in TM: 131
· network, VE464 U1: 473 · password TM: 131
· reference signal, VE432 U1: 615 · Repair assistant TM: 149, TM: 151
· setting, OVC U1: 666 · Repair log file TM: 153
· setting, VE432 U1: 631 · Running tests TM: 141
· setting, VE464 U1: 515 · Specifications TM: 116
· status code, VE464 U1: 538 · Statistics TM: 157
· VE432 status, get U1: 614 · Test report TM: 160
· VE464 status, get U1: 505 · Test sequence editor TM: 139
DSP Dump
· DRAM & DPR test TM: 90 · Output button U1: 245
DSU · to SQC U1: 267
· Deploying IM: 234 Dump stacking fold (SEGD) U2: 26
· disassembly instructions TM: 202 Duplicating, tape, file U3: 14
· Re-assembly instructions TM: 204 Duplication, sample U3: 233
· tests TM: 165 DXF format U1: 402
DSU1-428 Dynamic
· test specifications U3: 282 · grouping, fleets U1: 268
DSU3
· theory of tests U3: 195
· tilt correction U1: 165 E
· trace correction formula U3: 245 e428 software
DSU3-428 · licence U1: 66
· in Line window U1: 153 Earth
· test specifications U3: 282 · ground resistor, FDU calibration
· tester (DSUT428) TM: 115 U3: 140
DSU3BV-428 Easting, COG, format U2: 164
· deploying IM: 239 Edit menu
· specifications U3: 268 · DSUT TM: 139
DSUGPS Editing
· acquisition U1: 164 · Noise U1: 281
· deploying IM: 238 · number of windows (noise) U1: 283
· firmware upgrading U1: 158 · Spike U1: 368
· GPS reference station IM: 52 · system parameters (Log) U1: 550
· in Line window U1: 153 · type (noise) U1: 283
· in Positioning window U1: 410 · Zeroing Length (noise) U1: 283
· Instrument view U1: 162 · Zeroing Taper Length (noise) U1: 283
· instrument view U1: 162 Effect
· Setup menu U1: 158

January 11, 2011
Index
· speed alert U1: 427 U2: 20

Electrostatic Explosive
· discharge TM: 15 · source type setup U1: 273
Elevation Explosive (SPS) U2: 76, U2: 124
· antenna height, format U2: 164 Exponent, subscans U2: 21
· COG, format U2: 164 Exponential
· reference U1: 391 · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 602
Ellipsoid U1: 434 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 482
Ellipsoidal · time, plotter U1: 581
· model U1: 391 Export
Emergency · Auto/Manual U1: 439
· alarm U1: 422 · client window U1: 435
Enable · enabled U1: 432
· instruments U1: 65 Exporting
· radio U1: 199 · LT428 results IM: 306
Enabled · SPS files U1: 559
· export U1: 432 · to NAS U1: 458
End Exports
· colour map scale U1: 429 · configuring U1: 71
· line plug IM: 248 Extended
· of media U1: 448 · channel set number (SEGD) U2: 22,
· of tape, detecting U1: 465 U2: 31
End-of-line plug IM: 248 · Channel Sets/Scan Types (SEGD)
EOF U1: 447 U2: 19
EOM U1: 448 · file number (SEGD) U2: 31
Error · header (SEGD) U2: 23
· leakage U1: 144 · header blocks (SEGD) U2: 19
· only, TMS428 report TM: 59 · header flag (SEGD) U2: 22
· recovery, Micro-seismic U1: 352 · header length (SEGD) U2: 18
Errors · QC, VE432 vib U1: 618
· CRC U3: 233 · QC, VE464 vib U1: 505
· DSUT TM: 169 · receiver line number (SEGD) U2: 32
ESD TM: 15 · receiver point number (SEGD) U2: 33
eSQC Pro IM: 30 · Record Length (SEGD) U2: 19
Esri format U1: 402 Extender
· TFOI, connecting IM: 246
Estimated
· source COG U1: 415
External
· header (SEGD) U2: 29
Ethernet
· header blocks (SEGD) U2: 19
· port, identifying IM: 43
· header length (SEGD) U2: 18
· port, testing (TMS428) TM: 99
· label U1: 443
· radio bridge IM: 381
· tape label U1: 88
Event
· log viewer U1: 565
Excitation Overload, APS U2: 161 F
Expanded file number (SEGD) U2: 19, Factor to metre (SPS) U2: 71, U2: 83,
January 11, 2011
Index
U2: 119, U2: 133 U2: 95, U2: 127, U2: 145
Farthest · record number (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 95,
· Rcv Nb, LT428 IM: 294 U2: 127, U2: 145
FDPA428 · tape number (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 95,
· connecting IM: 345 U2: 127, U2: 145
· operating guide IM: 347 · test limits, LT428 IM: 288
FDU · test, automation U1: 270
· Calibration U3: 111 · test, LT428 IM: 298
· connector, replacing TM: 265 · update U1: 143
· disassembly instructions TM: 197 · update mode U1: 99, U1: 207,
· INPUT connector IM: 409 U1: 208
· Input polarity IM: 409 Field Units (see Instruments)
· Max number between LAUs IM: 250, File
IM: 251 · count (SEGD) U2: 26
· Number in link, LT428 IM: 312 · duplicating U3: 14
· Number in link, TMS428 TM: 110 · Header block (SEGD) U2: 17
· Power supply IM: 249 · Load/Save U1: 569
· reassembly instructions TM: 198 · menu (TMS428) TM: 51
· unit type (SEGD) U2: 37 · number (SEGD) U2: 17, U2: 31
FDU2S · number, recording U1: 92
· Disassembly instructions TM: 249 · packager U1: 58
· Input polarity IM: 413 Files
· Re-assembly instructions TM: 250 · per tape U1: 444
· Takeout connector IM: 413 · per tape (SEGD) U2: 26
FDU-428 Filter
· deploying IM: 229 · alias Hz, dB pnt, slope (SPS) U2: 73,
· test specifications U3: 280 U2: 85, U2: 121, U2: 135
Feature · low Hz, dB pnt, slope (SPS) U2: 73,
· property names U1: 429 U2: 86, U2: 121, U2: 136
Fiber · LT428 IM: 285
· detection, TMS428 TM: 95 · notch Hz, -3 dB points (SPS) U2: 73,
Fibre Optics U2: 121
· allowable loss TM: 324 · notch Hz, -3dB points (SPS) U2: 86,
· connector, replacing TM: 360 U2: 136
· repairs TM: 323 · playback U3: 29
· splices, number of TM: 324 · response, channel U3: 41
· TFOI, connecting IM: 246 · servo control, VE432 U1: 640
Field · servo control, VE464 U1: 520
· type U1: 83
· computer system(s) (SPS) U2: 71,
· type (SEGD) U2: 26
U2: 81, U2: 119, U2: 131
· electronics, upgrading U1: 223 Filters
· electronics, upgrading via XDEV · plotter U1: 583
IM: 111 Firing
· on/off U1: 103 · Order (FO), process type U1: 242
· record increment (SPS) U2: 78, Firmware
· updating U1: 223

January 11, 2011
Index
· updating, TMS428 TM: 52 · version num. (SPS) U2: 71, U2: 80,
· updating, via XDEV IM: 111 U2: 119, U2: 130
· upgrading (TMS428) TM: 101 Forward
· version, reading (TMS428) TM: 100 · playback U1: 451
First Fourier
· Notch Frequency (SEGD) U2: 22 · Transform U3: 216
· Timing Word (SEGD) U2: 31 Frequency
· waypoint U1: 396 · domain U3: 216
Fleet · LRU IM: 322, U1: 187
· cluster U1: 310 · Nyquist U1: 83
· group, dynamic U1: 268 From channel (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 95,
· Ready U1: 276 U2: 127, U2: 145
· VE464 vibrator, crew U1: 473 From receiver (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 96,
· vibrator, APS format U2: 158 U2: 127, U2: 146
· vibrator, VE432 crew U1: 593 FTP
Floppy disk · exporting U1: 438
· specifications (SPS) U2: 68, U2: 69, · server U1: 71
U2: 116, U2: 117 · server setup U1: 446
FM4 plug assembly · server, installing on PC IM: 196
· SRHRF cable TM: 289 FUJI 3x90
· ST+ cable TM: 315 · address, changing IM: 165
· WPSR cable TM: 304 · address, displaying IM: 166
FO Window Functions
· VE432 U1: 620 · Test U1: 201
Folders · VE432 U1: 625
· DSUT TM: 128 · VE464 U1: 510
Force
· ground, monitoring, VE432 U1: 615
· Overload, APS U2: 161 G
Force, APS U2: 158 Gain
Form · Auxiliary channels U1: 132
· Line, LT428 IM: 293 · code U1: 139
· Transverse, LT428 IM: 301 · code, absolute spread U1: 138
Format · error, Instrument test U1: 206
· APS U2: 157 · geophone string U3: 225
· code (SEGD) U2: 17 · Instrument tests U1: 204
· instrument test limit U2: 51 · LT428 IM: 285
· SEGD U2: 13 · Preamplifier, 0 dB, FDU calibration
· SEGD, Rev 2.1 U2: 43 U3: 115
· Source · Preamplifier, 12 dB, FDU calibration
controllers U3: 83 U3: 144
· SPS, initial U2: 63 · Seismonitor U1: 109
· SPS, Rev. 2.1 U2: 109 · shooting setup, Log U1: 552
· SPS-like U2: 157 · test record result recovery U3: 103
· synthetic file U2: 55 · test, FDU U3: 157
· test, TMS428 TM: 83

January 11, 2011
Index
Gain test Getting started

· DSU U3: 200, U3: 210 · 428XL GUI U1: 37
Gap U1: 121 · DSUT TM: 131
· between receiver sections U1: 128 · FDPA428 IM: 347
General · LT428 IM: 277
· Header block 1 (SEGD) U2: 17 · TMS428 TM: 45
· Header block 2 (SEGD) U2: 19 GIS U1: 428
· Header block 3 (SEGD) U2: 20 Global
· Header Block Number (SEGD) U2: 19, · rendering, plotter U1: 585
U2: 20 Go
· LT428 parameters IM: 281, IM: 285 · starting a shot U1: 236
· Trailer blocks, number of U2: 19 · to waypoint U1: 359
Generate · Topographic view U1: 104, U1: 106
· report U1: 432 GoBook IM: 216
Generic · connecting IM: 276
· spread U1: 140 · Getting started IM: 277
· spread, description U1: 142 · Q200 IM: 275
Geodetic datum GoBook Q200
· parameters (SPS) U2: 71, U2: 82, · Backup IM: 222
U2: 119, U2: 132 · Battery IM: 218
· spheroid (SPS) U2: 71, U2: 82, · installing IM: 219
U2: 119, U2: 132 · quick guide IM: 216
Geographic · Reinstalling IM: 223
· AGC U1: 581 · resetting IM: 217
Geographic (see Topographic) GPS
Geoid U1: 434 · differential corrections, Raveon radio
Geoidal U1: 500
· model U1: 391 · differential corrections, Tracs TDMA
Geophone U1: 497
· arrangement U3: 227 · port, testing (TMS428) TM: 99
· number per trace U3: 224 · time management U1: 85
· parallel U3: 225 Grabbing
· series U3: 225 · VP U1: 393
· strings U3: 224 Graphic
Geophysical contractor (SPS) U2: 71, · driver, Linux IM: 152
U2: 81, U2: 119, U2: 131 · view, normal acquisition, OVC
Geotiff format U1: 402 U1: 666
Geozone · view, normal acquisition, VE432
· alarm U1: 423 U1: 646
· view, normal acquisition, VE464
Get
U1: 533
· Similarities, VE464 U1: 529
· view, Positioning window U1: 397
· VE432 DSD U1: 632
· VE432 DSD status U1: 614
Graphic view (see Topographic)
· VE464 DSD U1: 517 Graphics
· VE464 DSD status U1: 505 · how to select U1: 34

January 11, 2011
Index
Gravity · Line, sync, VE464 U1: 494

· test U1: 206 · SN, detour U1: 135
Gravity test, DSU U3: 208 · VE432 drive level U1: 641
Grid · VE464 drive level U1: 521
· coord. at origin (SPS) U2: 72, U2: 83, High-cut
U2: 120, U2: 133 · filter, plotter U1: 583
· origin (SPS) U2: 72, U2: 83, U2: 120, · playback filter U3: 30
U2: 133 Hilbert
Ground · transform, VE432 U1: 607
· earth resistor, FDU calibration U3: 140 Histogram
· force, monitoring, VE432 U1: 615 · view U1: 118
· stiffness, APS U2: 158 Historic
· TMS428 TM: 31 · editing type (SEGD) U2: 25
· viscosity, APS U2: 158 · range (SEGD) U2: 25
· wing nut, replacing TM: 265 · taper length (SEGD) U2: 25
Group · threshold Init value (SEGD) U2: 25
· geophone string U3: 229 · zeroing length (SEGD) U2: 25
Guest Historical
· privileges U1: 44 · Noise Editing U1: 281
Guidance History
· overview U1: 358 · Line window U1: 117
· set, VE464 U1: 528 Hold/Var U1: 285
· vibrator, enabling U1: 267 Hot
· Line U1: 79
H Hour of day (SEGD) U2: 17
Hardware
· installing IM: 39 I
HDOP, APS U2: 161 Icon U1: 25
Header ID
· external, size U1: 87 · VE464 vibrator U1: 473
Header record · vibrator, VE432 U1: 593
· description (SPS) U2: 80, U2: 130 Identity
· specification (SPS) U2: 70, U2: 118 · card U1: 80
Height Identity Card U1: 59
· antenna, format U2: 164 Immersible
Help TM: 55 · electronics IM: 258
· language U1: 40 Impedance
· send, emergeny alarm U1: 423 · geophone string U3: 225
Hide Importing
· layer (Positioning) U1: 401 · SPS files U1: 557
High Impulse
· box, detour U1: 135 · Sensor test U3: 189
· channel, detour U1: 135 Impulsive
· Line, sync, VE432 U1: 613 · process type U1: 251

January 11, 2011
Index
· Stack process type U1: 252 · TMS428 hardware TM: 31

Inactive · TMS428 software TM: 33
· units (detour) U1: 133 · TMS428 software new release TM: 36
Increment · Vehicle tracking box IM: 203
· LT428 Rcv num IM: 284 Instrument
· Marker U1: 130 · Code (I) tables (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 121
· Shot U1: 273 · Code (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 95, U2: 127,
· VP to do U1: 275 U2: 145
Index · Crosstalk U1: 205
· box U1: 25 FDU U3: 167
· Source Point U1: 232 · Distortion U1: 205
Indicator · Gain error U1: 206
· replacing TM: 271 · Noise U1: 205
Init · Phase error U1: 206
· Thresh U1: 285 · Pulse test U1: 206
Initialization, DSUT hardware TM: 132 · test limits U2: 51
Inline · test limits, LT428 IM: 289
· test record recovery U3: 99
· spacing, AGC U1: 582
· test specifications U3: 280
Input
· tests U1: 204
· resistance, FDU calibration U3: 119
· tests, CMRR (FDU) U3: 164
· servo control loop, VE432 U1: 640
· tests, Distortion (FDU) U3: 161
· servo control loop, VE464 U1: 520
· tests, FDU U3: 152
Inserting · tests, Gain&Phase U3: 157
· cartridge U1: 465 · tests, LT428 IM: 297
Install · tests, Noise U3: 154
· window U1: 64 · tests, Offset U3: 156
Installing · tests, Pulse (FDU) U3: 170
· 428-Lite IM: 56 · tests, Resistance U3: 152
· Client software IM: 119, IM: 132 Instrument tests
· DSUT hardware TM: 119 · Crosstalk
· DSUT software TM: 121 DSU3 U3: 202, U3: 212
· Ethernet plotter IM: 157 Instruments
· FDPA428, GoBook IM: 219 · Colour U1: 106
· FTP server on PC IM: 196 · Show/hide U1: 106
· Handheld PC software IM: 205
Interfacing
· hardware IM: 39
· source controller U3: 83
· laser link IM: 372
· LT428 software, CN3e IM: 210
Internal
· ADC, testing (TMS428) TM: 93
· LT428, CN3e IM: 212
· clock U1: 84
· LT428, GoBook IM: 219
· time break (SEGD) U2: 25
· patch (client) IM: 139
· patch (server) IM: 107 Interpolation U1: 586
· Redhat, client IM: 121 · sample U3: 233
· Redhat, server IM: 70 Intranet
· server software IM: 98 · address, configuring IM: 74, IM: 75,
IM: 82, IM: 89, IM: 95, IM: 123

January 11, 2011
Index
IP address Laser Link IM: 369

· 428XL local network IM: 40 · Installing IM: 372
· Client computer IM: 135 · Specifications IM: 379
· Intranet IM: 74, IM: 75, IM: 82, Last
IM: 89, IM: 95, IM: 123 · record, playback U1: 450
· LCI-428, changing IM: 42 Lat. Long
· TMS428 TM: 42 · initial line (SPS) U2: 72, U2: 83,
Irregular U2: 120, U2: 134
· LT428 layout IM: 296, IM: 298 · scale factor (SPS) U2: 72, U2: 83,
U2: 120, U2: 133
J Lat. of standard parallel(s) (SPS) U2: 71,
U2: 83, U2: 119, U2: 133
jConfig window U1: 77 Latitude
jExport window U1: 435 · reference, vibrator guidance U1: 267
jInstall window U1: 63 LAU tests
jLine window U1: 97 · Transmission TM: 96
jLog window U1: 543 · XILINX loading TM: 91
jOperation window U1: 229 LAUL-428
jOVC U1: 659 · cable replacement TM: 211
jPlotter window U1: 567 · connectors IM: 407, IM: 410
jPositioning window U1: 383 · deploying IM: 245
Julian · disassembly instructions TM: 212
· day, backup setup U1: 90 · Power supply IM: 249
Julian day (SEGD) U2: 17 · reassembly instructions TM: 213
jVE432 window U1: 589 · spacing IM: 249, IM: 250
jVE464 window U1: 469 LAULS
jVibOther window U1: 655 · Disassembly instructions TM: 253
· Re-assembly instructions TM: 255
Launch
K · quick, TMS428 tests TM: 58
Kit Launcher
· tools TM: 194 · bar, customizing U1: 49
· icons U1: 48
L LAUR U1: 184
· disassembly instructions TM: 230
Lab · reassembly instructions TM: 231
· distance to, alarm U1: 425 LAUR-428 IM: 316
Label LAUX
· external U1: 443 · in TMS428 test system IM: 31
· properties U1: 428 LAUX-428
· tape, external U1: 88 · connectors IM: 411, IM: 412
Landscape · deploying IM: 245
· plotter U1: 584 · disassembly instructions TM: 218,
Language TM: 224
· help U1: 40 · Power supply IM: 249

January 11, 2011
Index
· reassembly instructions TM: 219, · Zeroing Taper (noise) U1: 283

TM: 225 Level
LAUXS · alert, used disk space U1: 467
· Disassembly instructions TM: 259 · auto, VE432 vib drive U1: 641
· Re-assembly instructions TM: 260 · auto, VE464 vib drive U1: 520
Layer Licence
· rename (Positioning) U1: 401 · client IM: 149
· show/hide (Positioning) U1: 401 · code, entering U1: 66
Layout · information about U1: 46
· LT428 IM: 285 · LT428 IM: 277
· setup U1: 126 · Plotter U1: 67
LCI Lift
· oscillator, adjusting TM: 17 · up delay, VE432 U1: 642
LCI-428 · up delay, VE464 U1: 521
· address, selecting U1: 66 Limit
· installing IM: 45 · instrument test U2: 51
· IP address, changing IM: 42 Limits (see Test limits)
· repairing TM: 18 Line
· replacing U1: 64 · check U1: 212
Leak · data rate U3: 271
· testing TM: 273 · end plug IM: 248
Leakage · Error Recovery U1: 352
· error U1: 144 · Generic U1: 141
· error (SEGD) U2: 36 · mapping to a logical line U1: 148
· limit (SEGD) U2: 36 · name (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 78, U2: 91,
· Line port, TMS428 TM: 94 U2: 95, U2: 96, U2: 125,
· Sensor test U1: 208 U2: 127, U2: 141, U2: 145,
· test U3: 181 U2: 146
· Test circuitry (LAU) U1: 144 · name, APS U2: 158
· Test limit U1: 124 · name, COG, format U2: 164
· test, Field (TMS428) TM: 80 · Nb Inc, LT428 IM: 284
· value (SEGD) U2: 36 · number U1: 120
LED · number format (SPS) U2: 72, U2: 84,
· Run, testing (TMS428) TM: 93 U2: 120, U2: 134
LED test · port, leakage test (TMS428) TM: 94
· DSU TM: 165 · port, transmission test (TMS428)
Length TM: 96
· pilot, other vibrator systems U1: 657 · power polarity (TMS428) TM: 99
· pilot, OVC U1: 662 · sequence number, SPS U2: 119,
· record (SEGD) U2: 26 U2: 131
· record, process type U1: 242 · skipping U1: 142
· sweep, other vibrator systems U1: 656 · socket, replacing TM: 266
· sweep, OVC U1: 662 · splitting U1: 130
· time, plotter U1: 586 · Test, LT428 IM: 282
· Zeroing (noise) U1: 283 · troubleshooting U1: 213
LINE connector

January 11, 2011
Index
· LAUX IM: 411 · dB/octave, VE464 U1: 481

Line Tester Log
· operating guide IM: 273 · file, DSU repair TM: 153
Linear · files, compressing IM: 116
· basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 597 Log in
· basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 477 · connecting to server U1: 38
· Phase U1: 84 · DSUT TM: 131
· phase filter U3: 42 · installing server software IM: 99
Link · name U1: 40
· FDU-428, examples IM: 232 Logging
· Number of FDUs, update (LT428) · post-annotation U1: 85
IM: 312 Logging in
· Number of FDUs, update (TMS428) · first time IM: 148
TM: 110 Logical
List · line mapping U1: 148
· box U1: 25 Login IM: 128
Listening Long. of central meridian (SPS) U2: 72,
· time U1: 243 U2: 83, U2: 120, U2: 133
Lite Look
· connectors IM: 407 · Automatic U1: 270
· installing IM: 56 · automatic U1: 143
· installing, operating system IM: 86, · manual U1: 143
IM: 92 · properties U1: 143
Live seis traces, number of U2: 23 · sensors U1: 104, U1: 106
LLX400. See Laser Link · test (TMS428) TM: 100
LLX400. See Laser link · VE432 DSD U1: 626
Load Look&Feel U1: 41
· Thresh U1: 285 Loop
Loading · LRU U1: 200
· Custom sweep (VE464 DPG) U1: 522 · servo control, VE432 U1: 640
· DSUT software TM: 121 · servo control, VE464 U1: 520
· system parameters U1: 551 Loss
· TMS428 software TM: 33 · Fibre Optics repairs TM: 324
Local Low
· acquisition, VE432 U1: 630 · box, detour U1: 135
· acquisition, VE464 U1: 526 · channel, detour U1: 135
· disk U1: 66 · SN, detour U1: 135
· ellipsoidal model U1: 391 · stacks, number of U2: 40
· network IM: 34 · Trace U1: 284
· oscillator, testing (TMS428) TM: 96 · Trace Percentage (SEGD) U2: 25
· user U1: 39 · Trace Value U1: 284
LOG · Trace Value (SEGD) U2: 25
· dB/Hz, VE432 U1: 598 · VE432 drive level U1: 641
· dB/Hz, VE464 U1: 478 · VE464 drive level U1: 521
· dB/octave, VE432 U1: 601 Low-cut

January 11, 2011
Index
· Filter frequency (SEGD) U2: 22 · Tap test IM: 282, IM: 309
· Filter slope (SEGD) U2: 22 LTO address, changing IM: 171
· filter, plotter U1: 583 LXIU. See Laser link
· Playback filter U3: 30 LXIU-400. See Laser Link
LP traceability, DSU TM: 154
LRU IM: 316
· Desensitization IM: 325, U1: 191
M
· disassembly instructions TM: 238 MAC address U1: 70
· Frequency IM: 322, U1: 187 MACHA U3: 93
· Half-duplex IM: 321 Macha
· reassembly instructions TM: 239 · wiring IM: 418
· Sleep U1: 199 Macha blaster U1: 70
· Time Division Multiplex U1: 192 Maintenance
LSI IM: 26, IM: 266 · field electronics TM: 193
· Instrument tests U1: 302 · Field equipment TM: 17
· Shooting U1: 295 · TCXO on LCI board TM: 17
· TB widow calibration U1: 296 Management
LSS IM: 26 · sessions U1: 45
· channel Instrument tests U1: 302 · time U1: 84
· Instrument tests U1: 302 Manual
· Shooting U1: 295 · Export U1: 439
· TB window calibration U1: 296 · Look U1: 143
LT · noise editing U1: 285
· Line Nb IM: 283 · scale, Line window U1: 118
· Position IM: 281, IM: 283 · shooting U1: 270
· Rcv Nb IM: 284 Manual/Auto
· Sensor Type Nb IM: 285 · noise editing threshold U1: 285
LT428 · VE432 U1: 625
· connecting IM: 276 · VE464 U1: 510
· Exec Line Test IM: 282 Manufacturer’s
· Exec Transverse Test IM: 282 · code (SEGD) U2: 17
· Field test IM: 298 · serial nb (SEGD) U2: 17
· Getting started IM: 277 Map grid
· Instrument test IM: 297 · easting (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 92,
· main menu IM: 280 U2: 125, U2: 142
· operating guide IM: 273 · northing (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 92,
· Power-on IM: 277 U2: 125, U2: 142
· results IM: 303 Mapping
· running Line tests IM: 290 · line U1: 148
· running Transverse tests IM: 300 Marker
· Save Rcv Tilt model IM: 296 · FDU2S channels U1: 170
· Self-test IM: 279 · increment U1: 130
· Set general parameters IM: 281, · Line Layout setup U1: 127
IM: 285
Marking, stop U1: 135
· Set LT position IM: 281, IM: 283
· Set Test Limits IM: 281, IM: 287
Mass

January 11, 2011
Index
· acceleration, monitoring, VE432 · disk space U1: 466

U1: 615 Monoline U1: 148
· overload, APS U2: 161 Mounting
· velocity, monitoring, VE432 U1: 615 · parts IM: 59
· warning, APS U2: 160 Mouse
Master · Buttons U1: 25
· Ethernet radio bridge IM: 385 · buttons U1: 25
· oscillator, LCI TM: 17 · Centre button U1: 110
Master/slave Move
· cabling IM: 54 · alarm U1: 425
· operation U1: 364 MRU
Max · configuring U1: 72
· number of FDUs IM: 250, IM: 251 Multi-component
· number of traces U3: 273 · recording (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 86,
· of max, Aux (SEGD) U2: 26 U2: 121, U2: 136
· of max, Seis (SEGD) U2: 26 Multi-DPG configuration IM: 48
· speed U1: 426 Multi-gun U1: 361
· speed, scale U1: 395 Multimeter
MDR IM: 200 · calibration, TMS428 TM: 30
Media Multimodule IM: 50
· copy U3: 14 Multiple
Meter · tests U1: 210
· calibration TM: 53 Multi-screen IM: 153
· reset TM: 52
Mute
Micro-seismic · channel U1: 136
· enabling U1: 267
· usage U1: 351
Min N
· High Drive, VE432 U1: 642 Name
· High Drive, VE464 U1: 521 · crew U1: 82
· Low Drive, VE432 U1: 641 · feature, colour map U1: 429
· Low Drive, VE464 U1: 521 · Log in U1: 40
Minicom IM: 116 · plotter U1: 70
Minimum · property, query builder U1: 431
· Phase U1: 84 · user U1: 59
· phase filter U3: 62 NAS IM: 29
Minute of day (SEGD) U2: 17 · archiving system U1: 71
Mode · exporting to U1: 458
· display, plotter U1: 585 · Rescue mode IM: 193
· LT428 display IM: 285 NAS system IM: 181
· operating U1: 266 · connecting IM: 183
Model · IP address on user network IM: 186
· ellipsoidal U1: 391 · reinstalling IM: 190
· geoidal U1: 391 · shock-mount parts IM: 182
Monitoring · user network IM: 189

January 11, 2011
Index
Navigation Normal
· option U1: 292 · acquisition OVC U1: 666
· shooting mode U1: 291 · acquisition, VE432 U1: 645
Nb · acquisition, VE464 U1: 532
· Sensor/Rcv Pt, LT428 IM: 285 · mode, LT428 display IM: 285
Network Normalization
· DSD, Navigation U1: 291 · plotter U1: 581
· VE432 DSD U1: 593 Northing, COG, format U2: 164
· VE464 DSD U1: 473 Notch U1: 583
Networking · frequency (SEGD) U2: 22
· 428XL local network IM: 40 · playback filter U3: 30
· Client computer IM: 135 Num
· TMS428 TM: 42 · Sensor Type, LT428 IM: 285
Next Number of
· Plot U1: 570 · Auxes (SEGD) U2: 23
· record, playback U1: 451 · blocks of General Trailer (SEGD)
NFS U2: 19
· disk setup U1: 445 · channel sets per record (SEGD) U2: 18
· server U1: 71 · channels (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 85,
NFS disk U2: 121, U2: 135
· exporting to U1: 438 · channels in this channel set (SEGD)
No U2: 21
· move U1: 425 · dead Seis traces (SEGD) U2: 23
· reply U1: 424 · DPG modules U1: 69
No. sub arrays, nom depth (SPS) U2: 90, · FDUs between LAUs, max IM: 250,
U2: 140 IM: 251
Noise · FDUs in link, LT428 IM: 312
· Editing U1: 281 · FDUs in link, TMS428 TM: 110
· editing, setup U1: 280 · geophones per trace U3: 224
· elimination type (SEGD) U2: 25 · live Seis traces (SEGD) U2: 23
· Instrument test U1: 205 · plotters U1: 70
· Sensor test U1: 208 · sample skew 32 byte extensions
· Test limit U1: 124 (SEGD) U2: 18
· test record result recovery U3: 101 · samples in trace (SEGD) U2: 23
· test, FDU (Instrument) U3: 154 · samples per trace U2: 30
· test, Field (TMS428) TM: 79 · samples per trace (SEGD) U2: 32
· test, Instrument (TMS428) TM: 82 · Seis traces (SEGD) U2: 23
· test, Sensor (FDU) U3: 175 · splices, Fibre Optics TM: 324
Noise test · stacks low (SEGD) U2: 40
· stacks noisy (SEGD) U2: 40
· DSU U3: 199, U3: 209, TM: 166
· subscans exponent (SEGD) U2: 21
Noisy
· traces (SEGD) U2: 23
· stacks, number of U2: 40
· traces, max U3: 273
· Trace % U1: 284
· vibrators in pattern, VE432 U1: 621
· trace percentage (SEGD) U2: 25
· vibrators in pattern, VE464 U1: 506
Nominal towing depth U2: 90, U2: 140 · windows (SEGD) U2: 25

January 11, 2011
Index
· windows, noise editing U1: 283 Operation

Numeric · table U1: 232
· pilot, additional U1: 494 Optical Fibre
· pilot, choosing U1: 493 · TFOI, connecting IM: 246
· pilot, correlation U1: 245 Option
· view, Line window U1: 116 · button U1: 25
· view, normal acquisition, OVC Options
U1: 668 · Navigation U1: 292
· view, normal acquisition, VE432 · Slip-sweep U1: 268, U1: 317
U1: 649 Organization
· view, normal acquisition, · code U2: 167
VE464,VE464 U1: 536 Orientation
Nunits, len, width (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 75, · LT428 IM: 292
U2: 87, U2: 88, U2: 122, U2: 123, · pattern, VE432 U1: 622
U2: 137, U2: 138 · pattern, VE464 U1: 507
Nut · plotter page U1: 584
· wing, replacing TM: 265 · test, LAUL (TMS428) TM: 98
NVIDIA IM: 155 Oscillator
Nyquist U1: 83 · local, testing (TMS428) TM: 96
· Master (LCI) TM: 17
O Output
· Dump U1: 245
Observer · stack U1: 245
· comments, setup U1: 287 · Xdump U1: 245
· privileges U1: 44 OVC U1: 659
· reports U1: 561 Overload, APS U2: 161
ODU IM: 382
Off
· Line U1: 94 P
Offset Page
· removing U3: 222 · setup, plotter U1: 584
· test U3: 156 Parallel
· test, Sensor U3: 177 · geophone U3: 225
· to coord. location (SPS) U2: 71, Parameters
U2: 81, U2: 119, U2: 131 · loading (Log) U1: 550
On · saving (Log) U1: 550
· Line U1: 94 · saving/loading IM: 104
Only · system, editing U1: 550
· errors, TMS428 report TM: 59 Parts
Open · DSU-428, spare TM: 202
· session U1: 38 · FDU, spare TM: 196
· Test plan TM: 51 · LAUL-428, spare TM: 210
· test report, TMS428 TM: 70 · LAUX-428, spare TM: 217
Operating · LAUXS-428, spare TM: 224
· mode U1: 266 Password

January 11, 2011
Index
· DSUT TM: 131 · digital, additional U1: 494

· expiry date U1: 43 · digital, choosing U1: 493
· opening a session U1: 40 · digital, correlation U1: 245
Paste U1: 34 · length, other vibrator systems U1: 657
Patch · length, OVC U1: 662
· client IM: 139 Pilot length (SEGD) U2: 26
· server IM: 107 Ping IM: 43
Path Planting
· colour U1: 114 · tool, DSU3BV-428 IM: 243
Pattern · tool, DSU-428 IM: 236
· number, creating, VE432 U1: 621 Plate Warning, APS U2: 160
· number, creating, VE464 U1: 506 Playback
· orientation, VE432 U1: 622 · filters U3: 29
· orientation, VE464 U1: 507 · record U1: 449
· setup, VE432 U1: 621 Plot U1: 584
· setup, VE464 U1: 506 · abort U1: 570
· vibrator, choosing U1: 262 · Again U1: 570
PC · Next U1: 570
· Handheld, installing IM: 205 Plotter
PCMCIA · AGC U1: 580
· tools, VE432 U1: 642 · banner U1: 571
Peak · ethernet, installing IM: 157
· distortion, APS U2: 158 · general IM: 30
· force, APS U2: 158 · licence U1: 67
· phase, APS U2: 158 · mode, display U1: 585
Peg (see Topographic stake) · name U1: 70
Period · number of U1: 70
· monitoring, used disk space U1: 467 · parameters U1: 580
Periodical verification, DSUT TM: 118 · processing U1: 580
Peripherals IM: 151 · scaling U1: 582
· Install setup U1: 69 · type U1: 70
Permission U1: 44 Plug
Phase · cleaning IM: 228, TM: 275
· angle (SEGD) U2: 20 · process type, FO U1: 242
· Control (SEGD) U2: 20 Plug, FM4
· error (Instrument test) U1: 206 · SRHRF cable TM: 289
· Linear U1: 84 · ST+ cable TM: 315
· Minimum U1: 84 · WPSR cable TM: 304
· test, FDU U3: 157 Point
· test, TMS428 TM: 83 · Code, FDU2S channels U1: 169
Phase test · Number (Marker) U1: 129
· DSU U3: 200, U3: 210 Point (to) U1: 26
Phase, APS U2: 158 Point Code
Pilot · DSU channels U1: 155
· basic signal, VE432 U1: 612 · FDU channels U1: 122

January 11, 2011
Index
· SPS U2: 77, U2: 91, U2: 125, Power

U2: 141 · connector, LAUL-428 IM: 410
Point Depth (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 91, · connector, LAUX IM: 411
U2: 125, U2: 141 · polarity, line (TMS428) TM: 99
Point Index · requirements IM: 44
· SPS U2: 77, U2: 78, U2: 91, U2: 95, · socket, replacing TM: 268
U2: 125, U2: 127, U2: 141, · test, LAU TM: 91
U2: 145 Power supply
Point Index, APS U2: 158 · field electronics IM: 249
Point Index, format U2: 164 Power-off
Point number · Line, LT428 IM: 293
· COG, format U2: 164 Power-on
· SPS U2: 77, U2: 78, U2: 91, U2: 95, · Line, LT428 IM: 293
U2: 125, U2: 127, U2: 141, · LT428 IM: 277
U2: 145 · test, LT428 IM: 293
Point number, APS U2: 158 · Transverse, LT428 IM: 301
Point record Power-up
· description (SPS) U2: 91, U2: 141 · TMS428 TM: 46
· specification (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 125 P-P bar/m,prim/bubble (SPS) U2: 90,
Polarity U2: 140
· 3C U3: 261 Preamplifier
· battery, test (TMS428) TM: 92 · 0 dB gain, FDU calibration U3: 115
· FDU input IM: 409 · 12 dB gain, FDU calibration U3: 144
· FDU2S takeout IM: 413 Pressure
· SEGD U2: 18 · sensor, enabling, VE464 U1: 527
· test, FDU (TMS428) TM: 81 Pressure Overload, APS U2: 161
· test, line power (TMS428) TM: 99 Prestack within field units (SEGD)
· trace U3: 27 U2: 25
Port Preview
· consumption, TMS428 TM: 95 · colour mapped attributes U1: 429
· switching test (TMS428) TM: 98 Printer IM: 30
· voltage, testing (TMS428) TM: 92 Privileges U1: 44
Portrait Process
· plotter U1: 584 · Type setup, generating U1: 259
Pos. proc. contractor (SPS) U2: 71, · type, Log shooting setup U1: 553
U2: 81, U2: 119, U2: 131 · type, overview U1: 241
POSC U2: 167 · Type, SEGD U2: 25
Positioning · Type, setup U1: 262
· contractor (SPS) U2: 71, U2: 81, Processing
U2: 119, U2: 131 · capacity U3: 271
· layers U1: 385 · Crossline spacing, plotter U1: 582
Post-annotation · filter, plotter U1: 583
· logging U1: 85 · Geographic AGC, plotter U1: 581
Post-plot date of issue (SPS) U2: 71, · Inline spacing, plotter U1: 582
U2: 80, U2: 119, U2: 130 · Normalization, plotter U1: 581

January 11, 2011
Index
· plotter U1: 580 · choice, VE432 vib U1: 618

· Time, exponential U1: 581 · choice, VE464 vib U1: 504
· Window length (AGC) U1: 581 · data (How to view) U1: 111
· Wz velocity, plotter U1: 581 · extended, VE432 vib U1: 618
Producer · extended, VE464 vib U1: 505
· code U1: 87 · limits, OVC U1: 664
Project code and description (SPS) · limits, VE432 vib U1: 617
U2: 72, U2: 84, U2: 120, U2: 134 · limits, VE464 vib U1: 503
Projection U1: 434 QT-400 IM: 271
· type (SPS) U2: 71, U2: 82, U2: 119, Quadrant bearing of H256 (SPS) U2: 72,
U2: 132 U2: 84, U2: 120, U2: 134
· type, setup U1: 390 Quality
· zone (SPS) U2: 71, U2: 82, U2: 119, · COG radius threshold U1: 393
U2: 133 · Control IM: 30
Projection Type setup · Vib position accuracy U1: 394
· Projection U1: 434 · warning setup U1: 392
Properties Quality Control
· in graphic view, Line U1: 112 · check records (SPS) U2: 76, U2: 124
· Look, Line U1: 143 Query
· object label U1: 428 · add to U1: 432
· test plan, TMS428 TM: 57 · builder U1: 431
Property Quick
· name, query builder U1: 431 · Launch, TMS428 tests TM: 58
Protocol · tester, QT-400 IM: 271
· source controllers U3: 83
Pseudorandom
· basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 604
R
· basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 483 R,S,X file quality control (SPS) U2: 76,
Pulse U2: 124
· basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 603 Radio
· basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 487 · bridge, ethernet IM: 381
· Instrument test U1: 206 · delay, measuring, VE432 U1: 637
· Sensor test U1: 209 · Delay, VE432 U1: 635
· test, FDU U3: 170 · delay, VE432 U1: 639
· management, VE432 vib U1: 614
· management, VE464 vib U1: 496
Q · telemetry, deployment IM: 315
Q200 IM: 275 · telemetry, setting up U1: 184
· Backup IM: 222 Radius
· Battery IM: 218 · alarm, distance to camp U1: 425
· connecting IM: 276 · alarm, distance to recording unit
· Getting started IM: 277 U1: 425
· installing IM: 219 · shooting setup, Log U1: 552
· quick guide IM: 216 Random
· Reinstalling IM: 223 · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 604
QC · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 483

January 11, 2011
Index
· Lift up delay, VE464 U1: 521 · point number (SEGD) U2: 32

Rate · point, skipping U1: 141, U1: 150
· refresh U1: 54 · position history U1: 564
· sample U1: 83 · section U1: 121
Raveon radio · section, marking U1: 128
· setup U1: 500 · Tilt model, LT428 IM: 296
Raw · Type Layout, LT428 IM: 285
· Impulsive Stack process type U1: 252 Record
· process type, Correlation U1: 254 · disk, setup U1: 89
· servo control, VE432 U1: 641 · identification (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 78,
· servo control, VE464 U1: 520 U2: 125, U2: 127
· Vib Stack process type U1: 257 · identification, APS U2: 158
Rcv · identification, COG, format U2: 164
· Nb Increment, LT428 IM: 284 · Instrument tests U1: 202
Read · last, playback U1: 450
· traceability, FDU (TMS428) TM: 86 · length (SEGD) U2: 26
· traceability, LAU (TMS428) TM: 104 · length, Intrument tests U1: 205
· user info (TMS428) TM: 101 · length, process type U1: 242
Ready · next, playback U1: 451
· fleet U1: 276 · test result recovery U3: 99
Re-assembling · type (SEGD) U2: 18
· DSU TM: 204 Record length U3: 273
· FDU2S TM: 250 · SEGD U2: 18
· LAULS TM: 255 Recovering
· LAUXS TM: 260 · instrument test records U3: 99
Reassembling Recovery
· FDU TM: 198 · line error, Micro-seismic U1: 352
· LAUL TM: 213 Redhat
· LAUR TM: 231 · installing, client IM: 121
· LAUX TM: 219, TM: 225 · installing, server IM: 70
· LRU TM: 239 Reference
· TFOI TM: 342, TM: 348 · DSU3, DSUT TM: 119, TM: 143
· TREP-428 TM: 246 · latitude, vibrator guidance U1: 267
Reboot · resistors, calibration U3: 113
· server U1: 47 · signal, VE432 DSD U1: 615
Receiver · voltage, calibration U3: 113
· code (Rx) tables (SPS) U2: 74, · voltage, FDU (TMS428) TM: 84
U2: 122 · voltage, FDU calibration U3: 115
· index (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 96, U2: 127, Refraction
U2: 146 · delay, process type U1: 243
· line number (SEGD) U2: 32 · delay, SEGD U2: 24
· point easting (SEGD) U2: 34 Refresh
· point elevation (SEGD) U2: 34 · rate U1: 54
· point index (SEGD) U2: 32 Registering
· point northing (SEGD) U2: 34 · user U1: 43

January 11, 2011
Index
Reinstalling Reply
· TMS428 software TM: 36 · alarm U1: 424
Relation record Report
· description (SPS) U2: 95, U2: 145 · APS U1: 563
· specification (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 127 · COG U1: 563
Release · errors only (TMS428) TM: 59
· tape drive U1: 448 · generate, query U1: 432
Remote · Observer U1: 561
· connection to server, Linux IM: 142 · publishing
· connection to server, Windows Publish
IM: 143 reports U1: 547
· network IM: 35, IM: 36, IM: 37 · receiver position U1: 564
· user U1: 39 · test, TMS428 TM: 68
· user, installing IM: 132 Repository U1: 66
Rename Rescue
· layers (Positioning) U1: 401 · NAS system IM: 193
Rendering Reset
· global, plotter U1: 585 · button U1: 32
· setup, plotter U1: 584 · Meter TM: 52
Repair · queries and classification U1: 430
· assistant, DSU TM: 149, TM: 151 · Tester Unit TM: 52
· LCI-428 TM: 18 Resetting
· log file, DSUT TM: 153 · CN3e IM: 208
Repairing · GoBook Q200 IM: 217
· SRHRF cable TM: 280 Resistance
· ST cable TM: 276 · error (SEGD) U2: 35
· ST+ cable TM: 276 · high limit (SEGD) U2: 35
· WPSR cable TM: 280 · input, FDU calibration U3: 119
Repeater · low limit (SEGD) U2: 35
· LAUX-428, Marker setup U1: 128 · Sensor test U1: 207
· Raveon radio U1: 501 · test network, FDU calibration U3: 128
· Tracs TDMA U1: 499 · test, FDU U3: 152
· Transverse IM: 248 · test, Field (TMS428) TM: 81
Replacing · test, Instrument (TMS428) TM: 82
· cable, LAUL TM: 211 · test, Sensor U3: 178
· cable, TFOI TM: 334 · value (SEGD) U2: 35
· connector, Fibre Optics TM: 360 Response, Channel filter U3: 41
· FDU connector TM: 265 Restart
· ground wing nut TM: 265 · server U1: 47
· indicators TM: 271 Retrieval
· LCI-428 U1: 64 · Wireline telemetry U1: 95
· Line & Trans sockets TM: 266 Return
· Power socket TM: 268 · Pilot, VE432 U1: 615
· TFOI board TM: 339, TM: 347 · signal, VE432 DSD U1: 614
· XDEV sockets TM: 269 · sweep, VE432 vib U1: 615

January 11, 2011
Index
Reverse · Rcv Tilt Model, LT428 IM: 296

· button U1: 32 · Thresh U1: 286
Reversed Saving
· Marking option U1: 130 · automatic, TMS428 reports TM: 58
Revision · results, LT428 IM: 306
· SEGD U1: 87 · system parameters U1: 551
Revision Number (SEGD) U2: 19 Saving, automatic
Rewind · DSUT TM: 146
· tape U1: 448 Scalability
Right · installation settings U1: 73
· click, Line window U1: 112 Scale
Role U1: 44 · button U1: 26
Run · factor (SPS) U2: 72, U2: 83, U2: 120,
· LED, testing (TMS428) TM: 93 U2: 133
· TMS428 tests TM: 52 · histograms U1: 118
Running Scaling
· Line tests, LT428 IM: 290 · plotter U1: 582
· Tests Scan Type
DSUT TM: 141 · Header (SEGD) U2: 21
· tests, TMS428 TM: 66 · Number (SEGD) U2: 31
· Transverse tests, LT428 IM: 300 · per record (SEGD) U2: 18
RVT300 IM: 200 Scrollbar U1: 26
Sealing TM: 273
Searching
S · LT428 results IM: 305
S N (serial number) Second
· detour U1: 135 · Notch Frequency (SEGD) U2: 22
Sample · of minute (SEGD) U2: 17
· conversion to mV U3: 219 SEGD
· int. Record Len. (SPS) U2: 73, · 3C polarity U3: 261
U2: 121 · Code U1: 125
· int., Record Length (SPS) U2: 85, · format U2: 13
U2: 135 · format, Rev 2.1 U2: 43
· interpolation U3: 233 · revision, choosing U1: 87
· Rate U1: 83 · setup U1: 86
· Rate, LT428 IM: 285 · Trace Blocking U1: 444
· skew extensions, number of U2: 18 Seis traces, number of U2: 23
· skew, SEGD U2: 31 Seismic
· to mV conversion factor U2: 40 · datum (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 92, U2: 125,
Sample Rate U2: 142
· SEGD U2: 23 · instrument header records (SPS)
Samples U2: 85, U2: 135
· in trace, number of U2: 23 · receiver header records (SPS) U2: 87,
· per trace, number of U2: 30, U2: 32 U2: 137
Save · setup, Operation U1: 266

January 11, 2011
Index
· source header records (SPS) U2: 88, · Type, FDU2S channels U1: 169
U2: 138 · Type, LT428 IM: 285
· trace scaling U1: 582 Sensor Type
Seismonitor U1: 109 · DSU channels U1: 154
· DSUT TM: 144 · FDU channels U1: 123
· gain U1: 109 · Number (sensor tests) U2: 34
· Sensor test U1: 211 · SEGD code U2: 33
Select U1: 26 Sequence
· VE432 vib (Look) U1: 626 · Line, SPS U2: 119, U2: 131
Selecting · test, DSUT TM: 139
· graphical objects U1: 34 Sequencer
· in graphic view U1: 110 · Shallow U3: 91
· table cells U1: 33 Sequential
· text U1: 33 · time, plotter U1: 585
· traces to plot U1: 577 · trace, plotter U1: 585
Selection Serial
· create U1: 432 · number, changing (TMS428) TM: 105
Self-test · number, detour U1: 135
· LAU (TMS428) TM: 90 · number, tape U1: 88
· LT428 IM: 279 Series
Senior · geophones U3: 225
· Observer, privileges U1: 44 Server
Sensor · administration U1: 42
· Coulour code U1: 104 · connectors IM: 60
· Leakage test U1: 208 · FTP U1: 71
· Noise test U1: 208 · ID IM: 103
· num/Rcv pnt, LT428 IM: 285 · log on to U1: 38
· Pulse test U1: 209 · NFS U1: 71
· Resistance test U1: 207 · software, installing IM: 69, IM: 98
· Seismonitor U1: 211 · start/stop U1: 47
· sensitivity (SEGD) U2: 38 Server ID IM: 149
· show/hide U1: 104 Servo
· test limits U1: 123 · input, VE432 U1: 640
· tests U1: 207 · input, VE464 U1: 520
· tests, CMRR U3: 186 · setting, VE432 U1: 640
· tests, Distortion U3: 191 · setting, VE464 U1: 519
· tests, FDU U3: 175 Session
· tests, Impulse U3: 189 · manager U1: 45
· tests, Leakage U3: 181 · opening U1: 38
· tests, Look U1: 143 Set
· tests, Noise (FDU) U3: 175 · channel, number per record U1: 87
· tests, Offset U3: 177 · DSD, OVC U1: 666
· tests, Resistance U3: 178 · Guidance, VE464 U1: 528
· tests, Tilt U3: 184 · Servo, VE432 U1: 640
· Tilt model U1: 208 · Servo, VE464 U1: 519
· Tilt test U1: 208

January 11, 2011
Index
· tape U1: 92 Shortcuts

· tape, creating U1: 442 · tests TM: 55
· VE432 DSD U1: 631 Shot
· VE464 DSD U1: 515 · automation U1: 268
Sets, channel U2: 18 · Depth, charge len. (SPS) U2: 76,
Settings U2: 124
· browser U1: 40 · depth, charge len. (SPS) U2: 89,
· help U1: 40 U2: 139
Setup · Id U1: 260
· Crew, OVC U1: 661 · Id, Log shooting setup U1: 553
· DSUT TM: 137 · increment U1: 273
· Observer comments U1: 287 · Nb, APS U2: 160
· VE432 Crew, vibrators U1: 592 · number (SEGD) U2: 23
· VE464 Crew, vibrators U1: 472 · starting U1: 236
SFL ShotPro
· Spread First Line U1: 262 · install U1: 69
SFN · interfacing U3: 87
· Spread First Number U1: 262 · wiring IM: 416, IM: 417
SGD-S Show
· Blaster cable IM: 415 · layer (Positioning) U1: 401
SGDS U3: 94 Shutdown
SGS · server U1: 47
· shooting system U1: 70 Signal
SH geophone IM: 233 · return sweep, VE432 U1: 615
Shallow Similarities
· mode, enabling U1: 267 · VE464, radio U1: 529
· Sequencer U3: 91 Similarity
Shallow-water U1: 361 · test, radio, VE432 U1: 615
Shapefile U1: 402 Simultaneous mode U3: 271
Shock Single
· mount parts IM: 59 · mode, recording specifications U3: 271
Shock-mount Size
· Cartridge drive IM: 163 · external header U1: 87
· NAS system IM: 182 · vert. stk fold (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 123
Shooter U1: 288 Size, vert. stk fold (SPS) U2: 88, U2: 138
Shooting U1: 288 Skew, sample, number of extensions
· LSI IM: 266 U2: 18
· LSS IM: 26, U1: 295 Skip
· Navigation mode U1: 291 · channel U1: 146
· setup, Log U1: 552 Skipping
· system U1: 69 · lines (spread description) U1: 142
· system, connecting IM: 49 · receiver points U1: 141
· systems, interfacing U3: 83 · receiver points (detour) U1: 150
Shortcut Slave
· Line window U1: 112 · 428XL U3: 84

January 11, 2011
Index
· Ethernet radio bridge IM: 385 · line bearing, VE464 U1: 508
· VE432 DPG U1: 593 · Line Number (SEGD) U2: 20
· VE464 DPG U1: 473 · northing (SEGD) U2: 26
Slave. See Master/Slave. · Point Index U1: 232
Sleep · Point Index (SEGD) U2: 20
· LRU U1: 199 · Point Number (SEGD) U2: 20
Slip · point setup, generating U1: 265
· time U1: 317 · point, setup U1: 260
· time, selecting U1: 278 · Receiver U1: 261
Slip-sweep IM: 48, U1: 317 · Set Number (SEGD) U2: 20
· enable U1: 268 · type, setup U1: 272
· mode used (SEGD) U2: 26 Source controllers U3: 83
Snaking U1: 130 Space, disk
· DSU U1: 156 · DSUT TM: 128
· FDU U1: 151 Spacing
· FDU2S U1: 180 · crossline (AGC) U1: 582
Software · DSU3 IM: 251
· e428, licence U1: 66 · FDU IM: 250
· Handheld PC, installing IM: 205 · inline (AGC) U1: 582
· installing, CN3e IM: 212 · LAU IM: 250
· installing, GoBook IM: 219 Spare
· installing, TMS428 TM: 33 · DSU-428 parts TM: 202
· New release TM: 42 · FDU parts TM: 196
· patch (client) IM: 139 · LAUL-428 parts TM: 210
· patch (server) IM: 107 · LAUX-428 parts TM: 217
· updating U1: 223 · LAUXS-428 parts TM: 224
· version (SEGD) U2: 26 Spatial
Software, installing · filtering, Positioning window U1: 386
· CN3e IM: 210 · query U1: 400
· server IM: 98 Specifications
Soil, drill method (SPS) U2: 76, U2: 89, · 428XL U3: 265
U2: 124, U2: 139 · DSUT TM: 116
Source · Instrument tests U3: 280
· aux nb (SEGD) U2: 26 · laser link IM: 379
· code (Sx) tables (SPS) U2: 75, · TMS428 TM: 27
U2: 123 Speed
· COG file, format U2: 164 · alarm U1: 427
· control, LSS IM: 26, IM: 266 · maximum U1: 426
· controller, in line IM: 266 · maximum, scale U1: 395
· controller, time management U1: 85 Spike
· easting (SEGD) U2: 26 · editing U1: 368
· elevation (SEGD) U2: 26 Splicing
· Explosive U1: 273 · SRHRF cable TM: 280
· Line U1: 261 · ST+ cable TM: 276
· line bearing, VE432 U1: 623 · WPSR cable TM: 280

January 11, 2011
Index
Split · Low U2: 40

· line U1: 130 · Noisy U2: 40
Spread Stake (see Topographic stake)
· absolute U1: 138 Standard
· generic U1: 140 · process type U1: 242
· layout conventions IM: 255 Start
· number (SEGD) U2: 23 · colour map scale U1: 429
· setup U1: 137 · time, plotter U1: 586
· SFL U1: 262 Starting
· SFN U1: 262 · 428 server U1: 47
· Superspread U1: 263 · DSUT428 TM: 131
· Superspread, Line window U1: 139 · FDPA428 IM: 347
· type U1: 261 · LT428 IM: 277
· type (SEGD) U2: 24 · TMS428 TM: 45
SPS Static correction (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 91,
· exporting U1: 559 U2: 125, U2: 141
· format, initial U2: 63 Statics U3: 233
· importing U1: 557 Statistics
· Rev. 2.1 U2: 109 · DSUT TM: 157
· Sercel (over 10000 traces) U2: 106 · OVC U1: 670
SPS-like file format U2: 157 · VE432 U1: 652
SQC · VE464 U1: 540
· dump to U1: 267 Status
· dump, VE432 U1: 341 · codes, VE432 DPG and DSD U1: 651
· dump, VE464 U1: 328 · codes, VE464 DPG and DSD U1: 538
SQC Dump mode U1: 328 · VE432 DSD, get U1: 614
SRHRF cable · VE464 DSD, get U1: 505
· splicing TM: 280 Step
ST cable · negative U1: 307
· splicing TM: 276 · Vibroseismic source U1: 275
ST+ cable Stiffness (ground), APS U2: 158
· splicing TM: 276 Stop
Stack · button, Operation U1: 236
· Correlation after, process type U1: 255 · Marking U1: 135
· Correlation before, process type · on error, TMS428 TM: 58
U1: 253 Stopping
· distance, VE432 U1: 622 · 428 server U1: 47
· distance, VE464 U1: 507 Streamer cable number (SEGD) U2: 22
· Impulsive, process type U1: 252 String
· Output button U1: 245 · gain, geophone U3: 225
· Vibroseismic, process type U1: 257 · group, geophone U3: 229
Stacking Fold · impedance, geophone U3: 225
· SEGD U2: 25 · wiring, geophones U3: 230
Stacking Fold, APS U2: 161 Subarrays, number of U2: 90, U2: 140
Stacks, number of Submersible

January 11, 2011
Index
· electronics IM: 258 · file syntax U1: 219

Subscan exponent U2: 21 · Signal type U1: 219
Superspread U1: 263 System
· Line window U1: 139 · shooting U1: 69
Support · tools, troubleshooting IM: 116
· customer U1: 79
Surface T
· elevation, reference U1: 391
· elevation, SPS U2: 77, U2: 125 T0
Surface elevation · mode, VE432 U1: 620
· Repeat Times, VE432 U1: 619
· SPS U2: 92, U2: 142
· setup, VE432 U1: 619
Survey
· description U1: 120
Table
· how to select U1: 33
· setup U1: 119
· operation U1: 232
Swath
· backup setup U1: 90
Tap
· test, LT428 IM: 282, IM: 309
· first line (SEGD) U2: 23
· first number (SEGD) U2: 23 Tape
· name U1: 92 · copy U3: 14
· number U1: 91 · drive IM: 29
· type U1: 554 · drive address
Sweep FUJI 3x90, displaying IM: 166
· drive, install U1: 71
· basic signal, VE432 (Acquisition type)
· Label U1: 443
U1: 612
· label (SEGD) U2: 26
· basic signal, VE464 (Acquisition type)
· label, external U1: 88
U1: 493
· Number U1: 443
· freq start, end (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 123
· number of files U1: 444
· frequency start,end (SPS) U2: 89,
· number, SEGD U2: 26
U2: 139
· set U1: 92
· length (SEGD) U2: 26
· set, creating U1: 442
· length, other vibrator systems U1: 656
· setup, Export window U1: 442
· length, OVC U1: 662
· type, format, density (SPS) U2: 73,
· return signal, VE432 U1: 615
· slip time U1: 317 U2: 85, U2: 121, U2: 135
· slip, enable U1: 268 Tape drive
· type, length (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 89, · address
U2: 123, U2: 139 3592 IM: 175
Switching FUJI 3x90, changing IM: 165
LTO IM: 171
· port (TMS428) TM: 98
· exporting to U1: 437
Sync
· high line, VE432 U1: 613
· interface card IM: 64
· high line, VE464 U1: 494
· supported IM: 164
Syntax (see Description)
Tape/disk identifier (SPS) U2: 71,
Synthetic
U2: 80, U2: 119, U2: 130
· file format U2: 55
Taper

January 11, 2011
Index
· length start, end (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 89, U1: 106
U2: 123, U2: 139 · Spread U1: 203
· VE432 U1: 595 · System, TMS428 IM: 31
· VE464 U1: 476 Test plan
TB · TMS428 TM: 56
· window, process type U1: 243 Test report
· window, SEGD U2: 23 · DSUT TM: 160
Tb to T0 time (SEGD) U2: 25 Test system
TB window · TMS428 TM: 25
· LSS U1: 296 Tested
TCXO, LCI board TM: 17 · Line Nb, LT428 IM: 284
TDMA U1: 496 Tester
· channel, Tracs TDMA U1: 498 · cable TM: 183
Template · reset TM: 52
· TMS428 tester TM: 45 Text
Terminal · box U1: 26
· Linux IM: 116 · how to select U1: 33
Test TFOI
· acceptance U3: 247 · board, replacing TM: 339, TM: 347
· Automatic U1: 270 · cable TM: 334
· cable calibration TM: 53 · connecting IM: 246
· customizing (TMS428) TM: 71 · disassembly instructions TM: 335,
· functions U1: 201 TM: 344
· functions, FDU U3: 147 · reassembly instructions TM: 342,
· generator, FDU calibration U3: 119 TM: 348
· Instrument, FDU U3: 152 Third Notch Frequency (SEGD) U2: 22
· limit Threshold
battery U1: 108 · COG radius U1: 393
Continuity U1: 124 · Hold/Var (SEGD) U2: 25
Leakage U1: 124 · Init U1: 285
Noise U1: 124 · Init Value, noise editing U1: 284
Sensor U1: 123 · Load U1: 285
Tilt U1: 124 · Save U1: 286
· limit file format U2: 51 · type tables (SEGD) U2: 25
· limits, LT428 IM: 281, IM: 287 · type, other vibrator systems U1: 657
· multiple U1: 210 · type, OVC U1: 662
· network, Resistance, FDU calibration · updating (noise elimination) U1: 369
U3: 128 Tilt
· record result recovery U3: 99 · correction, enable U1: 65, U1: 165
· Record, type (SEGD) U2: 23 · error (SEGD) U2: 35
· Running, DSUT TM: 141 · limit (SEGD) U2: 35
· running, TMS428 TM: 66 · Model U1: 208
· Sensor, FDU U3: 175 · test U1: 208, U3: 184
· sequence editor, DSUT TM: 139 DSU TM: 166
· setup U1: 201 · Test limit U1: 124
· shortcut (Topographic view) U1: 104,

January 11, 2011
Index
· test, Field (TMS428) TM: 80 · Calibration TM: 109

· test, theory U3: 205, U3: 214 · FDU calibration U3: 112
· value (SEGD) U2: 35 Tn
Tilt angle · basic sweep signal, VE432 U1: 602
· DSU3 trace correction formula U3: 245 · basic sweep signal, VE464 U1: 482
Time Tn, VE432 U1: 602
· delay, FTB-SOD (SPS) U2: 73, Tn, VE464 U1: 482
U2: 86, U2: 121, U2: 136 To channel (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 95,
· Division Multiplex, LRU U1: 192 U2: 127, U2: 145
· domain, correlation U3: 216 To receiver (SPS) U2: 78, U2: 96,
· exponential, plotter U1: 581 U2: 127, U2: 146
· Interpolation U1: 586 Toggle
· Length, plotter U1: 586 · button U1: 27
· listening U1: 243
Toolbar
· management U1: 84
· tests TM: 55
· Sequential, plotter U1: 585
· SPS U2: 77, U2: 93, U2: 125,
Tools
· maintenance, field electronics TM: 194
U2: 143
· Meter and test cables calibration
· Start, plotter U1: 586
TM: 53
Time break
· PCMCIA, VE432 U1: 642
· SEGD U2: 24
· Reset Meter TM: 52
· window, SEGD U2: 31
· Reset Tester Unit TM: 52
Time, APS U2: 161 · SRHRF cable splicing TM: 280
TMS428 IM: 31, TM: 25 · SRHRF FM4 plug replacement
· Connecting an FDU link TM: 60 TM: 289
· Connecting an FDU2S TM: 61 · ST+ cable splicing TM: 276
· Connecting an LAUL TM: 62 · ST+ FM4 plug replacement TM: 315
· Connecting an LAULS TM: 64 · STSR FM4 plug replacement TM: 304
· Connecting an LAUX TM: 63 · TMS428 TM: 52
· Connecting an LAUXS TM: 65 · USB key management IM: 116
· customizing tests TM: 71 · WPSR cable splicing TM: 280
· FDU calibration U3: 112 · WPSR FM4 plug replacement TM: 304
· firmware update TM: 52 Topographic
· Grounding TM: 31 · stake U1: 104
· installation TM: 31 · view U1: 101
· main window TM: 50
Total number of traces (SEGD) U2: 23
· software, installing TM: 33
· specifications TM: 27
Towing depth U2: 90, U2: 140
· Templates TM: 45 Trace
· Test plan TM: 56 · auxiliary, description U1: 248
· test reports TM: 68 · blocking U1: 444
TMS428 specifications · data block U2: 30
· edit (SEGD) U2: 31
· Electrical TM: 29
· Low U1: 284
· Environmental TM: 30
· Noisy percentage U1: 284
· Physical TM: 29
· Number (SEGD) U2: 31
TMU428 TM: 26

January 11, 2011
Index
· number of samples in U2: 23 Transmission

· polarity U3: 27 · Line port (TMS428) TM: 96
· selecting, plot U1: 577 · test IM: 302
· Sequential, plotter U1: 585 · test, Line (LT428) IM: 294
Trace Header · Transverse port (TMS428) TM: 97
· Extension (SEGD) U2: 31 · troubleshooting U1: 114
· Extension Block 1 (SEGD) U2: 32 Transverse
· Extension block 2 (SEGD) U2: 34 · connector, LAUX IM: 411
· Extension block 3 (SEGD) U2: 35 · data rate U3: 271
· Extension block 4 (SEGD) U2: 36 · port, transmission test (TMS428)
· Extension block 5 (SEGD) U2: 36 TM: 97
· Extension block 6 (SEGD) U2: 37 · test, LT428 IM: 282
· Extension block 7 (SEGD) U2: 39 Transverse (LT428) IM: 302
· Extensions (SEGD) U2: 22, U2: 32 TREP-428
· SEGD U2: 31 · connecting IM: 248
Traceability · disassembly instructions TM: 245
· DSU LP board TM: 154 · reassembly instructions TM: 246
· FDU, read (TMS428) TM: 86 Troubleshooting
· FDU, write (TMS428) TM: 86 · DSU TM: 148
· field equipment U1: 115 · Line U1: 213
· LAU, read (TMS428) TM: 104 · tools, system IM: 116
· LAU, write (TMS428) TM: 104 · Transmission U1: 114
Traces Type
· max number of U3: 273 · blaster U1: 69
· per inch U1: 585 · box, detour U1: 135
· total number of U2: 23 · Model, Polarity (SPS) U2: 73, U2: 74,
Traces, number of U2: 75, U2: 85, U2: 87, U2: 88,
· Aux U2: 23 U2: 121, U2: 122, U2: 123,
· Dead seis U2: 23 U2: 135, U2: 137, U2: 138
· Live seis U2: 23 · of process (SEGD) U2: 25
· Seismic U2: 23 · of source (SEGD) U2: 23
Tracking · plotter U1: 70
· box, installing IM: 203
· Positioning window U1: 412
· VE464 U1: 498
U
· vehicle setup U1: 395 ULS technology IM: 27
Tracs TDMA · deployment IM: 258
· Baud rate U1: 498 · Handling IM: 262
Trailer, general U2: 19 · in Line window U1: 166
Trans Uninstalling
· socket, replacing TM: 266 · client software IM: 150
Transfer · patch (client) IM: 139
· to drive, spec U3: 271 · patch (server) IM: 107
Transform · server software IM: 105
· Hilbert, VE432 U1: 607 Unit
· serial number (SEGD) U2: 37

January 11, 2011
Index
· type (SEGD) U2: 37 · registering U1: 43

Units · remote IM: 35, IM: 36, IM: 37
· how to select U1: 110 Utilities
· spacing X, Y (SPS) U2: 74, U2: 75, · LAU (TMS4028) TM: 100
U2: 87, U2: 88, U2: 122,
U2: 123, U2: 137, U2: 138 V
Unload
· tape U1: 448 V12 IM: 159
Unselect VA (plotter) U1: 585
· in Line topographic view U1: 110 Values
Update · query builder U1: 432
· field U1: 99, U1: 143, U1: 207, Valve Overload, APS U2: 161
U1: 208 Var/Hold U1: 285
· VE464 vib fleet U1: 513 VE432
Updating · connecting IM: 48
· firmware U1: 223 · DPG, connecting IM: 48
· firmware (TMS428) TM: 101 · functions U1: 625
· firmware, via XDEV IM: 111 · Version, APS U2: 161
· Number of FDUs in link, (LT428) VE464
IM: 312 · connecting IM: 47
· Number of FDUs in link, (TMS428) · functions U1: 510
TM: 110 Vehicle
· TMS428 firmware TM: 52 · Tracking box IM: 203
Upgrade Velocity
· firmware (TMS428) TM: 101 · baseplate, monitoring, VE432 U1: 615
Upgrading · mass, monitoring, VE432 U1: 615
· built-in LAUX TM: 107 · plotter U1: 581
· field electronics U1: 223 Verbose
· TMS428 firmware TM: 52 · APS report U1: 563
· via XDEV, field electronics IM: 111 Veritas IM: 159
Uphole Version
· time (SEGD) U2: 24 · firmware, reading (TMS428) TM: 100
· time (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 92, U2: 125, Vertical
U2: 142 · datum description (SPS) U2: 71,
Upload U1: 60 U2: 82, U2: 119, U2: 132
URL · Stack (SEGD) U2: 22
· opening a session U1: 39 Vib
USB · position accuracy U1: 394
· key IM: 116 · position Easting, APS U2: 158
User · position elevation, APS U2: 158
· account IM: 128 · position Northing, APS U2: 158
· info U1: 86 · Status Code, APS U2: 160
· interface table, DSUT TM: 135 Vibrator
· local IM: 34 · drive level (APS) U2: 158
· name U1: 59 · fleet (APS) U2: 158

January 11, 2011
Index
· guidance U1: 358 · enable U1: 267

· guidance, enabling U1: 267 · Hilbert transform, VE432 U1: 607
· number (APS) U2: 158 · VE432 U1: 341
· pattern setup, VE432 U1: 621 · VE464 U1: 328
· pattern setup, VE464 U1: 506
· QC choice, VE432 U1: 618
· QC choice, VE464 U1: 504
W
· QC limits, OVC U1: 664 Warnings
· QC limits, VE432 U1: 617 · DSUT TM: 169
· QC limits, VE464 U1: 503 Water
· Radio management, VE432 U1: 614 · depth (SPS) U2: 77, U2: 92, U2: 125,
· Radio management, VE464 U1: 496 U2: 142
· signals, recording IM: 254 · gun (SPS) U2: 76, U2: 124
· T0, VE432 U1: 619 Watertightness TM: 273
· type U1: 69 Waypoint
· type (SEGD) U2: 20 · first U1: 396
· VE464 Fleet function U1: 511 Weathering thickness (SPS) U2: 76,
Vibroseis (SPS) U2: 75, U2: 123 U2: 89, U2: 124, U2: 139
View Wiggle U1: 585
· Graphic, OVC (normal acquisition) Window
U1: 666 · Length, AGC U1: 581
· Graphic, VE432 (normal acquisition) · menu, TMS428 TM: 53
U1: 646 · Number of (noise) U1: 283
· Graphic, VE464 (normal acquisition) · TB U2: 23
U1: 533 · TB, process type U1: 243
· Histogram U1: 118 Wing
· menu, TMS428 TM: 53 · nut, replacing TM: 265
· numeric, Line window U1: 116 Wireless IM: 388
· Numeric, OVC (normal acquisition) WPSR cable
U1: 668 · splicing TM: 280
· Numeric, VE432 (normal acquisition)
Write
U1: 649
· traceability, FDU (TMS428) TM: 86
· Numeric, VE464 (normal acquisition)
· traceability, LAU (TMS428) TM: 104
U1: 536
· user info (TMS428) TM: 101
· topographic, line U1: 101
Wz Velocity, AGC U1: 581
Viscosity (ground), APS U2: 158
Voltage
· port (TMS428) TM: 92 X
· reference, FDU (TMS428) TM: 84 XDEV
· reference, FDU calibration U3: 115 · connector, LAUL IM: 407, IM: 410
VP · connector, LAUX IM: 412
· grabbing radius U1: 393 · socket, replacing TM: 269
· Id U1: 260 · upgrading field electronics IM: 111
· to do, increment U1: 275 Xdump
VSR · Output button U1: 245
· deployment IM: 254

January 11, 2011
Index
Xmit
· test, Line ( LT428) IM: 294
· test, Transverse (LT428) IM: 302
Y
Year (SEGD) U2: 17
Z
Zeroed
· channel U1: 136
Zeroing
· Length (noise) U1: 283
· method (noise elimination) U1: 369
· noise editing type U1: 283
· Taper Length (noise) U1: 283
Zoom
· Line window U1: 111

January 11, 2011
Index

January 11, 2011

En 428 Install

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

En 428 Install

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

428XL

Ref. No. 0311428 January 11, 2011

Ahead of the Curve SM

© 2005 Sercel. All Rights Reserved.

DSUGPS: US Patent 7,117,094 B2.

January 11, 2011 3

4 January 11, 2011

January 11, 2011 5

6 January 11, 2011

I. SOFTWARE LICENCE II. PROPRIETARY RIGHTS

428XL Installation Manual 7

8 428XL Installation Manual

428XL Installation Manual 9

Cabling to VE464 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

3 Server software installation

10 428XL Installation Manual

Using the Line window’s Download setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

4 Client software installation

428XL Installation Manual 11

12 428XL Installation Manual

MDR or RVT300 virtual tape recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

7 Field equipment deployment

428XL Installation Manual 13

Auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

8 LT428 Line Tester

14 428XL Installation Manual

Xmit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294

9 428XL Radio telemetry

428XL Installation Manual 15

16 428XL Installation Manual

10 LLX400 laser link

11 Ethernet Radio Bridge

12 Connectors and cables

428XL Installation Manual 17

A Glossary of abbreviations and acronyms

18 428XL Installation Manual

• Overview (page 20)

428XL Installation Manual 19

20 428XL Installation Manual

428XL Installation Manual 21

428 Link LAUL

LCI-428 428XL server

Figure 1-1 The 428XL system

22 428XL Installation Manual

LAUX-428 and LAUL-428

recording system. The LAUL and

428XL Installation Manual 23

The 3-axis type comes in three design versions: DSU3-428 and

24 428XL Installation Manual

428XL Transverse Cable

Figure 1-5 TFOI fibre optics interface and cable

Radio Telemetry Option

428XL Installation Manual 25

from point to point. The LRU acts also

Figure 1-9 HSU

Submersible (ULS) field electronics

428XL Installation Manual 27

• UL-ULS jumper cables, used for transition from the land

Figure 1-10 FDU2S

e-428 System Software

28 428XL Installation Manual

428 Lite break-out box

428XL Installation Manual 29